726+,%$
Telecommunication Systems Division
Digital Business Telephone Systems
Programming Manual
Includes information for CTX WinAdminTM Version 1.10
December 2001

---

Strata CTX100 and CTX670
3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items
General End User Information
2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M,
The Strata CTX100 or CTX670 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Radio Frequency Interference
Commission's Rules and Regulations.
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
FCC Requirements
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
established rules which permit the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system to be connected
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
company--connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
interference.
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
U
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
® L
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
Important Notice -- Music-On-Hold
log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/locator.htm or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a
Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
compatibility or use of the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 system, the telephone company
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted
service.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CTX100 or CTX670
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
1. Your telephone number.
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
2. FCC registration number:
the Equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
·
Strata CTX100 or CTX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
upon your operation of the system.
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
·
If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
service in some situations.
be registered as a Key telephone system.
·
If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
the user to disconnect the equipment.
telephone system registration in some areas.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
·
If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
for assistance.
CTX100 Registration Numbers
CJMUL-3531-PFE
CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
CJMUL-3530-MF-E
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
CJMUL-3529-KF-E
electrician, as appropriate.
·
CTX670 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
·
Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to
one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact
your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling
area.
Publication Information
© Copyright 2001
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
Telecommunication Systems Division
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means--graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems--without
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a registered
trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Strata AirLink, Call Center
Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
CTX-MA-PRGRM-VA
December 2001
4016203

---

TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. ("TAIS")
Telecommunication Systems Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU ("YOU") AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, "SOFTWARE") INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE
AVAILABLE TO YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE
SUPPLIER. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION
FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR
DISTRIBUTION ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software is strictly
prohibited; You agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against You or any other person in possession of the Software.
You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not
to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that You or any other person violates this License
Agreement.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein will
result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS' ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS' OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government, its agencies and/or instrumentalities is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988) or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be
affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
TSD 081601
5932

---

Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., ("TAIS") warrants that this voice processing equipment (except for
fuses, lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in
new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This
warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the
equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the
equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by
someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment's serial number is defaced or missing, or
(f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which
are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with
respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing
parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized
dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer's sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by
TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its
authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever
first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special,
indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will
any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is
malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention
of one of TAIS' authorized dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after
such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS
dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS,
INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE
EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such
modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager,
Telecommunication Systems Division.

---

Contents
Introduction
Organization ........................................................................................................................................... ix
Conventions............................................................................................................................................. x
Related Documents/Media ..................................................................................................................... xi
General Description ......................................................................................................................... xi
Installation and Programming ......................................................................................................... xi
User Guides ..................................................................................................................................... xi
Quick Reference Guides .................................................................................................................. xi
CD-ROMs........................................................................................................................................ xi
Chapter 1 ­ CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Application Software ...............................................................................................1-2
Flexible Communication Interface.......................................................................................................1-2
Internet Access .....................................................................................................................................1-2
Chapter 2 ­ Installation
Hardware ..............................................................................................................................................2-1
Hardware Requirements ................................................................................................................2-1
Hardware Installation ....................................................................................................................2-1
Windows 2000 Installation ..................................................................................................................2-2
Step 1: Install Windows 2000.......................................................................................................2-2
Step 2: Install Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 ..............................................................................2-2
Guided Software Installation................................................................................................................2-2
Advanced Software Installation ...........................................................................................................2-2
Step 1: Install/Set up Remote Access Service .............................................................................2-2
Step 2: Set up Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin .................................................................2-3
Step 3: Install Internet and Personal Web Services......................................................................2-4
Step 4: Install and Set up Internet Explorer 5.5............................................................................2-4
Step 5: Add SNMP Services.........................................................................................................2-4
Step 6: Install WMI SNMP Package ............................................................................................2-4
Step 7: Install CTX WinAdmin ....................................................................................................2-4
Step 8: Set Up Personal Web Tools..............................................................................................2-5
Step 9: Set up CTX WinAdmin for a LAN Network ...................................................................2-6
Step 10: Assign IP Address to Strata CTX...................................................................................2-7
Chapter 3 ­ Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up ..........................................................................3-1
Limitations.....................................................................................................................................3-2
Station and BIOU Auto-Programming ..........................................................................................3-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
i

---

Contents
System
Station PDN Auto-Programming...................................................................................................3-3
CO Line Auto Programming .........................................................................................................3-3
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto Programming...........................................................3-6
Default Feature Access Codes .......................................................................................................3-7
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements ...........................................................................................3-7
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time .................................................................................................3-7
Review Program Flow ...................................................................................................................3-9
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences ................................................................................................3-10
Station Setup................................................................................................................................3-10
Trunk Setup ­ Analog..................................................................................................................3-10
Trunk Setup ­ T1.........................................................................................................................3-11
Trunk Setup ­ ISDN PRI.............................................................................................................3-11
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................3-12
Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX ................................................................................3-13
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI ..............................................................................................3-16
CTX WinAdmin Pages................................................................................................................3-16
CTX WinAdmin Toolbar.............................................................................................................3-17
Command Table Link ..................................................................................................................3-17
Station Assignment Menu ...........................................................................................................3-18
Create, Clone, Copy and Delete ..................................................................................................3-20
Chapter 4 ­ System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments.....................................................................................................4-1
Card Assignment Record Sheets ...................................................................................................4-2
102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes .......................................................................................4-4
Flexible Numbering Default Settings ............................................................................................4-4
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis ....................................................................................................4-7
103 Class of Service.............................................................................................................................4-8
COS Record Sheet .......................................................................................................................4-10
104 System Timer ..............................................................................................................................4-11
105 System Data ................................................................................................................................4-13
System Call Forward..........................................................................................................................4-16
500 System Call Forward Assignment ........................................................................................4-16
504 System Call Forward Operation Status ................................................................................4-17
System Call Forward Record Sheets ..........................................................................................4-17
501 System Speed Dial ......................................................................................................................4-18
Day Night Service ..............................................................................................................................4-20
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar....................................................................................................4-20
106 Day/Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment.............................................4-21
113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule Assignment .....................................................................4-21
Day/Night Mode Record Sheet....................................................................................................4-22
PAD Table..........................................................................................................................................4-23
107 PAD Table Assignment ........................................................................................................4-23
108 PAD Group Assignment.......................................................................................................4-24
114 PAD Conference Assignment...............................................................................................4-25
110 Password .....................................................................................................................................4-26
109 Music on Hold.............................................................................................................................4-27
I/O Device ..........................................................................................................................................4-28
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment ..............................................................................4-28
ii
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Contents
Station
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments ...................................................................................4-29
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup ............................................................................................4-31
115 Advisory Messages .....................................................................................................................4-32
116 Data Initialize ..............................................................................................................................4-33
Chapter 5 ­ Station
Assignment...........................................................................................................................................5-1
Basic/200 Station Data ..................................................................................................................5-1
204 DKT Parameters .....................................................................................................................5-6
214 DSS Console Assignment.....................................................................................................5-12
Key...............................................................................................................................................5-13
Data..............................................................................................................................................5-20
Page Group ..................................................................................................................................5-22
206 Phantom DN................................................................................................................................5-23
209 Hunt Group..................................................................................................................................5-26
Hunt Group Record Sheet............................................................................................................5-28
218 Station Hunt Assignments ....................................................................................................5-29
516 Station Speed Dial.......................................................................................................................5-30
Station Data Record Sheets .........................................................................................................5-31
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................5-32
202 ISDN BRI Station.................................................................................................................5-32
217 ISDN Station Data ................................................................................................................5-37
Chapter 6 ­ Trunks
ILG .......................................................................................................................................................6-1
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment .........................................................................................6-2
306 Outgoing Line Groups...................................................................................................................6-5
300 Trunk Assignment.........................................................................................................................6-8
313 Caller ID Assignment..................................................................................................................6-12
Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet............................................................................................6-13
309 Direct Inward Dialing .................................................................................................................6-14
DID Assignment Record Sheet....................................................................................................6-17
318 DID Intercept Assignments.........................................................................................................6-18
DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet ....................................................................................6-21
Service................................................................................................................................................6-22
311 DISA Security Code .............................................................................................................6-22
319 Intercept Treatment...............................................................................................................6-22
Timer/DIT ..........................................................................................................................................6-23
308 Trunk Timer..........................................................................................................................6-23
310 DIT Assignment ...................................................................................................................6-24
315 T1 Trunk Card.............................................................................................................................6-26
ISDN ..................................................................................................................................................6-27
317 ISDN BRI Trunk ..................................................................................................................6-27
302 PRI Trunks............................................................................................................................6-32
Call-by-Call .................................................................................................................................6-37
320 B Channel .............................................................................................................................6-40
316 Shared D Channel.................................................................................................................6-41
Calling Number ...........................................................................................................................6-43
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
iii

---

Contents
Attendant
Chapter 7 ­ Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment........................................................................................................7-1
Attendant Group Record Sheet......................................................................................................7-2
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment .....................................................................................7-3
Chapter 8 ­ Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment ....................................................................................................................8-1
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet ..............................................................................................8-3
Voice Mail............................................................................................................................................8-4
Voice Mail Ports Only...................................................................................................................8-4
Telephone Station Ports.................................................................................................................8-4
579 System Voice Mail Data.........................................................................................................8-5
580 Voice Mail Port Data ..............................................................................................................8-7
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction.........................................................................................8-9
LCR/DR Overview ........................................................................................................................8-9
LCR Assignment .........................................................................................................................8-11
Route Define................................................................................................................................8-13
Route Schedule ............................................................................................................................8-16
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones........................................................................................8-18
DR Overview ...............................................................................................................................8-20
LCR/DR Screening......................................................................................................................8-24
DR................................................................................................................................................8-27
Account Codes.............................................................................................................................8-30
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial .....................................................................................8-32
510 COS Override Assignment ...................................................................................................8-33
Networking.........................................................................................................................................8-35
Strata Net Private Networking.....................................................................................................8-35
Configuration...............................................................................................................................8-41
Strata Net Programming Overview ....................................................................................................8-42
Step 1: Basic Incoming Network Calls.......................................................................................8-42
Step 2: Basic Outgoing Network Calls.......................................................................................8-42
656 Node ID Assignment ............................................................................................................8-43
Private Route Choice Definition..................................................................................................8-45
Mapping.......................................................................................................................................8-47
Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................8-50
External Devices ................................................................................................................................8-55
Door Phones ................................................................................................................................8-55
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments..............................................................................8-60
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments ....................................................................................8-61
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group ........................................................................................8-62
Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet......................................................................8-63
Chapter 9 ­ Operation
System Setup ........................................................................................................................................9-1
900 CTX Restart............................................................................................................................9-2
901 Display Version ......................................................................................................................9-3
902 Set Time and Date ..................................................................................................................9-4
908 Smart Media ..................................................................................................................................9-4
CTX Smart Media Directories.......................................................................................................9-5
iv
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Contents
Maintenance
911 Remote Program Update ...............................................................................................................9-7
910 Data Backup ..................................................................................................................................9-8
916 TCP/IP Configuration .................................................................................................................9-10
FTP User Accounts ............................................................................................................................9-10
File Information .................................................................................................................................9-11
Community Name ..............................................................................................................................9-12
909 MAC Address..............................................................................................................................9-13
Trap Destinations ...............................................................................................................................9-14
License Control ..................................................................................................................................9-15
License Issue................................................................................................................................9-15
License Activate ..........................................................................................................................9-16
License Information ...........................................................................................................................9-16
Chapter 10 ­ Maintenance
Trace Function ...................................................................................................................................10-1
Trace Data....................................................................................................................................10-1
Event Trace Control ...........................................................................................................................10-3
903 Start/Stop Trace ....................................................................................................................10-3
904 ISDN Trace Location............................................................................................................10-4
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection ..........................................................................................10-4
906 Change Trace Side................................................................................................................10-4
Error Alarm Log.................................................................................................................................10-5
907 System Admin Log .....................................................................................................................10-6
Memory Access Operation.................................................................................................................10-7
Flash Memory Test ............................................................................................................................10-7
Component Status/Control .................................................................................................................10-8
Main.............................................................................................................................................10-8
Chapter 11 ­ Tools and Profile
Tools...................................................................................................................................................11-1
Download.....................................................................................................................................11-1
Profile .................................................................................................................................................11-2
Customize ....................................................................................................................................11-2
User Management........................................................................................................................11-3
Appendix A ­ Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 1: Install Windows NT 4.0 Workstation .................................................................................. A-1
Step 2: Install Windows NT 4.0 SP6a ............................................................................................... A-1
Step 3: Install/Set up RAS ................................................................................................................. A-2
Install RAS ................................................................................................................................... A-2
Set up RAS ................................................................................................................................... A-2
Step 4: Add SNMP Services to Your Network Settings ................................................................... A-3
Step 5: Install and Set up Internet Explorer 5.5 ................................................................................ A-3
Step 6: Install Windows NT Workstation Option Pack 4.0 .............................................................. A-3
Step 7: Install WMI Packages ........................................................................................................... A-4
WMI Core Package ...................................................................................................................... A-4
WMI SNMP Package ................................................................................................................... A-4
Step 8: Install CTX WinAdmin ......................................................................................................... A-4
Step 9: Set Up Personal Web Tools .................................................................................................. A-5
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
v

---

Contents
Tools and Profile
Step 10: Set up Private Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin ........................................................ A-6
Step 11: Verify Communications from a Command Prompt ............................................................ A-7
Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation ................................................................................... A-8
Correcting NIC Recognition Errors.............................................................................................. A-8
Appendix B ­ Button Programming
Record Sheet Overview....................................................................................................................... B-2
Programming Section Layout....................................................................................................... B-2
Telephone Button Overview ............................................................................................................... B-3
Telephone Button Commands ...................................................................................................... B-4
Button Programming Examples .......................................................................................................... B-6
Program 100 ................................................................................................................................. B-6
Program 200 ................................................................................................................................. B-6
Program 204 ................................................................................................................................. B-7
Program 208 ................................................................................................................................. B-7
Program 205 ................................................................................................................................. B-7
Button Programming Procedures ........................................................................................................ B-8
100 Series Programs............................................................................................................................ B-9
200 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-16
300 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-26
400 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-35
500 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-35
600 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-43
800 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-44
Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................................................... B-46
SmartMedia Card........................................................................................................................ B-46
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................... B-46
Restoring Programmed Data ...................................................................................................... B-47
Local Update ..................................................................................................................................... B-48
Strata CTX100 Update ............................................................................................................... B-48
Strata CTX670 Update ............................................................................................................... B-50
Trace Function .................................................................................................................................. B-52
900 Series Programs.......................................................................................................................... B-52
System Initialize ......................................................................................................................... B-52
Display Version .......................................................................................................................... B-53
Set Time and Date ...................................................................................................................... B-54
ISDN Trace Location.................................................................................................................. B-56
All ISDN Trunk Trace................................................................................................................ B-57
Event Trace Side Change ........................................................................................................... B-58
System Admin Log ..................................................................................................................... B-58
Format/Unmount SmartMedia.................................................................................................... B-59
MAC Address (System Serial Number) ..................................................................................... B-60
Data Backup ............................................................................................................................... B-60
Program Update .......................................................................................................................... B-62
Make Busy Control..................................................................................................................... B-63
Green intermittent blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle................................................. B-64
Regional Selection ...................................................................................................................... B-64
IP Configuration ......................................................................................................................... B-64
Appendix C ­ System Error Codes
vi
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Contents
Tools and Profile
Common Error Code Table................................................................................................................. C-2
System Programming Error Codes...................................................................................................... C-3
Station Programming Error Codes ...................................................................................................... C-5
Trunk Programming Error Codes...................................................................................................... C-13
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes ................................................................................. C-20
Service Programming Error Codes ................................................................................................... C-21
Networking Programming Error Codes ............................................................................................ C-26
Equipment Programming Error Codes.............................................................................................. C-26
Index ......................................................................................................................................................IN-1
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
vii

---

Contents
Tools and Profile
viii
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Introduction
This manual provides information required to program the Strata CTX670 business telephone
system using Toshiba's proprietary CTX WinAdminTM software.
Organization
This manual is organized as follows:
·
Chapter 1 ­ CTX WinAdmin Overview provides general information about CTX
WinAdmin's software capabilities.
·
Chapter 2 ­ CTX Installation discusses system hardware and software requirements for CTX
WinAdmin and explains the installation steps needed to run CTX WinAdmin.
·
Chapter 3 ­ CTX Programming Guidelines describes how to access Strata CTX through
CTX WinAdmin.
·
Chapter 4 ­ System provides system programming information.
·
Chapter 5 ­ Station discusses station and station feature programming.
·
Chapter 6 ­ Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
·
Chapter 7 ­ Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in CTX
WinAdmin.
·
Chapter 8 ­ Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CTX through
CTX WinAdmin.
·
Chapter 9 ­ Operation explains system setup options available to CTX WinAdmin users.
System initialization, Smart Media formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol
(IP) configuration are among the topics discussed.
·
Chapter 10 ­ Maintenance provides system and component trace program information. CTX
WinAdmin Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
·
Chapter 11 ­ Tools and Profile discusses Strata CTX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CTX System more efficiently.
·
Appendix A ­ Windows NT 4.0 Installation explains how to install and setup CTX
WinAdmin in a Windows NT environment.
·
Appendix B ­ Button Programming provides limited information for the button
programming interface for Strata CTX programming.
·
Appendix C ­ System Error Codes is a reference for error codes encountered during CTX
WinAdmin programming.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
ix

---

Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
Note
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply
to specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
CAUTION!
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING!
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
[DN]
or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
[PDN]
number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears
[SDN]
on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
$ULDO %ROG
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
"Type"
Indicates entry of a string of text.
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
"Press"
Enter.
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:
Plus (+)
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential
entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means "through." Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.

Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.

Denotes a procedure.
Start > Settings >
Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you
Printers
should select.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
See Figure 10
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
x
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print.
To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on
the back of the document's title page.
General Description
·
Strata CTX Installation and Maintenance Manual
Installation and Programming
·
Strata CTX Programming Manual
User Guides
·
Strata CTX DKT3000/2000-series Digital Telephone
·
Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
·
Strata CTX DKT2104-CT Cordless Telephone
·
Strata CTX DKT2004-CT Cordless Telephone
·
Strata CTX Standard Telephone
Quick Reference Guides
·
Digital Telephone
CD-ROMs
·
Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and Documentation Library
·
Strata CTX Quote
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CTX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
xi

---

Introduction
Related Documents/Media
xii
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

CTX WinAdmin Overview
1
CTX W
Ov
er
i
vie
nAdm
w
in
CTX WinAdmin is a powerful Microsoft® Windows® based telephone system management tool
used to program, maintain and upgrade the Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System. CTX
WinAdmin uses a variety of networking and software technologies as follows:
·
Virtual Local Area Network (LAN) ­ System Administrators can connect their PC to Strata
CTX via a network interface jack or modem. CTX WinAdmin views the Strata CTX system as
a LAN providing a stable environment in which to program and access data.
·
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) ­ enables query-based information retrieval
and event notification. WMI is an access mechanism which enables CTX WinAdmin to access,
monitor, command and control Strata CTX.
·
Virtual Web Server and Manager ­ creates a virtual World Wide Web environment in Strata
CTX. This technology enables CTX WinAdmin to view Strata CTX as if it were an Internet
Service Provider (ISP), providing secure passage for System Administrators.
·
Microsoft Internet Explorer® browser access ­ Virtual Web Service enables System
Administrators to access Strata CTX using the Internet Explorer browser.
·
CTX WinAdmin Graphical User Interface (GUI) ­ Sophisticated programming tasks are
just a click-of-the-mouse away with CTX WinAdmin's GUI.
·
Mobile Access ­ enables System Administrators to program, maintain, and/or upgrade a Strata
CTX from any mobile location with an Internet connection--without ever leaving the office.
CTX WinAdmin's tight integration of the above technologies provide System Administrators with
convenient, stable, user friendly and comprehensive access to Strata CTX system information.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
1-1

---

CTX WinAdmin Overview
CTX WinAdmin Application Software
CTX WinAdmin Application Software
The CTX WinAdmin operates in a user friendly Windows environment featuring interactive GUI
pages.
Toolbar
Program Details
Program Name
Program Menu
Alarm Notification
Flexible Communication Interface
CTX WinAdmin can connect directly to your Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System via
Network Interface (included with Strata CTX's BECU board and required on your PC), Modem
Interface, or SMDR/SMDI Serial/RS-232 Interface. Mobile System Administrators can access a
Strata CTX system from any location that provides Internet access.
Internet Access
CTX WinAdmin uses Microsoft IP technology to enable access to your Strata CTX as easy as
browsing the World Wide Web.
·
Personal Web Server and Manager ­ Microsoft's Personal Web Server and Manager option
package enables you to build a web environment between your Strata CTX and your PC.
·
Internet Explorer ­ Internet Explorer provides a stable environment in which to program,
maintain and upgrade your Strata CTX.
1-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Installation
2
Ins
talla
This chapter discusses connecting your CTX WinAdmin PC to your Strata CTX system and CTX
tion
WinAdmin software installation on your PC.
Important!
Before beginning CTX WinAdmin software installation, it is critical to ensure that
your PC complies with the hardware and software requirements set forth in this
chapter.
Hardware
Hardware Requirements
The following are minimum PC requirements for CTX WinAdmin to operate properly:
·
Intel® Pentium® 180 MHz
·
64MB RAM
·
1.6GB hard drive
·
SVGA Card and Monitor
·
CD-ROM Drive
·
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Hardware Installation
Connect the Strata CTX to your CTX WinAdmin PC. See the Strata CTX I&M Manual for
more hardware installation details.
Important!
If you are connecting to Strata CTX directly without using a Network hub, a special
RJ45 crossover cable is required. See the Strata CTX I&M Manual for detailed
specifications and instructions.
To connect your CTX WinAdmin PC directly to the Strata CTX
1. Plug the RJ45 crossover cable into your PC's NIC slot.
2. Plug the opposite end of your RJ45 crossover cable into the Strata CTX Network Interface jack.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
2-1

---

Installation
Windows 2000 Installation
Windows 2000 Installation
Do the steps here before doing Guided or Advanced Software Installation.
Note Toshiba highly recommends using Microsoft Windows 2000 with CTX WinAdmin.
However, CTX WinAdmin can operate in a Windows NT 4.0 Workstation environment.
Installation instructions are provided in "Windows NT 4.0 Installation" on page A-1.
Step 1: Install Windows 2000
1. Install Windows 2000 on your PC. Enable Network participation during installation.
2. If you are installing a modem, place it in its proper PC slot before installing the OS to ensure
automatic installation of Remote Access Service (RAS).
Step 2: Install Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows 2000".
2. Select "Windows 2000 Service Pack 2" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Once you complete the above steps, choose Guided or Advanced Installation Software below.
Guided Software Installation
These is the fastest, easiest way to install CTX WinAdmin.
1. Place the WinAdmin CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2. From the Main Menu, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then select "Windows 2000".
3. Select "Run Guided Install" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Advanced Software Installation
Important!
Some of the steps in this appendix require that you have certain patches/options -
available on the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM through executable files or via Internet
access. Therefore you must have Internet access to perform this entire installation.
Step 1: Install/Set up Remote Access Service
CTX WinAdmin requires Dial-Up Networking (DUN) which uses RAS services to connect
through a modem. Complete this procedure even if you do not have a modem.
Important!
Set up RAS whether you intend to connect to Strata CTX via modem or a LAN.
Make sure your COM ports are set up correctly even if you do not have a modem.
1. Click Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up Connection > Make New Connection.
2. Click Next. Select radio button Dial-up to private network and click Next.
3. Do not enter Phone number, then click Next
Note Enter phone number for Dial up when setting up the Profile in Strata CTX WinAdmin. See
"Profile" on page 11-2.
4. Select radio button For all users, then click Next.
5. Use the recommended setting (Enable on-demand dialing) and Click Next.
2-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
6. Type RemoteNhs1 in Connection
Wizard (shown right), then click
Finish.
7. The Connect RemoteNhs1 screen is
displayed.
Note The User name field on this
screen will automatically be
populated.
8. Click on the Properties button of the
Connect RemoteNhs1 screen.
Ins
9. The RemoteNhs1 screen is
talla
displayed. Select Internet Protocol
tion
(TCP/IP) in the Components
checked are used by this connection
box. Then click Properties button.
10.The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties screen is displayed. Enter the IP address. The IP
address is the static IP address for the PC used when using this modem connection. Click OK.
11. The initial setup screen is displayed. Exit here.
Step 2: Set up Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin
CTX WinAdmin can communicate with Strata CTX from any location that provides modem, LAN
or WAN connections. You can connect your CTX WinAdmin PC with Strata CTX using an RJ45
crossover cable (see the Strata CTX I&M Manual for more details) to create a Virtual Private LAN
environment.
1. Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connections > Local Area Connections.
2. Click on Properties.
3. Double-click on Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP)/Internet Protocol (IP). The Internet
Protocol (TC/IP) Properties screen displays
(shown right).
4. Click in the Use the "Use the following IP
Address" radio button.
5. In the IP address field enter
192.168.255.251.
6. Enter 255.255.255.0. in the Subnet Mask
field. Leave the DNS Server addresses blank.
7. Click OK.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
2-3

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
Step 3: Install Internet and Personal Web Services
Install the Personal Web Manager and Internet Information Services (IIS).
1. Insert the Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and wait for the Auto Play menu
to display.
2. Click Add-on Components.
3. Check Internet Information Services (IIS) and Networking Services.
4. Follow the installation directions.
Step 4: Install and Set up Internet Explorer 5.5
If your PC does not have Internet Explorer, or you have and version earlier than version 5.5,
install/upgrade it.
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows 2000".
2. Select "Internet Explorer 5.5" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Step 5: Add SNMP Services
1. From the Control Panel, select Add/Remove Programs.
2. Click on Add/Remove Windows Components.
3. Check Management and Monitoring Tools.
4. Click Detail.
5. Check Simple Network Management Protocol.
6. Click Next and follow the directions to complete installation. You may need the Windows 2000
CD-ROM.
Step 6: Install WMI SNMP Package
Locate and install your WMI SNMP package.
...or
if you have Internet access, from the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select
"Install CTX WinAdmin", then select "Windows 2000". Then select "WMI SNMP Package.
This will take you the Microsoft site so that you download the package.
Step 7: Install CTX WinAdmin
1. Place the into your CD-ROM drive.
2. From the Main Menu of your WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows 2000."
3. Select "Run Advanced Install" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Note Installation takes approximately 15 minutes on a dedicated PC equipped with the minimum
requirements listed on page 2-1. This installation does not run in the "background."
Opening and/or running other applications during this installation can damage the
installation and/or your PC.
2-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
Step 8: Set Up Personal Web Tools
Before using CTX WinAdmin, create a Web site using Personal Web Server.
Important!
Perform this operation only once.
1. From the Control Panel select
Administrative Tools > Personal
Web Manager.
The Personal Web Manager
dialog box is displayed (shown
right).
Ins
2. Press the Stop Button.
talla
3. Click on the Advanced icon to
tion
create a virtual directory for your
web site.
The Advanced Options dialog
box appears.
4. Press the Add button. The Add
Directory dialog box appears.
5. Press the Browse button and browse to C:\Nhs\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_Local. Make
sure Ctmc_Local is highlighted and click OK.
6. In Alias: enter Ctmc_Local.
7. Click OK.
8. Click on the Main icon and press the Start button.
9. From the Control Panel, select
Administrative Tools > Internet Services
Manager.
10. Double-click on Internet Services Manager
and click on "+" displayed to the left of the
icon with your PC's name.
11. Click on Default Web Site. Right-click on
Ctmc_Local and select Properties.
12. Duplicate the settings shown in the figure
to the right and click Apply.
13. Click OK.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
2-5

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
14. From the Administrative Tools dialog box select
Component Services > Computers > My
Computers > COM+ Applications.
15. Right-click on IIS-{Default Web Site//Root/
Ctmc_Local} and select Properties.
16. Click on the Security Tab and duplicate the
settings shown in the figure to the right.
17. Click on the Identity tab and make sure the
"Interactive user - the current logged on user"
radio button is selected.
18. Click OK.
19. Open the Control Panel.
20. Double-click on Users. IIS creates two new users as
follows:
·
IUSR_YOURCOMPUTERNAME
·
IWAM_YOURCOMPUTERNAME
21. Double-click on IUSR_YOURCOMPUTERNAME and
click on the Group Membership tab (shown right).
22. Click in the "Other:" radio button and select
"Administrators" from the scroll down menu.
23. Click Apply, then click OK.
24. Repeat Steps 15~17 for
IWAM_YOURCOMPUTERNAME.
25. CTX WinAdmin is now setup to communicate with
Strata CTX.
Step 9: Set up CTX WinAdmin for a LAN Network
Note If you do not know the values to enter in the required fields, contact your System
Administrator (the values shown are examples only). You do not need to be connected to
Strata CTX to perform this task.
1. Establish Communications with Strata CTX by following the directions in the Strata CTX I&M
Manual.
2. From the CTX WinAdmin Program Menu Bar select Operation/IP Configuration.
3. In TCP/IP Configuration (Program 916) enter the following:
·
IP Address ­ enter the IP address for your LAN (e.g., 159.119.6.35).
·
Subnet Mask ­ enter the Subnet Mask for your LAN (e.g., 255.255.0.0).
4. On the Toolbar, click submit. Your Private Network is disconnected and an operation failure
error message is displayed.
5. Close your CTX WinAdmin session.
2-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
6. Set up TCP/IP for CTX WinAdmin by following the directions in "Set up Network Settings for
CTX WinAdmin" above.
Step 10: Assign IP Address to Strata CTX
1. From a DKT with LCD connected to the Strata CTX System enter +ROG .
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter .
3. Press +ROG.
4. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
5. Press Feature Button 1.
Ins
6. At the TCP IP1= prompt enter , 6SNU, , 6SNU, , 6SNU, and +ROG.
talla
7. Press Feature Button 2.
tion
8. At the SNM IP1= prompt enter , 6SNU, , 6SNU, , 6SNU, and +ROG.
9. Press Feature Button 3.
10. At the DGW IP1= prompt enter , 6SNU, , 6SNU, , 6SNU, and +ROG.
11. Press +ROG WZLFH.
CTX WinAdmin is now ready to communicate and program your Strata CTX System. To verify
communications see "Verify Communications from a Command Prompt" on page A-7.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
2-7

---

Installation
Advanced Software Installation
2-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
3
This chapter discusses Strata CTX programming basics using Strata CTX WinAdmin and takes
you through initial setup procedures. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline
your programming tasks.
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start
up
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CTX systems. The Strata CTX system
will automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that
Pr
St
are installed in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for
og
r
r
a
auto-programming is provided in this section.
a
ta
m
C
m
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
T
in X
g

2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify "Station and BIOU Auto-Programming" on page 3-2.
4. Verify "Station PDN Auto-Programming" on page 3-3
5. Verify "CO Line Auto Programming" on page 3-3.
6. Verify "CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto Programming" on page 3-6.
Notes
·
The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system
initialization; or, when powering the CTX processor for the first time.
·
Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet
and slot position of the PCB.
·
Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order
according to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
·
Other default data, such as the Strata CTX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and
line class of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc. are automatically set for the
optional hardware originally installed.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-1

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up
Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CTX Auto-Programming.
·
The CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
·
Strata CTX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CTX's LAN
system data, CTX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note The DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
·
When the system is initialized it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
·
The Prime DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons;
all other buttons have no assigned feature.
·
Slot 101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The BDKU is assigned if no PCB is
installed.
Station and BIOU Auto-Programming
Table 1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during
auto-programming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU during auto-programming.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CTX I/M manual, Configuration
Chapter, Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 3-1 Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
Parameter
PCB Code
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Comments
setting
000
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote Cabinets
8 Standard Telephone
Standard telephone no VM interface
002
RSTU
circuits
settings
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without S-
OCA (DKT300 imitations: DKT2000,
PCM
16 character LCD display on
003
PDKU2 8
Digital
Telephone
Highway: 8
DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature
key does not function, DKT3014
large screen LCD does not display).
004
Not used
Not used
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without S-
017
BDKU
8 digital telephones
8, 1B circuits
OCA
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without S-
018
BDKU1+BDKS
16 digital telephones
16, 1B circuits OCA
Page/MOH/Relay
019
BIOU
No functions assigned
interface#1
No functions assigned. Strata CTX
Page/MOH/Relay
100 assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a
020
BIOU2
interface#2
virtual location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05,
to provide control of the ACTU relay.
3-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up
Station PDN Auto-Programming
When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs it assigns PDNs in numerical order as
follows:
·
Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless
of the circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU).
·
PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having
the lowest equipment number in the system, then the PDN is incremented by one digit and
assigned to the next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 3-2.
·
Program 205 Feature key setting ­ A Prime DN (PDN) is assigned to )% on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned
to FB20 on 20-button telephones and is not assigned on 1-, 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 3-2 Auto-Programming for Station Prime Directory Number
CTX100 and CTX670 without BBMS
CTX670 with BBMS and BEXS
First digit
and BEXS installed on processor
installed on processor (1st digit is 2)
Prime DNs (3-digits)
Prime DNs (4-digit)
Pr
St
og
2
200~299 depending on quantity of station 2000~2571 depending on qty. of station PCBs
r
r
a
PCBs installed
installed
a
ta
m
C
m
Prime DN (3-digits)
T
in X
3
g

300~399 depending on qty. of station
PCBs installed
CO Line Auto Programming
Table 3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups
(OLG), and CO line service type is set as shown in table 4.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the CTX I/M manual, Configuration
Chapter, Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 3-3 Auto-programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
000
-
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote cabinets
4 analog Loop or ground
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
001
RCOU, RGLU
start lines
lines
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
005
RCOU+RCOS
8 analog loop start lines
lines
006
RDDU
4 analog DID lines
Direct Inward Dial lines
PCM Highway:
T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT)
007
RDTU2
16 or 24 digital T1 lines
16 or 241
lines
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-3

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
Standard telephone and DKT2000
and DKT3000 without S-OCA
(DKT300 imitations: DKT2000, 16
4 Standard telephone
008
RDSU
character LCD display on DKT3000,
and for digital telephone
DKT3000 LCD Feature key does not
function, DKT3014 large screen LCD
does not display).
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS
and RGLU analog CLID lines. Note:
009
RCIU2+RCIS
4 or 8 Caller ID interface
The same Prg100 code (009) is used
for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
CAMA lines Note: The same Prg100
2 or 4 E911 analog
010
RMCU+RCMS
code (009) used for RCIU2 with or
CAMA lines
without RCIS.
4 analog Tie lines, 4 VoIP
011
REMU, BVPU
Tie lines
circuits
TEI Type:
012
RBSU
2 ISDN BRI (S/T) circuits
ISDN BRI CO lines
Two TEIs
TEI Type:
013
RBSU+RBSS
4 ISDN BRI (S/T) circuits
ISDN BRI CO lines
Two TEIs
16 or 24 ISDN PRI
PCM Highway:
014
RPTU
SDN BRI CO lines
channels
16 or 241
TEI Type:
015
RBUU
2 ISDN BRI (U) circuits
ISDN BRI CO lines
Two TEIs
TEI Type:
016
RBUU+RBUS
4 ISDN BRI (U) circuits
ISDN BRI CO lines
Two TEIs
1If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 line or channels will be installed; If the slot next to an
installed RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
Table 3-4 Auto Programming of Line Groups and Service types
OLG
ILG
CO line type
CO service type
Prg 306
Prg. 304
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog loop
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
1
1
and ground start
(200 or 2000 ­ see Table 5)
RDDU analog DID
1
2
DID, wink ­ no default DID numbers
RDTU (T1)
1
3
DID ­ no default DID numbers
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA
1
-
(200 or 2000 ­ see next table)
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI - set
2
4
DID ­ no default DID numbers
as CO side
ISDN PRI
2
5
DID ­ no default DID numbers
REMU analog E&M
3
6
Non-Qsig
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements.
Example line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.
3-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up
Table 3-5 Auto Programming of miscellaneous Line parameters.
Item
Settings
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
DIT line ringing assignment
PDN 200 for Strata CTX100 and 2-cabinet Strata CTX670
Program 310
PDN2000 for 2~7 cabinet CTX670.
DID numbers - not assigned.
The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing
destinations must be assigned manually from CTX WinAdmin or the
Program 309
programming telephone.
Format Setting for DIT (T1)
Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF.
The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
Setting for CAMA
operation mode (DAY1, Day2, and Night).
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN BRI CO
BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN PRI CO
PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The
Pr
destination of DID is not assigned.
St
og
r
The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
r
a
Setting for EM Tie lines
a
ta
automatically
m
C
m
T
in X
The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number and Out Of Search for DID number, is
g

assigned to the first Prime DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes
(DAY1,Day 2, and Night).
The Direct In Termination line (ground and loop) DIT destinations of all trunks which generated
automatically are set as the first PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size ­ see Table 4.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-5

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 1: Use Default Auto-Programming to Start up
CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto Programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
·
Network TCP/IP. See "916 TCP/IP Configuration" on page 9-10.
·
IP address ­ 192.168.254.253
·
Sub network master ­ 255.255.255.0
·
Default gateway ­ 0.0.0.0
·
IP routing table ­ Not used.
·
SNMP Agent settings
·
Community name ­ communityName
·
IP address ­ 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
·
Privileges ­ WRITE
·
community-id ­ 1
· User level ­ Super user
·
Trap destination
·
Community name ­ Nothing
·
IP address ­ Nothing
·
Enter the PPP Server settings
·
User ID ­ LbA4QoJXAJMZJr
·
Password ­ KwfWxWptt6PyDq
·
IP Address ­ 192.168.255.254 (Strata CTX modem fixed IP address for Dial-up
connections).
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
Public Numbering Plan
Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Number
Analyzed Digit Number
1NXX
11
N11
3
NXX
7
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9
E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
Emergency Call Group
OLG1
Number
1
1
E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
Emergency Call Called Number
System Mode
Emergency Call Called Number
Index
DAY1
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
DAY2
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1,
Day2,NIGHT).
3-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Default Feature Access Codes
Refer to "102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes" on page 4-4.
Note For DKTs, assign only the Primary DN (PDN) numbers. Do not program any other Flexible
Buttons or features in to the phones. Strata CTX automatically recognizes and sets up digital
telephone stations.
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Plan for your Strata CTX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. Use
record sheets wherever they are provided to document your installation requirements. The
following are some areas to consider:
·
Flexible Numbering Plan (102) ­ Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential
to a smooth install. Trunk Group access and Station range requirements are especially
important areas of consideration.
·
COS (103) ­ Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk
groups. There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
·
DRL (111) ­ Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Pr
St
og
r
Important!
Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known
r
a
a
ta
m
as Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CTX's Destination
C
m
T
Restriction feature. Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when
in X
g

programming Toll Restriction requirements.
·
FRL (and Queuing Priority Level (QPL) (506) ­ Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level
(FRL) and Queuing Priority Level (QPL) assignments.
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Follow the steps below to set up Strata CTX for the first time. Following this initial setup
procedure enables you to perform a standard Strata CTX setup with common System and Station
default assignments. Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup.
1. Card Assignments (100) ­ Choose System > Card Assignment. It is not necessary to
physically install PCBs prior to programming Strata CTX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, CTX WinAdmin automatically
recognizes PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default
stations and trunks automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See "100 Cabinet Slot
PCB Assignments" on page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) ­ Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See
"304 Incoming Line Group Assignment" on page 6-2 for more details. ILGs enable line
groupings of shared Class of Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) ­ Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See
"306 Outgoing Line Groups" on page 6-5 for more details.
4. Trunk Assignment (300) ­ Choose Trunk > Basic. Set up your Trunks in the following order
(see "300 Trunk Assignment" on page 6-8 for more details):
·
LS Trunks
·
GS Trunks
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-7

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
·
T1 Trunks
·
Tie lines
·
FX lines
·
PRI lines
·
BRI lines
5. Station Assignment (200) ­ Choose Station > Basic. Set up your stations in the following
order (see "Assignment" on page 5-1 for more details):
·
DKT Stations
·
Standard Stations
·
Voice Mail (VM) Ports
·
Attendant Positions
·
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
·
Door Phones
6. Create Station Links ­ Create the following groups where ever applicable and set stations to
link as necessary.
·
Hunt Groups using programs 209 and 218
·
Paging Groups using program 502
·
Call Pickup Groups using program 210
·
Park Orbits using program 102
·
Paging Devices using program 503
7. Backup Data ­ Choose Operation\Data Backup. Make sure the Smart Media card is properly
formatted (see "908 Smart Media" on page 9-4) prior to running backup. See "910 Data
Backup" on page 9-8 for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CTX details.
3-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
Review Program Flow
The basic program flow needed to set up Strata CTX is shown below. The figure displays the most
critical programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming
flows from specific (left) to general (right).
Card Assignment
(Program 100)
LS Trunks
Admin
GS Trunks
TI Trunks
TIE Lines
Create ILGs
FX Lines
(Program 304)
PRI Lines
Services
BRI Lines
Create OLGs
Pr
DKT Stations
St
(Program 306)
og
LCR/TR
r
STD Stations
r
a
a
ta
VM Ports
m
C
m
Attd Positions
T
in X
Pilot DN's (ACD)
g

Recomended*
Door Phones
System Program
BRI Lines
Planning the following before
proceeding.
5862
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102):
Trunk Group Access Plan
Create Station Links
Station Range Plan
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
Hunt Group
(Program 103)
Paging Group
Call P.U. Group
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111)
Park Orbits
Paging Devices
Define FRL and QPL
meanings (up to 16)

*Planning out these details
in advance enables Strata CTX
setup to proceed smoothly.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-9

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup
requirements. See the Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.
Station Setup
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up Station requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
DKT
PDN
100
200
204
208
205
PhDN
205
206
DADM
204
213
DDSS
214
215
Attd
100
200
204
208
Ext
100
200
208
VM
100
200
204
206
209
218
579
580
ISDN
Ext
100
202
217
Pilot DN
540
Station Hunting
209
218
Call Pickup Groups
210
Emergency Ringdown
216
Paging Groups
502
Station Speed Dial
516
Trunk Setup ­ Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog Trunk
requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
310
LS/GS
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
3-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Trunk Setup ­ T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 Trunk requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
LS/GS
Ring
310
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Ring
309
Pr
DID
Timer
308
St
og
r
DISA
311
r
a
a
ta
m
DNIS/ANI
313
C
m
T
i
Intercept
318
319
n
X
g

Trunk Setup ­ ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI Trunk
requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
CNIS
321
322
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Tie line
Ring
309
Timer
308
D-share
100
304
306
302
320
316
CBC
100
3041
3061
3022
320
3233
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-11

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Miscellaneous
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CTX features.
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Account-Codes
570
571
103
506
306
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
103
208
104
Automatic Call Back (ACB)
104
Automatic Camp-On
304
Auto-Release of CO
308
Background-Music (BGM)
102
103
109
Call Forwarding
103
200
217
Call History
204
205
Call Park Orbit
104
102
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On
103
COS-Station
200
202
COS-CO
304
306
Credit-Card Calling
105
111
306
Day/Night service
500
106
112
113
103
105
Identification Services
309
318
579
Digital PAD
107
114
Direct Inward Dialing
309
318
304
DISA
311
Direct Inward Termination
304
310
Do not Disturb (DND)
103
204
205
102
Door Lock Control
104
204
508
205
Door Phones
102
507
573
DTMF DP Compatible
104
DTMF BackTone
204
DTMF Signal Time
579
104
200
E911
105
217
550
104
306
202
Executive Override
103
105
External Ringing Repeat
300
204
Flash
308
205
102
103
Flexible Numbering
102
Group Paging
502
503
102
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR)
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
528
529
103
Line Group
304
305
306
307
317
302
323
300
Message-Waiting Light
204
102
579
Music-on-Hold
102
105
109
309
310
Off-Hook Camp-on
104
200
217
Network Call ­ Incoming
102
656
Network Call ­ Outgoing
102
651
653
654
655
Out-Going calls
200
217
104
Ringing-Transfer
105
SMDI
200
202
579
580
3-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Station CO Line Access
204
SMDR
512
513
514
Tandem Connection
103
104
300
DR Override by System's
105
Speed Dial
Destination Restriction
200
202
306
650
530
531
532
533
534
Tone-First/Voice-First
204
206
Travelling COS
105
200
510
Voice-Mail Interface
200
206
309
318
579
580
Emergency Ring-Down
216
Relay Services
515
System Call-Forward
200
217
104
500
504
Call Pick Up
210
103
200
205
102
Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX
Pr
Connect your CTX WinAdmin PC to the Strata CTX using the directions provided in the Strata
St
og
CTX I&M Manual.
r
r
a
a
ta
m
C
To communicate with Strata CTX
m
T
in X
g

1. Open Internet Explorer and point the browser to http://localhost/Ctmc_Local/
Default.htm as shown in the figure below.
2. Click Go. The Login
screen displays (shown
right).
3. To login into WinAdmin
for the first time, enter
administrator in User
Name field and password
in the Password field.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-13

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX
4. Click on the Login button. The
CTX WinAdmin Title screen
displays.
5. Click CTX (shown right) to
establish communications with
CTX WinAdmin.
Note Stratagy Enterprise Server
(SES) and Offline options are
not operating at this time.
...or
click Profile button to customize
WinAdmin configuration or to
access the User Management
screen. For details see "Profile" on page 11-2.
Note Click the Home button on the Profile screen to return to CTX WinAdmin screen shown
above.
6. From the Connection
Options Menu (shown at
right) enter the following:
·
Community Name ­
communityName
(entry is case sensitive).
·
CTX IP/Name ­
192.168.254.253
(NIC).
·
IP Address ­
192.168.255.254
(Strata CTX modem
fixed IP address for Dial-
up connections).
Note If you have set up the
Profile User
Management screen with
user information, click
on the CTX Host name and IP address of the user listed in the box at the bottom of the
screen.
7. Click on Connect Now.
Note If you are connecting to Strata CTX using your modem, click in the Use Dial Up box and
enter the phone number to connect to your Strata CTX. The CTX IP address in the CTX IP
Name field automatically defaults to the Strata CTX modem's static IP address.
Important!
If you are not able to connect after clicking on the Connect Now button, then refer to
Step 4 "Set up Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin" on page 2-3 of the
Installation chapter. Make sure that the IP Address and subnet mask are entered
correctly.
3-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX
8. CTX WinAdmin's Main Screen displays (shown below).
Program Viewer
Program Menu
Alarm Notification
You are now ready to run CTX WinAdmin.
·
Program Menu ­ The Program Menu is the primary tool used to navigate through CTX
WinAdmin.
·
Program Viewer ­ This area is where the various programs and parameters are displayed as
you navigate through CTX WinAdmin.
·
Alarm Notification ­ This area displays critical messages with information about potential
application problems. Not available for Beta testing.
Notes
·
You can verify the Strata CTX system type (CTX 100 or CTX 670) and the software version
on the Title screen shown above.
·
The Software version is broken down as follows:
A = Country code (USA, Canada, Mexico).
R1.01 = CTX Release 1.01
M000xx.00 = Strata CTX software version.
To exit CTX WinAdmin
1. From the Program Menu click Home.
2. Click on Exit at the CTX Management Console page.
3. Close your browser.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-15

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
The Program Viewer's Graphical User Interface (GUI) is arranged to streamline the Strata CTX
programming process. Programming functions can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate link
in the Program Menu. The Day Night Service (Program 112, 106 and 113) page is shown in the
sample below.
Command Table
Toolbar
Special Buttons
Command Group Name
Programming
Parameters
Program and
Field Name
Parameter
Program Blocks
Descriptions
CTX WinAdmin Pages
The following features enable you to browse and program CTX WinAdmin efficiently.
·
Program Blocks ­ CTX WinAdmin arranges many related programs in blocks to enable the
programmer to view essential and related settings in one screen.
·
Programming Parameters ­ Choose values from scroll down menus.
·
Command Group Name ­ Each program number and title are prominently displayed for easy
reference.
·
Field Name ­ Each Field Name or parameter is displayed and coded with a prefix (a.k.a. )%)
number for easy referencing.
·
Program and parameter descriptions ­ Every program and parameter description is
equipped display in a pop-up window by placing the mouse cursor over the program or
parameter information.
3-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
·
Special Buttons ­ Many
CTX WinAdmin menus
provide Special Buttons to
access the most common
programming tasks quickly.
For example, click on the
List button to view the
Current Index Web Page
dialog box (shown right).
CTX WinAdmin Toolbar
The CTX WinAdmin Toolbar (shown above) provides Strata CTX updates with a click of your
mouse button. The following are the options provided.
·
Edit ­ CTX WinAdmin defaults to the Edit mode used to program, maintain, or upgrade your
Strata CTX System.
·
Cancel ­ Cancels the previous entry made by clicking on this button.
·
Refresh ­ to see the latest updates you just entered.
·
Reset ­ resets to set your Strata CTX to manufacturer's default.
CAUTION!
By pressing the Reset button, you are authorizing all data to be reset to
manufacturing defaults. Any data that has been entered is lost.
·
Submit ­ New data is held in CTX WinAdmin's memory. Your Strata CTX is not updated with
the new settings until the Submit button is pressed.
·
Close ­ Exit CTX WinAdmin and return to CTX Management Console Menu.
·
Disconnect ­ Disconnect CTX WinAdmin from Strata CTX and terminate TCP/IP
Communications.
·
Help ­ Enables the CTX WinAdmin Help files.
Command Table Link
This convenient button links
to a table (shown right) that
associates CTX WinAdmin
programs with the appropriate
program reference numbers.
These associations help you to
efficiently maneuver through
the CTX WinAdmin Program
Menu.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-17

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
Station Assignment Menu
CTX WinAdmin conveniently arranges Station Programs in one convenient area as shown in the
figure below. Programmers can access a variety of station programs and features by clicking on the
six tabs described below.
Program Tabs
Program Tabs
There are five program tabs as follows:
·
Basic ­ The station assignment page defaults to the basic tab (Program 200) shown in the
figure above. Station Data is programmed from this page.
·
DKT ­ Clicking on this tab (shown
right) brings you to Program 204,
DKT Parameters. Program your
DKT telephone here.
3-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
·
DSS ­ This tab (shown right) brings
you to Program 214, DSS Console
Assignment.
·
Key ­ This tab (shown
right) brings you to
Program 205, Station
Feature Button
Assignment (shown
below). This special
display enables
programmers to easily
assign features to the
DKT telephone by
selecting the
appropriate blue
feature button as
shown to the right in
the figure below. The
following options are
available:
·
Program individual phone buttons by entering the phone's Prime DN in the upper left field.
·
Program DSS buttons by clicking on the DSS Key Assignment button.
·
Download Keystrips and print custom keystrips for each DKT.
·
View the entire station directory by clicking on the Station Directory button.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
3-19

---

Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
·
Data ­ This tab (shown
right) features Station
Timer Assignment
(Program 208), Group
Call Pickup (Program
210), Emergency
Ringdown (Program
216) and Terminal
Paging Group
Assignment (Program
502).
·
Page Group ­ This tab
(shown right) assigns
Prime DNs to Paging
Group(s), Program 502.
Create, Clone, Copy and Delete
The Create, Clone, Copy and Delete feature (shown right) of
CTX WinAdmin enables programmers to:
·
Create ­ Creates a new record using system default
values.
·
Clone ­ Create a new record to the database, using the current record on display.
·
Copy ­ Copy the existing record on display to an existing record on the database.
·
Delete ­ Remove the current record on display from the database.
3-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
4
This chapter provides Strata CTX system programming information for programmers using the
CTX WinAdmin programming interface.
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
All Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), excluding the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots.
The processor PCBs have dedicated slots in the Base cabinet which do not require this assignment.
The system provides one Base Cabinet and up to six Expansion Cabinets. The Base Cabinet
provides eight slots and each of the six Expansion Cabinets provide 10 slots for a total of 68 slots.
1. Fill out the Card Assignment Record Sheets.
2. From the Program Menu
click System > Card
Assignment. The Card
Slot Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
3. Cabinet (01~07) ­ Select
the two digit cabinet
number. Select 01 for
Base and Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX 100).
Select 01 for Base and
02~07 respectively for
each Expansion cabinet
Sy
(Strata CTX 670).
stem
4. Slot (01~10) ­ Select
01~04 for Base Slots and
05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100).
Select 01~08 for Base Slots and 01~10 for Expansion Slots.
Note The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation,
BIOU2 is installed as default in a virtual equipment position; Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code
20 in Program 100. To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the
programming telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
5. Select the PCB Type.
6. Click Submit.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-1

---

System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Card Assignment Record Sheets
The following record sheets are designed for both CTX WinAdmin and Button Programming
users. PCB Code and Options are provided for Button Programmers only.
CTX670 Base Cabinet 1: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
B101
B102
S101
S102
S103
S104
S105
S106
S107
S108
PCB Name
BECU
BBCU
PCB Code (FB01)
n/a
n/a
FB02
n/a
n/a
Options
FB03
n/a
n/a
FB04
n/a
n/a
Line/Channel Number
n/a
n/a
Port Station Number
n/a
n/a
Notes
·
The designated BECU slot is B101 and the BBCU slot is B102.
·
Slot S101 is designated for PDKU, BDKU or BDKU/BDKS.
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 2: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 3: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 4: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
4-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 5: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 6: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
CTX670 Expansion Cabinet 7: Location ­ Local/Remote ___________
Slot Number
S_01
S_02
S_03
S_04
S_05
S_06
S_07
S_08
S_09
S_10
PCB Name
PCB Code (FB01)
FB02
Options
FB03
FB04
Line/Channel Number
Port Station Number
Notes
·
RDTU, RPTU and RWIU (up to 16 handsets) allowed slots are: S_01, S_03, S_05 and S_07.
The adjacent slot must be vacant to reach maximum capacity.
Sy
stem
·
RWIU slots for up to 32 handsets are S105 and S_07. Up to three adjacent slots must be vacant
to reach maximum capacity.
·
All Base Cabinet slots support Speaker OCA. Speaker OCA is supported in slots S_01~S_06
for Expansion Cabinets.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-3

---

System
102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes
102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CTX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access
features. This enables programmers to create customized Flexible Numbering plans. The Strata
CTX670 Flexible Numbering Plan associates features stored in memory (i.e., "Store Code," see
Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.
1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the "Programmed Value" column of Table
4-1 below.
2. From the Program Menu
click System > Flexible
Numbering Plan. The
Numbering Plan
Assignment screen
displays (shown at right).
3. 00 Flexible Numbering
Plan ­ Enter the digits to
be dialed (0~9,#,*) to
access a feature or an
OLG.To delete, select
`No Data' in `01 Feature
Name'. Conflict with an
assigned DN will produce
an error.
4. 01 Flexible Numbering
Feature ­ Select the
Flexible Numbering
Feature (see Table 4-1 below) to which the access code is being assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select "Line Group access code - one access code for
each OLG".To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select "Line
access code - leading digit(s) to access individual lines". Example: If #7 is selected as the
line access prefix, the users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the
line number).
5. 02 OLG Number ­ Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is
being assigned. This field is only required if you chose "Line Group Access Code ­ one access
code for each OLG" for the Flexible Numbering Feature in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field
if a Feature Code other than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number (1~128) field appears only when 01 Feature Name Line Group Access
Code ­ one access code for each OLG is selected.
6. Click Submit.
Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code
relationships. Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to
directly access the Flexible Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD
of the telephone once the Default Access Codes are entered.
4-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes
Note These codes should not be confused with the Button Codes in "Key" on page 5-13.
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan default settings
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate
150
#441
ABR - Cancel
151
#442
Call Park Orbits - Activate
170
#33
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)
173
#32
System Orbit Number
174
7000~7019
DND -Local Activation
180
#6091
DND -Local Cancellation
181
#6092
DND -Remote Activation
182
#6191
DND -Remote Cancellation
183
#6192
Door Lock Control -Unlock
190
#12
Door Phones -Call
191
#15
Flash -short
200
#450
Flash -long
210
#451
Group Paging -Invoke All Group Paging
220
#30
Group Paging -Invoke Individual Group Paging
230
#31
Answer for External Group Paging
232
#5#36
Emergency Page -Invoke All Emergency Paging
240
#37
Emergency Page -Invoke Individual Emergency Paging
250
#38
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)
260
*1
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)
261
*2
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)
262
*3
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)
263
*4
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)
264
*5
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)
265
*6
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)
266
*7
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)
267
*8
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)
268
*9
Register Speed Dial
269
#66
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation
340
#6011
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation
341
#6021
Sy
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation
342
#6031
stem
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation
343
#6041
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation
350
#6013
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation
351
#6023
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation
352
#6033
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation
353
#6043
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation
360
#6012
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation
361
#6022
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
362
#6032
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
363
#6042
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation
370
#6014
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation
371
#6024
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
372
#6034
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
373
#6044
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation
380
#6051
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation
390
#6053
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation
400
#6052
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-5

---

System
102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan default settings (continued)
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation
410
#6054
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation
420
#670
Input Account Code
530
#46
Change DISA Security Code
540
#658
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk
550
#7
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group
551
None
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)
560
#494
Enter User Programming Mode
570
#9876
LCR -Outgoing Call
580
9
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)
591
#63
Release Received Message Waiting
592
#409
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))
593
#64
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)
594
#408
Cancel ACB
600
#431
Start BGM
610
#490
Stop BGM
611
#491
Start BGM for External Paging Device
612
#492
Stop BGM for External Paging Device
613
#493
Built-in modem
630
#19
Night Ring Answer
640
#5#39
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number
650
#471
Change Travelling Class Override Code
651
#69
Activate System Call Forward
670
#620
Cancel System Call Forward
671
#621
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup
680
#5#34
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal
681
#5#5
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group
682
#5#32
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN
683
#5#22
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call
684
#5#9
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve
685
#5#73
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve
686
#5#71
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve
687
#5#72
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve
688
#5#74
Transfer to Voice Mail
690
#407
Repeat Last Number Dialed
700
*0
Volume Control for BEEP
710
#6101
Change LCD Display Language
720
#495
Advisory Message - Activation
730
#411
Advisory Message - Cancellation
731
#412
Emergency Call
740
#911
Attendant Console Group Access Code
750
0
Private Network Access Code
760
8
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)
770
None
Substitution of Dial *
780
441
Substitution of Dial #
781
440
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call
782
##
Application starting access code
800
#18
4-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None
This command is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by
sending tones directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits
expected in PSTN numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix "1" would be expected to be 11 digits long.
Calls will be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been
received.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > Public
Numbering Plan. The
Public numbering Plan
Analyzed Digit Number
Assignment screen displays
(shown at right).
2. Enter the Prefix Number
used for external calls.
3. Select Digits to Follow.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Prefix Number
Enter a Public Dial Number prefix code.
Sy
Possible values: Up to 7 digits. Wild Card values n and x are allowed (default = no
stem
value).
The Prefix numbers and digits to follow are as follows:
1NXX = 11; N11 = 3; NXX = 7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Digits to Follow
Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is the
total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix Number above.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 0)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-7

---

System
103 Class of Service
103 Class of Service
Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (COS) assignments are a registration of feature capabilities to a specific user or
group of users. Up to 32 COS feature sets can be registered.
1. Enter your COS assignments in
the provided record sheet.
2. From the Program Menu click
System > Class of Service The
Class of Service Assignment
screen displays (shown right).
3. COS Number ­ Select the COS
Number (1~32).
4. Place a check mark in each of the
services you wish to enable.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Auto Busy Redial
Enable Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.
02 Call Forward Override
Enable Call Forward Override. If enabled, this station does not forward calls
from a calling station with System or Station Call Forward activated. This
includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button located on the
telephone or DSS console.
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on
Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.
04 Change DISA Codes
Enable stations to change the DISA Security Code.
05 DND Override - Calling Party
Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
06 DND Override - Called Party
Permits calling parties with DND Override privileges to override DND status.
07 Do Not Disturb
Enables user to place stations on DND mode.
08 Remote Set/Reset DND
Enables stations with the ability to set/reset DND on other phones.
09 Executive Override
Enable Executive Override on a call.
10 Executive Override Allowed
Permit Executive Override for incoming callers.
11 Offhook Camp-on
Enable Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
12 Group Pickup
Enable stations for Group Call Pickup within one's own group.
13 Directed Station Pickup
Enable stations to pick another specific ringing station.
14 Directed Group Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
4-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
103 Class of Service
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Directed DN Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a specified DN.
16 Ext Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.
17 Directed CO Call Pickup
Enable stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
18 Remote Retrieve Call Pickup
Enable stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated terminal
(PDN).
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup
Enable stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
20 Handsfree Override
Permit stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.
21 Privacy Override
Enable stations to override a private call.
23 Invoke Emergency Page1
Enable the Emergency Page feature.
24 Join Feature
Enable the Join feature (Attendant Feature).
25 Through Dialing
Enable the Perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature).
26 Tandem CO Connection
Set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
27 Day/Night Control
Enable Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
28 Ext BGM Control
Permit BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
29 LCR Feature
Enable access to LCR.
30 Individual Trunk Access
Enable Dial individual trunk access codes to access specific lines.
31 Trunk Access Allowed
Enable Access trunk groups by trunk access codes.
32 Forced Account Codes
Use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
33 Verified Account Codes
Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
34 Allow Short Hook Flash
Use a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
35 Allow Long Hook Flash
Use a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
36 Allow Hook Flash
Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice mail
ports to perform hook flashes.
Sy
38 Can Originate OCA
Permission for others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
stem
1. Not used in Release 1.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-9

---

System
103 Class of Service
COS Record Sheet
COS Assignment Code:_________
Service Name
Enable Disable
Service Name
Enable
Disable
Auto Busy Redial
DN Retrieve Call Pickup
Call Forward Override
Handsfree Override
Call Transfer w/ Camp-on
Privacy Override
Change DISA Codes
Invoke Emerg Page1
DND Override - Calling Party
Join Feature
DND Override - Called Party
Through Dialing
Do Not Disturb
Tandem CO Connection
Remote Set/Reset DND
Day/Night Control
Executive Override
Ext BGM Control
Executive Override Allowed
LCR Feature
Offhook Camp-on
Individual Trunk Access
Group Pickup
Trunk Access Allowed
Directed Station Pickup
Forced Account Codes
Directed Group Call Pickup
Verified Account Codes
Directed DN Call Pickup
Allow Short Hook Flash
Ext Call Pickup
Allow Long Hook Flash
Directed CO Call Pickup
Allow Hook Flash
Remote Retrieve Call Pickup
Can Originate OCA
1. Not used in Release 1.
4-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
104 System Timer
104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and
features for the Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > System
Timer. System Timer
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Select the desired timer
value for each of the 19
fields.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 ACB Callback Timer
Select the Automatic Callback (ACB) timer. A callback will be attempted for this
specified amount of time before being cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)
02 ACB Cancel Recall
Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a limit for registering a
Timer
callback. Once the timer expires, the callback will be cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)
03 Park Recall Timer
Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in Park.
Possible values: 10~600 sec. (default = 120)
04 Camp-on Timer
Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to
Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values: 5~15 sec. (default = 10)
Sy
05 SMDR Valid Call Timer
The SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be
stem
considered to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not
returned from the public network. Setting the time short will include calls that may
not be completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are
answered and terminated in a short time.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 10)
06 Tandem Timer #1
Select timer for a Trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken
place.
Possible values: 0~3600 sec. (default = 300)
07 Tandem Timer #2
This timer provides a time to allow an external user to dial a digit to extend the
disconnect time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily
with DISA service.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-11

---

System
104 System Timer
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
08 Call Forward No Ans
The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone
Time
will ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 30)
09 Dial Input Timer
This timer permits dial input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 20)
10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer
This timer specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated
phones.
Possible values: 1~60 (default = 12)
11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer
Select the time to wait before applying ringing to the designated phones.
Possible values: 1~60 (default = 24)
12 Door Unlock Timer
Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values: 1~30 (default = 6)
13 9+11 Judgement Timer
The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value (1~30 seconds) for the system
to wait for additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for
treatment using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values: 1~30 (default = 5)
14 Emergency Call Timer
The Emergency Call timer sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a
list of destinations for the call.
Possible values: 10~180 (default = 30)
15 ABR Busy Detection
The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy
Time
condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic
Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values: 1~30 (default = 5)
16 Lost Call Timer
The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 180)
17 Lost Call Final Timer
The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 30)
18 DTMF Tone Sending
The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO Lines.
Time
Possible values: 80msec (default) or 160msec
19 Auto Disconnect
Time after which an unsupervised trunk may be automatically released.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)
4-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
105 System Data
105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > System
Data. The System Data
Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter System Parameter
data using the table
below.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Executive Override
Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 Station MOH
Select MOH for private lines and stations.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1 (default), External 2, External 3, External
4, External 5, External 6, External 7, External 8, External 9,
External 10, External 11, External 12, External 13, External 14 or
External 15
03 Ring Transfer Tone
Select tones for the transferred party to hear after a ringing transfer takes place.
Possible values: RBT (default) or MOH
Sy
stem
05 Privacy Override
Enable Privacy Override Attendant Monitor warning.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Credit Card Code
Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field
any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Credit Card Digits
Enter the Minimum Dial Digits for Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: 1~66 (default = 21)
08 E911 Service
Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
09 DR Override by SSD
Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-13

---

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
10 Auto Station Release
Enable Automatic Station Release.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 ISDN SPID
Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values: Operable or Not Operable (default)
12 Night Mode Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in
the Night Mode.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2, Slot
5, PCB code 20.
13 BGM External Paging
Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to
which BGM will be sent. See Program 503
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
14 Lost Call Destination
Enter Lost Call Destination. If no value is entered in this field any previously
programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
15 COS Override Code
Select Class of Service Override Code.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
16 Multi-Conference
Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing Calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 Caller Number Display
Enable Caller Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller ID, the
Caller ID is displayed.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
18 Night Bell Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Bell Relay; this relay activates whenever Night
Ringing takes place.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIUO1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
On CTX100 the ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in Cabinet 2 Slot 5,
PCB code 20.
19 Display Preference
Select Display Preference.
Possible values: DNIS (default) or Caller ID
20 Transit Counter
Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes
through which a QSIG call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 1)
4-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
21 Primary Clock
For feature buttons/fields 21~22 enter the cabinet, slot and channel number of the
PCB designated as the systems Primary and Secondary T1/PRI/BRI clock as
22 Secondary Clock
xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10;
zz = Circuit 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz = Circuit 01, 02, 03, or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or
RBSU/RBSS
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (Strata CTX
100)
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX670).
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 670), (default = no value).
23 Call History Prefix 1
Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values: Add (default) or Do Not Add
24 Emergency Digits Sent
Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any
previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = 911)
25 DP Make Ratio
Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values: 33% (default) or 40%
26 Call Button Jumping
Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
·
If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they
are answered. After answering the call, the DN button is cleared to receive
another call.
With this operation the DN acts as an answer button for the telephone. This
operation only applies if the line that is answered has a button (CO/GCO/
Pooled) appearance on the telephone.
·
If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after they are answered.
Sy
stem
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-15

---

System
System Call Forward
System Call Forward
Program Number(s): 500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs.
1. Complete the "System Call
Forward Record Sheets" on
page 4-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click
System > System Call Forward.
The System Call Forward
Destination screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Program 500 data.
4. Enter Program 504 data
5. Click Submit.
500 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are
assigned to these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and
Telephone Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are
set.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
01 Call Type
Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values: CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)
02 Period
Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values: Day1, Day2 or Night (default = no value)
03 Telephone Status
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values: Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND (default = no value)
04 Destination 1
Select the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 Destination 2
Select an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
4-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
System Call Forward
504 System Call Forward Operation Status
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns System Call Forward Type for the pattern.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Number
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
01 Telephone Status
Select the status or state in which the telephone should be for this system call
forward pattern to activate.
Possible values: No Data (default), Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND
System Call Forward Record Sheets
Program 500 Values
Program 504 Values
00 SCF
03 Tel
04
05
01 Telephone
01 Call Type 02 Period
Number
Status
Destination 1
Destination 2
Status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
Sy
18
stem
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-17

---

System
501 System Speed Dial
501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits.
If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically
be appended to create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the
number for dialing a common routine with the number (see "516 Station Speed Dial" on page 5-30
for more information about nesting).
1. Complete the "System Speed
Dial Record Sheet" on
page 4-18.
2. From the Program Menu, click
System > System Speed Dial.
The System Speed Dial screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 501 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Speed Dial Bin
Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values: 000~799 (default = no value)
01 Number
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
The digits * and # have special meaning when programming speed dials in that the
# digit indicates the end of entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or
# as part of the number, enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *1~*9. The second
digit represents the number of seconds for the pause function.
02 Name
This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
System Speed Dial Record Sheet
00 Speed
00 Speed
01 Number
02 Name
01 Number
02 Name
Dial Bin
Dial Bin
4-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
501 System Speed Dial
00 Speed
00 Speed
01 Number
02 Name
01 Number
02 Name
Dial Bin
Dial Bin
Sy
stem
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-19

---

System
Day Night Service
Day Night Service
Program Number(s): 112, 106 and 113
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CTX.
1. Complete the "Day/Night
Mode Record Sheet" on
page 4-22.
2. From the Program Menu
click System > Day Night
Services. The Day Night
Mode Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Calendar Day
(YYYYMMDD) to assign
a Working Day Type
schedule.
...or Click on one of the
following buttons.
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Calendar days.
·
Create ­ Assign a new Calendar Day with custom settings.
·
Copy ­ Copies the currently viewed record to another record(s).
4. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
5. Enter Program 106 data.
6. Enter Program 113 data.
7. Click Submit.
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106 on page 4-21
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days.
These settings override the default system schedules in Strata CTX to enable Day/Night
scheduling for unique circumstances.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Calendar Day
Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)
01 Working Day Type
Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values: Delete (default), Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday
4-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
Day Night Service
106 Day/Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113 on page 4-21
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These
types of days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be
classified.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Monday
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.
Possible values: Work Day (default), Non-work Day or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the weekend.
Possible values: Work Day, Non-work Day (default) or Holiday
07 Sunday
113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work
Day, and Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night). Each "type of day" defined in "106
Day/Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment" on page 4-21 requires an assigned
schedule.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
01 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
02 Day2 Mode
Note
Enter 9999 to delete or skip mode.
Sy
·
03 Night Mode
stem
Non-Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
04 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
05 Day2 Mode
Enter 9999 to delete or skip mode.
·
06 Night Mode
Holiday
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
·
07 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
·
08 Day2 Mode
Enter 9999 to delete or skip mode.
·
09 Night Mode
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-21

---

System
Day Night Service
Day/Night Mode Record Sheet
Program 112 Values
Program 106 Values
Work Day, Non-Work Day or
Calender Day
01 Working Day Type
Day
Holiday
01 Monday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
07 Sunday
Program 113 Values
Day 1
Day 2
Night
Type of Day
Mode
Mode
Mode
Work Day
Non-Work Day
Holiday
4-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
PAD Table
PAD Table
Program Number(s): 107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD Tables and PAD Conference Tables using these programs.
1. From the Program Menu click
System > PAD Table. The PAD
Table Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
Note Clicking *Note displays Table
4-6 for Program 107 and Table
4-7 for Program 108.
107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Sender PAD Device
Enter Sender PAD Device Number from PAD Table.
Number
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670), 101~106 (CTX100),
(default = no value), see Table 4-6 below.
02 Receiver PAD Device
Enter Receiver PAD Device Number from PAD Table.
Number
Possible values: Up to 3 digits. 101~132 (CTX670), 101~106 (CTX100)
Sy
(default = no value), see Table 4-6 below.
stem
03 PAD Loss
Enter PAD Value (See Table 4-6 below, or click on the drop down menu). The value
shown shows the net effect.
Note
To pad is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net Loss,
5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net Loss or 8 =
15dB Net Loss (default = no value).
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-23

---

System
PAD Table
Table 4-6
PAD Table
PAD Device Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
101
102
131
132
re
Receiver (Listener)
b
hone
1
2
Num
e
e
lep
rce
ic
e
runk
up 1
up 2
up 3
up 3
v
Sender (Speaker)
k
ing
o
o
o
o
n
runk
log T
log T
ru
c Sou
T
si
t. Pag
AD De
u
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
P
Ana
DKT
Ana
T1
ISDN Station
ISDN T
CONF Bridg
M
Ex
P
P
P
P
1
Ana
log Telephone
0
0
0
6
6
6
X
-
0
2
DKT
0
0
0
6
6
6
0
-
0
3
Ana
log Trunk
0
0
6
6
6
6
X
-
6
4
T1 Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
5
IS
DN Station
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
6
IS
DN Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
7
Conference Bridge
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
8
M
usic Source
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
Ext. Paging
0
0
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
101
PAD Group 1
102
PAD Group 2
:
:
131
PAD Group 31
132
PAD Group 32
Note
"X" data set for PAD Conference table Assignment
108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional devices to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default
table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 PAD Group Device Type
Enter the Device Type from Table 4-7 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits.
x = Device Type; yyyyy = Device number (default = no value)
01 PAD Group Number
Enter the PAD Group Number
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX670), 0~6 (CTX100)
(default = 0)
4-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
PAD Table
Table 4-7
PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device
Device Name
Device Number
Example
Type
DKT, SLT, ISDN, Station
1
0~99999 (PDN)
if DKT device = 200, value = 1200.
ISDN Trunk
2
1~128 (Channel Group Number)
if Channel Group # = 10, value = 210.
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk
3
1~264 (Trunk Number)
if Trunk # = 120, value = 3120.
Conference Bridge
none (Conference Bridge is only value = 4.
4
one)
Music Source
5
1~15 (Music Port)
if Music port = 8, value = 58.
External Paging Device
6
1~8 (Zone Relay Number)
if External Paging Device = 3, value = 63.
114 PAD Conference Assignment
Prerequisite Program:
This command enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and
telephones in conference.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PAD Conference Trunks
Enter the number of analog trunks using Table 4-8 below.
Possible values: 0~6 (default = 0)
02 PAD Conference
Enter the number of analog telephones. See Table 4-8 below.
Telephone
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
03 PAD Conference Value
Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and telephones
specified in PAD Conference Trunks and Telephones above. The value shown
shows the net effect.
Note
To pad is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain, 2 = 3dB Net Gain, 3 = 0dB, 4 = 3dB Net Loss,
5 = 6dB Net Loss, 6 = 9dB Net Loss, 7 = 12dB Net Loss or 8 =
15dB Net Loss (default = no value).
Sy
Table 4-8
PAD Conference Table
stem
Number of Analog Telephones
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
6
6
g
1
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
6
alo
2
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
An
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
4
9
9
9
9
9
ber of
sk
m
n
5
9
9
9
9
u
u
N
Tr
6
9
9
9
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-25

---

System
110 Password
110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels for. Logging into the
system with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the
level 2 password provides restricted program administration.
1. From the Program Menu click System > Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Password Level
Enter password level as follows:
Possible values: Enter 1 to set an unrestricted administration password. Enter 2 to
set a restricted administration password (default = no value).
01 Password
Enter the desired password.
Note
Only one password can be set for each level.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)
4-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
109 Music on Hold
109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > Music on
Hold. The External Music
on Hold Source
Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. For fields 01~07, click in
the adjacent radio button
to activate MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the
equipment location
identifier and check the
Connected box to activate.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
MOH/BGM #1 (BECU)
For MOH/BGM #1~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
specified PCB.
MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
Sy
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU)
Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8~#15 is
stem
connected.
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 (default
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)
= no value)
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet. (Strata
MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)
CTX100)
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)
cabinet.
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)
(Strata CTX 100).
MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 670).
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)
Notes
·
A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a MOH
circuit.
·
If a PDN is assigned to an MOH/BGM circuit, you must first delete the PDN
using PRG201
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-27

---

System
I/O Device
I/O Device
Program Number(s): 801, 803 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical
Devices SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > I/O Device.
The Equipment
Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 801 data.
3. Enter Program 803 data.
4. Enter Program 804 data.
5. Click Submit.
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-29.
This screen assigns Strata CTX LAN parameters, enabling PC applications to connect to the
BECU network jack.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 LAN Port Number
Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned. Refer to "803 SMDR SMDI
CTI Port Assignments" on page 4-29.
Possible values: 1~9 (default = no value)
01 Protocol
Select communication Protocol.
Possible values: TCP (default) or UDP
02 PC Operation Type
Select the Operation Type.
·
If Server is selected, enter 04 Server Port Number.
·
If Client is selected, enter the 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: Server (default) or Client
03 Data Flow
Select the data flow protocol for CTX and PC communications.
Note
If the logical device set up in "803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments" on
page 4-29 is set to CTI, this field must be set to Asynchronous data flow.
Possible values: Synchronization or Asynchronization (default =
Asynchronization)
4-28
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
I/O Device
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Server Port Number
Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is
required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this
field blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
05~08 Client IP Address
Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02
PC Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
09 Client Port Number
Enter the Client Port number. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
10 Read Retry Number
Select the Read Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)
10 Write Retry Number
Select the Write Retry counter.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 1)
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 804 on page 4-31.
This program assigns one of the following:
·
SMDR and SMDI to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
·
WinAdmin, ACD server, and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device and
LAN port numbers.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Logical Device Number
Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or PC
application. See Table 4-9.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
300 = SMDI
200~208 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value)
01 Device Connection
Select the Device Connection type.
Possible values: None (default), LAN or RS-232
·
Select LAN for CTX WinAdmin, ACD Server or a PC Attendant Console. These
devices are connected to the BECU network jack.
·
Select RS-232 for SMDR/SMDI devices or PCs. These devices connect to the
BSIS RS-232 ports.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-29

---

System
I/O Device
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Device Port Number
Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values: For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
Notes
·
SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
·
LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the
following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
LAN Port8 = device207
Table 4-9
Device Table
Physical Device
Define I/O
Logical
Logical Device
Logical
Device
Serial Number
Smart
LAN
PPP
RS-232C
Device
Media
Number
SMDR
0
-
-
OK
-
100
0
OK
-
-
-
200
1
OK
-
-
-
201
2
OK
-
-
-
202
3
OK
-
-
-
203
CTI
4
OK
-
-
-
204
5
OK
-
-
-
205
6
OK
-
-
-
206
7
OK
-
-
-
207
8
OK
-
-
-
208
0
OK
-
OK
-
300
SMDI
1
OK
-
OK
-
301
4-30
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
I/O Device
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 BSIS Port (1~4)
Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
01 Port Speed
Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
02 Port Parity
Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values: None, Even or Odd (default)
03 Data Bits
Select Data Length.
Possible values: 7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits
04 Flow Control
This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the
SMDI or SMDR device. To enable Strata CTX to buffer call records, set this field to
Flow.
Possible values: None (default) or Flow
05 Wait Timer
Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one
through 255 seconds. Select 0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 30)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-31

---

System
115 Advisory Messages
115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None
This command specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status
information when others call your station. These messages can be customized to include a
directory number, time or date as part of the message.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > Advisory
Messages. The Advisory
Message Assignment
screen displays (shown
right).
2. Select the Message
Number.
3. Enter the desired message
in 01 Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits
Type.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Message Number
Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. See Table 4-10
below for details.
Possible values: 0~4 = pre programmed messages, 5~9 = custom messages
(default = 0)
01 Message
Enter the Advisory Message to be displayed on the receiving parties LCD.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 User Entered Variable
Select the type of Additional Digits that can be appended to complete the Advisory
Message. The total message cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: None, DN, Time or Date (default = None)
Table 4-10
Advisory Message Default Code Table
#
Advisory Message
Type of Additional
0
OUT TO LUNCH
None
1
IN A MEETING
None
2
CALL
Directory Number
3
BACK AT
Time
4
RETURN ON
Date
5
(No Data)
None
6
(No Data)
None
7
(No Data)
None
8
(No Data)
None
9
(No Data)
None
4-32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System
116 Data Initialize
116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CTX system.
1. From the Program Menu
click System > Data
Initialize. The Data
Initialize screen displays
(shown right).
2. Select a Program to
initialize from the
01 Command No. dialog
box.
3. Click Submit.
Table 4-11
Data Initialize Programs
Program
Program Name
Page #
Number
500
500 System Call Forward Assignment
4-16
520
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment
8-11
521
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
8-12
522
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
8-12
523
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment
8-16
524
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
8-13
525
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
8-14
526
526 Modified Digits Table Assignment
8-14
527
527 LCR Holiday Table
8-18
529
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
8-18
530
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
8-24
531
531 DR Screening Table for OLG
8-25
533
533 DR Level Table Assignment
8-25
534
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
8-28
651
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
8-44
653
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
8-45
654
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
8-46
655
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
8-46
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
4-33

---

System
116 Data Initialize
4-34
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
5
This chapter provides Strata CTX station programming information for programmers using the
CTX WinAdmin programming interface.
Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216 and 502
The following Programs Assign Station data.
Basic/200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Use the "Basic Station Record Sheets" on page 5-5 to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program
Menu, click Station >
Assignment.
3. Click on the Basic tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in
the Prime DN field
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a
summary list of
programmed DNs.
Stati
·
Extended List ­
o
view a detailed list
n
of programmed
DNs.
·
Create ­ Assign a
new DN with
custom settings by
entering a DN value. Press OK, assign the PDN Equipment No. and click Submit.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment
with settings copied from the DN entered in the Prime DN field.
·
Delete ­ Enter a Prime DN or a range of Prime DNs to delete and click OK.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-1

---

Station
Assignment
·
Change DN ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN
assignment and click OK.
5. Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the PDN equipment number as xxyyzz (cabinet, slot, and circuit)
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~16.
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (Strata CTX
100)
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX 670)
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100)
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 670); zz = Circuit 01~16 (default = no value)
Note
BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the PDN is, or
should be, assigned.
02 Station Type
Select Station Type.
Possible values: DKT (default) or SLT
03 Circuit Type
Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail
·
Extension ­ Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.
·
Voice Mail ­ Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail RSTU
circuits.
04 COS Day1
Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
·
Night
05 DRL Day1
DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night; Used for Credit card calling
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Night
06 FRL Day1
Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Night
07 LCR Group
Station LCR Group Number
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
08 QPL Day1
QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
·
Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Night
09 Station Name1
Enter Station Name to be displayed on LCD.
Possible values: Up to eight ASCII characters (default = no value)
5-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
10 Call Waiting Tone
Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values: None (default), Singular or Continuity
11 Dialing Progress Tone
Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
12 System Call Forward.
Select the System Call Forward Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CTX670), 0~4 (CTX100) (default = 0)
13 Call Pickup
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values: Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
Possible values: 3.1kHzAudio (default) or Speech
15 Display DN
Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned) and if
the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
16 Caller Emergency
Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Service Identification
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value}
(CESID)
17 Emergency Call Group
Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
18 Remote CF/DND
Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CTX
Password
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
19 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 16 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to the PDN
Stati
that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
o
22 MW to VM Port
Enter the Message Waiting center DN.
n
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
23 Travelling COS Change
Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override Code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 TGAC Override1
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console) from
this station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-3

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
25 Service Tones
Disable Service Tone for Data Privacy.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Note
Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems, faxes,
and similar devices.
26 CW and ROB Tone
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Campon) and Ring Over Busy
Tone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Notes
·
CW tone is always two beeps.
·
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
27 Name Display
Enable this station with the privilege to put the user name in the Directory
Assistance display of a large LCD.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
28 Door Ovr DND
Enable DND override by door phone.
Possible values: Override or Do not Override (default)
29 Emerg Ringdown
Enable Emergency Ringdown.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
30 Chg Sys Speed
Enable this station to use System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
31 Network COS
Select Network COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
32 Auto OCA
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
33 Originate OCA
Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
34 RSTU Supervision
This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for these
types of Connections.
Possible values: Received (default) or Not Received
Possible values: Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically
hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with "Not Received."
35 Station SpDial Bins
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values: Up to 100 (default = 0)
1. Cannot be entered from DKT in Release 1.
5-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Basic Station Record Sheets
Prime DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
Day 1
17 Emerg Call Group
31 Network COS
02 Station Type
08 QPL
Day 2
18 Remote CF/DND PW
32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type
Night
19 VMID Code SMDI
33 Originate OCA
Day 1
07 LCR Group
20 MW to VM Port
34 RSTU Supervision
04 COS
Day 2
09 Station Name
23 Travel COS Change
35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night
10 Call Waiting Tone
24 TGAC Override
Day 1
11 Dialing Progress Tone
25 Service Tones
05 DRL
Day 2
12 System Call Forward
26 CW and ROB Tone
Night
13 Call Pickup
27 Name Display
Day 1
14 Bearer Capability
28 Door over DND
06 FRL
Day 2
15 Display DN
29 Emerg Ringdown
Night
16 CESID
30 Chg Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
Day 1
17 Emerg Call Group
31 Network COS
02 Station Type
08 QPL
Day 2
18 Remote CF/DND PW
32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type
Night
19 VMID Code SMDI
33 Originate OCA
Day 1
07 LCR Group
20 MW to VM Port
34 RSTU Supervision
04 COS
Day 2
09 Station Name
23 Travel COS Change
35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night
10 Call Waiting Tone
24 TGAC Override
Day 1
11 Dialing Progress Tone
25 Service Tones
05 DRL
Day 2
12 System Call Forward
26 CW and ROB Tone
Night
13 Call Pickup
27 Name Display
Day 1
14 Bearer Capability
28 Door over DND
06 FRL
Day 2
15 Display DN
29 Emerg Ringdown
Night
16 CESID
30 Chg Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
Day 1
17 Emerg Call Group
31 Network COS
02 Station Type
08 QPL
Day 2
18 Remote CF/DND PW
32 Auto OCA
03 Circuit Type
Night
19 VMID Code SMDI
33 Originate OCA
Day 1
07 LCR Group
20 MW to VM Port
34 RSTU Supervision
04 COS
Day 2
09 Station Name
23 Travel COS Change
35 Station Sp Dial Bins
Night
10 Call Waiting Tone
24 TGAC Override
Day 1
11 Dialing Progress Tone
25 Service Tones
05 DRL
Day 2
12 System Call Forward
26 CW and ROB Tone
Night
13 Call Pickup
27 Name Display
Day 1
14 Bearer Capability
28 Door over DND
06 FRL
Day 2
15 Display DN
29 Emerg Ringdown
Night
16 CESID
30 Chg Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 PDN Equipment No.
Day 1
17 Emerg Call Group
31 Network COS
02 Station Type
08 QPL
Day 2
18 Remote CF/DND PW
32 Auto OCA
Stati
03 Circuit Type
Night
19 VMID Code SMDI
33 Originate OCA
Day 1
07 LCR Group
20 MW to VM Port
34 RSTU Supervision
o
04 COS
Day 2
09 Station Name
23 Travel COS Change
35 Station Sp Dial Bins
n
Night
10 Call Waiting Tone
24 TGAC Override
Day 1
11 Dialing Progress Tone
25 Service Tones
05 DRL
Day 2
12 System Call Forward
26 CW and ROB Tone
Night
13 Call Pickup
27 Name Display
Day 1
14 Bearer Capability
28 Door over DND
06 FRL
Day 2
15 Display DN
29 Emerg Ringdown
Night
16 CESID
30 Chg Sys Speed
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-5

---

Station
Assignment
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1. Use the "DKT Parameters Record Sheet" on page 5-9 to record your desired DKT settings.
2. From the Program
Menu, click Station >
Assignment.
3. Click on the DKT tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in
the Prime DN field
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a
summary list of
programmed
DKTs.
·
Extended List ­
view a detailed list
of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy to make a new DKT assignment
with settings copied from the DN entered into.
5. Setup the DKT by adding values to the remaining fields.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Station Type
Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values: Extension (default) or Attendant
02 Key Strip Pattern
Assign the Key strip pattern that is used by this DKT. See "Feature Button Patterns"
on page 5-10 for pattern details.
Possible values: Pattern 1, 2 or None (default)
03 Key Strip Type
Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note
Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.
Possible values: 1, 3, 10, 14 or 20 (default)
04 Add on Modules
Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See "Key" on page 5-13.
Possible values: None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units
05 Tone 1st /Voice 1st
Select Tone First or Voice First signalling.
Possible values: Tone or Voice (default)
5-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 OCA Type
Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA Originate
below.
Possible values: Handset (default) or Speaker
09 Handsfree MIC Setting
If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter
to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Handsfree Tone
If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter to
send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals. Disabling this
parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on / 3 sec Off).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
13 Ringing Line Preference
Select Ringing Line Preference.
Possible values: Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and
Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
14 Off-hook Preference
Select Off-hook preference type.
Possible values: CO Key or DN Key (default)
15 Ringing Preference
Select Call Answering Preference. The Longest setting answers in order of longest
ringing line (FIFO). The Call Type setting assigns Call Type priorities to oldest
ringing line.
Possible values: Longest or Call Type (default)
16 Text Message Display
Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message.
Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values: Immediate (default) or Not Immediate
17 Call History Memory
Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
18 DTMF Back Tone
Enables audible DTMF when dialing from a DKT to a trunk or Voice Mail port.
Padded dialing mutes the volume level to the caller not the called trunk or VM
device.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
Stati
19 Continuous DTMF
Select Continuous DTMF setting.
on
Possible values: Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
20 Display Language
Select the LCD Display Language.
Possible values: English (default), British English or French
21 Adapter
Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
·
BPCI ­ for USB interface.
·
BATI ­ for PC Attendant Console Interface.
Possible values: None (default), BPCI or BATI
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-7

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
22 Blind Transfer
Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values: Leave or Separate (default)
23 Mail Box Selection
Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Manual Voice Recording.
Notes
·
The DN assigned as the MSG center in Basic Station (200) is used to call the
VM port or Hunt Group.
·
When set to Auto, the VM-ID of the station checking the record function is sent
to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
Possible values: Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value
Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone call.
Note
The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
25 Microphone
Enable microphone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy Tone
while on a speaker phone call.
Possible values: Yes (default) or No
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Possible values: Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note
See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.
28 Attd Overflow Dest.
Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)
29 Trunk Test and Verify
Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
Possible values: Yes or No (default)
30 Auto Line Hold
Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to "line hop" from one
call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
5-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
DKT Parameters Record Sheet
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
Stati
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
on
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Station Type
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
19 Continuous DTMF
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
02 Key Strip Pattern
12 Not Used
20 Display Language
28 Attd. Overflow Dest.
03 Key Strip Type
13 Ringing Line Preference
21 Adapter
29 Trunk Test and Verify
04 Add-on Modules
14 Off-hook Preference
22 Blind Transfer
30 Auto Line Hold
05 Tone/Voice First
15 Ringing Preference.
23 Mail Box Selection
06 OCA Type
16 Text Message Display
24 MIC Init. Value
09 Handsfree MIC
17 Call History Memory
25 Microphone
10 Handsfree Tone
18 DTMF Back Tone
26 Speaker Mode Tones
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-9

---

Station
Assignment
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for )% above.
Table 5-2
20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Prime DN
Prime DN
Prime DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
CO 5
No Data
FB07
CO 6
CO 6
No Data
FB08
CO 7
CO 7
No Data
FB09
CO 8
CO 8
No Data
FB10
CO 9
CO 9
No Data
FB11
CO 10
CO 10
No Data
FB12
CO 11
CO 11
No Data
FB13
CO 12
CO 12
No Data
FB14
CO 13
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB15
CO 14
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB16
CO 15
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB17
CO 16
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB18
CO 17
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB19
CO 18
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB20
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
Table 5-3
10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Prime DN
Prime DN
Prime DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB07
CO 6
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB08
CO 7
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB09
CO 8
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB10
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
5-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Table 5-4
14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Prime DN
Prime DN
Prime DN
FB02
CO 1
No Data
No Data
FB03
CO 2
No Data
No Data
FB04
CO 3
No Data
No Data
FB05
CO 4
No Data
No Data
FB06
CO 5
No Data
No Data
FB07
No Data
No Data
No Data
FB08
CO 7
No Data
No Data
FB09
CO 8
No Data
No Data
FB10
CO 9
No Data
No Data
FB11
CO 10
No Data
No Data
FB12
CO 11
No Data
No Data
FB13
Do Not Disturb
No Data
No Data
FB14
No Data
No Data
No Data
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-11

---

Station
Assignment
214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a
station. The assignment is referenced to the stations's Prime DN.
1. From the Program
Menu, click Station >
Assignment.
2. Click on the DSS tab
(shown right).
3. Enter a DN number in
the Prime DN field
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a
summary list of
programmed DSSs.
·
Extended List ­ view a detailed list of programmed DSSs.
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the Prime Directory Number of the station that is to be associated with the
DSS console(s).
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).
01~08 DSS Equipment No.
Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
1~8
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~16
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (Strata CTX
100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX 670).
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
(default = no value)
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Note
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must be deleted,
using PRG201, before attempting to assign the DSS console.
5-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Key
Program Number(s): 205/213/215
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1 and 204 on page 5-6
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional
parameters to completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing
assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Use the "Feature Button Record Sheet" on page 5-17 to plan your FB assignments.
2. From the Program Menu, click Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Key tab (shown below).
Notes
·
To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
·
To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2 shown below), FB04 Add on Modules in
Program 204 must be set to One or Two.
4. Enter one of the following in the Prime DN field:
Stati
·
Prime DN to program DKT FBs.
on
·
Prime DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
·
Prime DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs
...or click one of the following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
·
Extended List ­ view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy ­ After entering the source DN in the Prime DN field, click Copy and designate which
FB buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and
click OK.
5. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-13

---

Station
Assignment
6. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
·
Directory No ­ Assign a Prime DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message
Waiting, or DSS key to this FB. See "Directory Number Sub-parameters" on page 5-15 for
more details.
·
CO Line ­ Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See "CO Lines Sub-parameters" on
page 5-15 for more details.
·
Features ­ Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release,
BGM Key, Program Access, Account Code or Application Starting Key feature to this FB.
·
Call Control ­ Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
·
Call Forward ­ Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward
Busy, Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/
Busy, Forward Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
·
Park Page ­ Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging,
Individual Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
·
Call Pickup ­ Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed
Group, Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local
Retrieve, Pickup-Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and
Incoming.
·
Door Lock ­ Enable FB to unlock Door Lock. See "Door Lock Sub-parameters" on
page 5-16 for more details.
·
Voice Mail ­ Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
·
Attendant ­ Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test,
Attendant Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
·
One Touch ­ Assign FB to be used as a One Touch button.
·
Blank ­ Clear FB assignment.
7. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB
displays an abbreviation for the selected feature.
...or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are
required. See the tables that follow for more details. Follow the directions in each pop-up
dialog box.
8. Click Submit.
5-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Directory Number Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Secondary/Phantom DN
1. Enter DN Number.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Phantom DN Message
Enter Phantom DN No.
Warning
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
DSS Key
Enter DSS Prime DN No.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
CO Lines Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
CO
1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values: 1~264 (CTX670), 1~64 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Stati
GCO
1. Select GCO No.
o
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
n
2. Select Index.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-15

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Pooled Line Key
1. Select Pool Line No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Door Lock Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Door Unlock
Select Door Lock No.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 1)
5-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Feature Button Record Sheet
PDN,
Sub-parameter Settings
Button
Button
Button
PDN
Phantom DN,
Number
Name
Code
CO, GCO, PL
1
2
3
4
5
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-17

---

Station
Assignment
Button Assignment Record Sheets
Use the following record sheets together with the "Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button
Telephones" on page 5-18 and "Record Sheets for the DKT3014" on page 5-19 to plan your
Station Flexible Button Assignments.
Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
10
DSS
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
PDN No. ______
20 ADM
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
5-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
Record Sheets for the DKT3014
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
07
14
07
14
07
14
07
14
06
13
06
13
06
13
06
13
05
12
05
12
05
12
05
12
04
11
04
11
04
11
04
11
03
10
03
10
03
10
03
10
02
09
02
09
02
09
02
09
01
08
01
08
01
08
01
08
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
07
14
07
14
07
14
07
14
06
13
06
13
06
13
06
13
05
12
05
12
05
12
05
12
04
11
04
11
04
11
04
11
03
10
03
10
03
10
03
10
02
09
02
09
02
09
02
09
01
08
01
08
01
08
01
08
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
07
14
07
14
07
14
07
14
06
13
06
13
06
13
06
13
05
12
05
12
05
12
05
12
04
11
04
11
04
11
04
11
03
10
03
10
03
10
03
10
02
09
02
09
02
09
02
09
01
08
01
08
01
08
01
08
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
07
14
07
14
07
14
07
14
06
13
06
13
06
13
06
13
05
12
05
12
05
12
05
12
04
11
04
11
04
11
04
11
03
10
03
10
03
10
03
10
02
09
02
09
02
09
02
09
01
08
01
08
01
08
01
08
Stati
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
PDN No. _______
o
Location:
Location:
Location:
Location:
n
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
Code
07
14
07
14
07
14
07
14
06
13
06
13
06
13
06
13
05
12
05
12
05
12
05
12
04
11
04
11
04
11
04
11
03
10
03
10
03
10
03
10
02
09
02
09
02
09
02
09
01
08
01
08
01
08
01
08
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-19

---

Station
Assignment
Data
Program Number(s): 208, 210 and 216
Assign Timers, Paging and other related station data using the programs that follow.
1. Complete the Station
Data record sheet
provided on page 5-31.
2. From the Program
Menu click Station >
Assignment.
3. Click on the Data tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in
the Prime DN field.
...or select an existing
record by clicking one
of the following
buttons:
·
List ­ view a
summary list of programmed DKTs.
·
Extended List ­ view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
208 Station Timer Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
Assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the Prime DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 ABR Retry Count
Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone
number.
Possible values: 5~20 (default = 15)
02 ABR Retry Interval
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Timer
Possible values: 30~180 (default = 60)
03 ABR Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring
back tone from the dialed number.
Possible values: 5~60 (default = 20)
04 Hold Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds before a call is placed on hold recalls.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 60)
5-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 First Interdigit Timer
Select the amount of time a Station has to dial a feature access code after going off
hook before a call is terminated (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
06 Second Interdigit Timer
Select the amount of time the system waits between dialed digits before terminating
a call (ROT is heard).
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
07 Ring Xfer No Answer
Select the Ring Transfer Idle station or Busy station (Camp-on) Recall Time (in
Timer
seconds)
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 32)
210 Group Call Pickup
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
The Call Pickup Group assignment specifies which group numbers this station will participate
when either the Group Call Pickup or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user
may be assigned to more than one group.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01~32
Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this stations is to
participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
216 Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Prime DNs.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Emergency Ringdown
Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Emergency Ringdown
Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency
Timer
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)
Stati
03 Destination
Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
o
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
n
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-21

---

Station
Assignment
Page Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
Assigns Prime DNs to Paging Group(s).
1. Complete the Station
Data record sheet
provided on page 5-31.
2. From the Program Menu
click Station >
Assignment.
3. Click on the Page Group
tab (shown right).
4. Enter a DN number in
the Prime DN field.
...or select an existing
record by clicking one
of the following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
·
Extended List ­ view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign
existing Paging Group settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Prime DN
Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 PG01~16 PG16
Check the Paging Group(s) this station belongs too.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
17 All Paging Group
Check this radio button to enter this station in all Paging Groups.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
18 All Emergency Page
Check this radio button to enter this station in all Emergency Paging Groups.
Group
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
5-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
206 Phantom DN
206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
1. Complete the "Phantom
DN Record Sheet" on
page 5-25.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Station > Phantom
DN. The Station Phantom
DN screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter a Phantom DN
number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed Phantom DNs.
·
Copy ­ Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom
DN to copy the data too. Click OK.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Phantom DN
Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Owned PDN
Set PhantomDN's Owner Station
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Tone/Voice First
Select from Tone first, or Voice first signaling.
Possible values: Tone First (default) or Voice First
04 Display DN
Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Stati
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if
o
the Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN, the
n
number displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
...or This number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
...or The calling telephone's PDN.
05 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-23

---

Station
206 Phantom DN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 VM ID Code
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (This
number is prefixed by codes in Program 579, )%~)%).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 16 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls to the PhDN that forward to
voice mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note
Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a
PDN in a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, )%).
The associated PDN's VMID code (Program 200, )%) will be sent to voice mail.
09 Message Center
Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM
hunt group.
Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 User Name
Enter user name.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 Display Name
Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
5-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
206 Phantom DN
Phantom DN Record Sheet
02 Tone/Voice 1st
Voice Mail
05 System
Phantom DN
01 Owned PDN
04 Display DN
Call Forward
09 Message
11 Display
Tone
Voice
06 ID
10 User Name
Center
Name
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-25

---

Station
209 Hunt Group
209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
1. Complete the "Hunt
Group Record Sheet" on
page 5-28.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Station > Hunt
Group. The Station Hunt
Group displays.
3. Click on the Group tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a Group Number for
an existing record
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Create ­ Assign a new Hunt Group with custom settings.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Hunt Group Number
Possible values: 1~640 (CTX670), 1~90 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Hunt Method
Select Hunt Method
Possible values: Distributed (for Voice Mail hunt groups) or Circular (for Multiple
DN hunt groups) (default)
02 Pilot Number
Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt
group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt
group can have a pilot number.
Note
Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups
must have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt groups should be Distributed
with a Pilot Number. Multiple DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no
Pilot Number.
04 Number to Display
Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of
the hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt
groups. This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN Hunt group, in
which case the number would override the number assigned in Program
200, FB15 for PDNs and Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.
5-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
209 Hunt Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 Pilot No. SCFwd1
Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a Hunt
Group.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
06 Muitple DN Hunt
Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
07 DHG Auto Camp-on
Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt Group or not.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers automatically camp on
to Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt
groups.
1. Not available in Release 1.
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-27

---

Station
209 Hunt Group
Hunt Group Record Sheet
Program 209 Values
Program 218 Values
01 Hunt
05 Pilot
06
07 DHG
03 DN Set
Group
Method
02 Pilot
04 Number to
01 Hunt
No.
Multiple
Auto
02 DN
Type
Number
Number
Display
Order
SCFwd
DN Hunt Camp-on
Dist
Circ
Mod
Ins
5-28
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
209 Hunt Group
218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 209 on page 5-26
This program assigns station DNs to Hunt Groups using Program 209, and assigns the rotation
order in which DNs are hunted.
1. Complete the "Hunt Group
Record Sheet" on page 5-28.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Station > Hunt Group
Assignment. The Station
Hunt Group Assignment
screen displays.
3. Click on the Member tab
(shown right).
4. Enter a Member Number for
an existing record
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Add ­ Assign a new station DN to the Hunt Group number entered above.
·
Append ­ Assign a new DN as the last DN in a Hunt Group's hunt order.
·
Modify ­ Highlight an existing DN in the Hunt Order and change the station DN
assignment.
·
Delete ­ Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Hunt Group Number
Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or
Delete buttons as described above.
Possible values: 1~640 (default = no value)
01 Hunt Order
This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group's Hunt Order. The
Hunt Order is selected automatically by CTX WinAdmin. Programmers should
assign the last station in the Hunt Order first and assign the first station in the Hunt
Order last.
Stati
Possible values: 1~560 (default = no value)
on
02 DN
By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the Hunt Group's Hunt
Order. Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry, use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 DN Set Type
Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
Possible values: Modify (default) or Insert
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-29

---

Station
516 Station Speed Dial
516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 5-1
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each
station. Speed Dial numbers are stored in "Bins" and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers
by entering the Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced
Speed Dialing features are available in Strata CTX.
·
Speed Dial Bin Linking ­ Whenever a Speed Dial number exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin
memory limitation, the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the
adjacent Speed Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary Speed Dial Bin
number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the "adjacent Speed Dial Bin"
as described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum
allowable dial digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit
restriction, the excess digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a
unique Speed Dial record.
·
Speed Dial Number Nesting ­ A Speed Dial number can be nested into another Speed Dial
number. For example, if an international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any
Speed Dial Bin. Then in the another Speed Dial Bin, program the first Bin number + the
number to dial. When the second Speed Dial Bin is activated, Strata CTX first retrieves and
dials the international dialing prefix from the first Bin location, then adds the numbers to dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Station > Speed Dial. The
Station Speed Dial screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
01 Speed Dial Bin
Select the Speed Dial Bin location.
Possible values: 00~99 (default = no value)
02 Number
Enter the Speed Dial number.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
5-30
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
516 Station Speed Dial
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 Name
Enter the DN Name to appear on the DKT3014 LCD dial directory.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Station Data Record Sheets
Program 208 Values
Program 210 Values (Enter a Check to turn "ON")
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
ABR
ABR
1st
2nd
Ring
Prime
ABR
Hold
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Retry
Retry
Inter
Inter
Xfer
DN
Recall Recall
Count
Interval
digit
digit
Ans
Program 216 Values
Program 502 Values (Enter a Check to turn "ON")
Program 516 Values
01
02
03
All
All
Prime
01 Speed
Emerg
Ring
Page
Emerg
02 Number
03 Name
DN
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Dial Bin
Ring
down
Dest
Grp
Page
down
Timer
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-31

---

Station
ISDN
ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217
202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI stations.
1. Complete the "ISDN BRI
Station Record Sheets" on
page 5-36.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Station > ISDN >
Basic. The ISDN Basic
Station Assignment
screen displays (shown
right).
3. Enter a Prime DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
DN's.
·
Create ­ Assign a new
Prime DN with custom
BRI Station settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment
with BRI Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Prime DN field.
·
Delete ­ Enter a ISDN Prime DN to delete and click OK.
·
Change DN ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN
to the ISDN BRI Station.
4. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a
new station. The System assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
5-32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (Strata CTX
100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX 670).
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 670). (default = no value)
Note
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/
RBSS interface PCB to which the PDN is, or should be, assigned.
02 ISDN Channel Group
Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)
03 ISDN Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information
set in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
Note
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
04 Type Connection
Select connection type.
Possible values: Point to point (default) or Point to Multi-point
05 BRI Station COS
Select the BRI Station COS Day assignments.
·
Day1 COS
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
·
Day2 COS
·
Night COS
06 BRI Station DRL
Select the BRI Station DRL Day assignments.
·
Day1 DRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Day2 DRL
·
Night DRL
07 BRI Station FRL
Select the BRI Station FRL Day assignments.
·
Day1 FRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
Stati
·
Day2 FRL
on
·
Night FRL
09 BRI Station QPL
Select the BRI Station QPL Day assignments.
·
Day1 QPL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
·
Day2 QPL
·
Night QPL
08 LCR Group
Select the LCR Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 Speech Capability
Enable speech capability. See Table 5-5 on page 5-35.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-33

---

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 3.1 KHz Audio
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 5-35.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
12 7 KHz Audio
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 5-5 on page 5-35.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 5-5 on page 5-35.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
15 2 x 64Kbps Unrestricted
16 B Channel Selection
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
·
Exclusive ­ (default) Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
·
Preferred ­ Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
·
Any Channel ­ Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
17 Idle B Channel
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Selection
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
·
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
·
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
·
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-
channel selection).
·
Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
18 Interdigit Timer 1
Select the Interdigit timer value, to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
19 Interdigit Timer 2
Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
20 CESID
Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
21 Number Voice Calls
Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously
Allowed
written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
Note
If One is selected, the other channel is reserved for Data.
22 Service Tone
Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Permission
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
23 TGAC Override
Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
24 Change System Speed
Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
5-34
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
25 Network COS
Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in
this field is erased.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8
Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
33 Auto OCA
Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
34 Originate OCA
Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Table 5-5
BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bearer
Bellcore
Servic
ETSI
TTC
Nat'l ISDN
es
Speech
X
X
X
3.1kHz Audio
X
X
X
7kHz Audio
X
X
circuit
mode
64 kbps
X
X
X
Rate adaptation
unrestricted digital information
X
from 56 kbps
2x64
X
X
Stati
on
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-35

---

Station
ISDN
ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
Day 1
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp
07 FRL
Day 2
15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted
26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol
Day 3
16 B Channel Selection
27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
Day 1
17 Idle B Ch Selection
28 Additional DN4
Day 1
09 QPL
Day 2
18 Interdigit Timer 1
29 Additional DN5
05 COS
Day 2
Day 3
19 Interdigit Timer 2
30 Additional DN6
Day 3
08 LCR Group
20 CESID
31 Additional DN7
Day 1
10 Speech Capability
21 Voice Calls Allowed
32 Additional DN8
06 DRL
Day 2
11 3.1 KHz Audio
22 Svc Tone Permission
33 Auto OCA
Day 3
12 7 KHz Audio
23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
24 Ch Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
Day 1
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp
07 FRL
Day 2
15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted
26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol
Day 3
16 B Channel Selection
27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
Day 1
17 Idle B Ch Selection
28 Additional DN4
Day 1
09 QPL
Day 2
18 Interdigit Timer 1
29 Additional DN5
05 COS
Day 2
Day 3
19 Interdigit Timer 2
30 Additional DN6
Day 3
08 LCR Group
20 CESID
31 Additional DN7
Day 1
10 Speech Capability
21 Voice Calls Allowed
32 Additional DN8
06 DRL
Day 2
11 3.1 KHz Audio
22 Svc Tone Permission
33 Auto OCA
Day 3
12 7 KHz Audio
23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
24 Ch Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
Day 1
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp
07 FRL
Day 2
15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted
26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol
Day 3
16 B Channel Selection
27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
Day 1
17 Idle B Ch Selection
28 Additional DN4
Day 1
09 QPL
Day 2
18 Interdigit Timer 1
29 Additional DN5
05 COS
Day 2
Day 3
19 Interdigit Timer 2
30 Additional DN6
Day 3
08 LCR Group
20 CESID
31 Additional DN7
Day 1
10 Speech Capability
21 Voice Calls Allowed
32 Additional DN8
06 DRL
Day 2
11 3.1 KHz Audio
22 Svc Tone Permission
33 Auto OCA
Day 3
12 7 KHz Audio
23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
24 Ch Sys Speed
Prime DN: _____________________
01 Equipment
Day 1
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
25 Network COS
02 ISDN Ch Grp
07 FRL
Day 2
15 2x64Kbps Unrestricted
26 Additional DN2
03 ISDN Protocol
Day 3
16 B Channel Selection
27 Additional DN3
04 Type Connection
Day 1
17 Idle B Ch Selection
28 Additional DN4
Day 1
09 QPL
Day 2
18 Interdigit Timer 1
29 Additional DN5
05 COS
Day 2
Day 3
19 Interdigit Timer 2
30 Additional DN6
Day 3
08 LCR Group
20 CESID
31 Additional DN7
Day 1
10 Speech Capability
21 Voice Calls Allowed
32 Additional DN8
06 DRL
Day 2
11 3.1 KHz Audio
22 Svc Tone Permission
33 Auto OCA
Day 3
12 7 KHz Audio
23 TGAC Override
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
24 Ch Sys Speed
5-36
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Station
ISDN
217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 202 on page 5-32
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
1. Complete the "ISDN
Station Data Record
Sheet" on page 5-39.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Station > ISDN >
Station Data. The ISDN
Individual Station Data
Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Prime DN for an
existing record
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment
with BRI Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Prime DN field.
4. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter Prime DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Station Name
Enter a name for this station.
Possible values: Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Dial Method
Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone
03 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
Stati
04 CF Password
Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
o
Possible values: Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
n
05 Door Phone Override
Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
DND
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Emerg Call Group
Select this station's emergency call group.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
07 COS Override Code
Enable Class of Service override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
08 Display DN
Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
5-37

---

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #, up to 16 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Program 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.
12 Name Display
Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
5-38
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Str
ata
IS
CT
D
Prime DN
X Pr
N S
og
tat
ram
io
m
n
ing
01 Station Name
D
Man
ata
u
R
al
e

co
12/
02 Dial Method
r
01
d Sh
03 System CF
eet
04 CF Password
05 Door Phone Override
06 Emerg Call Croup
07 COS Override
08 Display DN
09 VMID Code SMDI\DTMF
12 Name Display
St
at
ISDN
5-
io
3
n
9
n
o
Stati

---

Station
ISDN
5-40
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
6
This chapter provides trunk programming information for Strata CTX.
ILG
Program Number(s): 304
ILG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for
incoming service.
1. Complete the "ILG Record
Sheet" on page 6-4.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ILG. The
Trunk Incoming Line
Groups (ILG) screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
ILGs.
·
Create ­ Assign a new
ILG with default
settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter an ILG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new ILG
assignment with settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete ­ Delete an ILG.
4. Enter Program 304 data.
5. Click Submit.
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-1

---

Trunks
ILG
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the ILG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Service Type
Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: DID or DIT (default)
04 Private Service Type
Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is set to
Tie.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
05 GCO Key Number
Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same GCO
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
06 Pooled Key Number
Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
07 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
08 DRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 DID Digits
Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values: 0~7 (default = 0)
12 Speech/3.1 KHz
Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
13 Ringing Timer Delay 1
Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
14 Ringing Timer Delay 2
Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
6-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ILG
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Interdigit 1 Timer
Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 15)
16 Interdigit 2 Timer
Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 5)
17 Auto Camp-on
Select in box to toggle Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
18 Calling Number ID
Select Calling Number Identification source.
Possible values: User Provided (default) or Network Provided
19 Intercept
Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept
position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or
DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call
cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a
simplified attendant console, the attendant console is usually specified to terminate
the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 Send Dial Tone
Enable Send Dial Tone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
21 TGAC Override
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
22 Network COS
Enter the Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
23 LCR Group
Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not
entered.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
24 Change COS Override
Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
Code
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Register Speed Dial
Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Codes
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Originator Invoke OCA
Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
busy station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by digit.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-3

---

Trunks
ILG
ILG Record Sheet
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 DID Digits
20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type
08 DRL
Day 2
12 Speech/3.1KHz
21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type
Night
Ringing
13 Delay 1
22 Network COS
Timer
04 Private Svc Type
Day 1
14 Delay 2
23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number
09 FRL
Day 2
Interdigit 15 Timer 1
24 Change COS Ovr Code
Timer
06 Pooled Key Number
Night
16 Timer 2
25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
Day 1
Day 1
17 Auto Camp-on
26 Originator Invoke OCA
07 COS
Day 2
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Calling Number ID
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night
Night
19 Intercept
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
02 DNIS Field
03 B Record for
04 Abandoned Call
05 Display Xsferred
Records
Indication
Incoming Call
Record Output
Call Records
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 DID Digits
20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type
08 DRL
Day 2
12 Speech/3.1KHz
21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type
Night
Ringing
13 Delay 1
22 Network COS
Timer
04 Private Svc Type
Day 1
14 Delay 2
23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number
09 FRL
Day 2
Interdigit 15 Timer 1
24 Change COS Ovr Code
Timer
06 Pooled Key Number
Night
16 Timer 2
25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
Day 1
Day 1
17 Auto Camp-on
26 Originator Invoke OCA
07 COS
Day 2
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Calling Number ID
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night
Night
19 Intercept
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
02 DNIS Field
03 B Record for
04 Abandoned Call
05 Display Xsferred
Records
Indication
Incoming Call
Record Output
Call Records
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 DID Digits
20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type
08 DRL
Day 2
12 Speech/3.1KHz
21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type
Night
Ringing
13 Delay 1
22 Network COS
Timer
04 Private Svc Type
Day 1
14 Delay 2
23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number
09 FRL
Day 2
Interdigit 15 Timer 1
24 Change COS Ovr Code
Timer
06 Pooled Key Number
Night
16 Timer 2
25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
Day 1
Day 1
17 Auto Camp-on
26 Originator Invoke OCA
07 COS
Day 2
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Calling Number ID
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night
Night
19 Intercept
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
02 DNIS Field
03 B Record for
04 Abandoned Call
05 Display Xsferred
Records
Indication
Incoming Call
Record Output
Call Records
Program 304 Values
ILG: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 DID Digits
20 Send Dial Tone
02 Trunk Type
08 DRL
Day 2
12 Speech/3.1KHz
21 TGAC Override
03 Service Type
Night
Ringing
13 Delay 1
22 Network COS
Timer
04 Private Svc Type
Day 1
14 Delay 2
23 LCR Group
05 GCO Key Number
09 FRL
Day 2
Interdigit 15 Timer 1
24 Change COS Ovr Code
Timer
06 Pooled Key Number
Night
16 Timer 2
25 Reg Speed Dial Codes
Day 1
Day 1
17 Auto Camp-on
26 Originator Invoke OCA
07 COS
Day 2
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Calling Number ID
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Night
Night
19 Intercept
Program 513 Values
01 Generate SMDR
02 DNIS Field
03 B Record for
04 Abandoned Call
05 Display Xsferred
Records
Indication
Incoming Call
Record Output
Call Records
6-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
306 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for
outgoing service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG
and an ILG).
1. Complete the "OLG Record
Sheet" on page 6-7.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > OLG. The
Trunk Outgoing Line
Groups (OLG) screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an OLG number in
the Group Number field for
an existing record
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
OLGs.
·
Create ­ Assign a new OLG with default settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG
assignment with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete ­ Delete an OLG.
4. Enter Program 306 data.
5. Enter Program 531. See "531 DR Screening Table for OLG" on page 8-25 for details.
6. Enter Program 514. See "514 SMDR for OLG Assignment" on page 8-51 for details.
7. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the OLG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Private Service Type
TIE Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: Standard (default) or QSIG
Tr
04 GCO Key1 Number
Select the first GCO Key Group number.
unk
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-5

---

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 Pooled Key1 Number
Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
07 Pooled Key2 Number
Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
08 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 Speech/3.1 KHz
Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
12 MOH Source
Select MOH Source.
Possible values: Silence, External1~15 (default = External1)
13 Account Codes
Enable Trunk forced Account Codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
14 Destination Restriction
Enable Destination Restriction.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
15 Credit Cart Calling
Enable Credit Card Calling.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
16 Send CESID
Enable CESID sending.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 QSIG Sending Type
Digit sending Mode for QSIG only.
Possible values: Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)
18 Network COS
Select Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
6-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
OLG Record Sheet
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type
08 COS
Day 2
12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type
Night
13 Account Code
GCO
04 Key 1
Day 1
14 DR
Number
05 Key 2
09 FRL
Day 2
15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
06 Key 1
Night
16 Send CESID
Number
07 Key 2
Day 1
17 QSIG Sending Type
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type
08 COS
Day 2
12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type
Night
13 Account Code
GCO
04 Key 1
Day 1
14 DR
Number
05 Key 2
09 FRL
Day 2
15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
06 Key 1
Night
16 Send CESID
Number
07 Key 2
Day 1
17 QSIG Sending Type
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type
08 COS
Day 2
12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type
Night
13 Account Code
GCO
04 Key 1
Day 1
14 DR
Number
05 Key 2
09 FRL
Day 2
15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
06 Key 1
Night
16 Send CESID
Number
07 Key 2
Day 1
17 QSIG Sending Type
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type
08 COS
Day 2
12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type
Night
13 Account Code
GCO
04 Key 1
Day 1
14 DR
Number
05 Key 2
09 FRL
Day 2
15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
06 Key 1
Night
16 Send CESID
Number
07 Key 2
Day 1
17 QSIG Sending Type
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Network COS
Night
Group Number: _____________________
01 Group Type
Day 1
11 Speech 3.1KHz
02 Trunk Type
08 COS
Day 2
12 MOH Source
03 Pvt Service Type
Night
13 Account Code
GCO
04 Key 1
Day 1
14 DR
Number
05 Key 2
09 FRL
Day 2
15 Credit Card Calling
Pool
06 Key 1
Night
16 Send CESID
Number
07 Key 2
Day 1
17 QSIG Sending Type
10 QPL
Day 2
18 Network COS
Night
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-7

---

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
300 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system.
Note Trunk is another name for Line in CTX.
1. Complete the "Trunk
Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 6-11.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > Basic. The
Trunk Basic Assignments
screen displays (shown
right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed Trunks.
·
Create ­ Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter an Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with
settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
·
Delete ­ Delete an Trunk.
4. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see "Timer/DIT" on page 6-23 for
details).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line Number
Enter the Line Number.
Possible values: 1~264 (default = no value)
6-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Line Equipment No.
Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08
...or zz = T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670).
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~8; zz = Circuit 01~08 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Incoming Line Group
Assign the trunk to Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
03 Outgoing Line Group
Assign the trunk to Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
04 Dial Mode
Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values: DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
·
DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
·
DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
05 Signaling
Enter the signalling type.
Possible values: DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Japan), SR (Japan) or ACU
(UK)
06 Start Method
Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between
the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
Possible values: Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start
07 Release Supervision
Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
08 Answer Supervision
Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
09 Trunk Name
Enter the trunk name.
T
Possible values: Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)
runk
10 External Ring Repeat
Supply the External Ringing Signal pattern to stations. For behind PBX/Centrex
s
trunks.
Possible values: Supplied (default) or Not Supplied
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-9

---

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 DTMF Back Tone
Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
12 Hunt Order
Change the trunk hunting order sequence for this Trunk.
Possible values: 1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
6-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Str
ata
Tr
T
C
un
r
T
k
unk Ass
X Pr
ogram
01 Trunk
Equipment
i
m
Number
gnment
ing
Man
02 ILG
ua
Recor
l 12/
03 OLG
01
d Sheet
04 Dial Mode
05 Signal
06 Start
Method
07 Release
Supervision
08 Answer
Supervision
09 Trunk
Name
10 External
Rng Repeat
30
11 DTMF
0 T
Back Tone
run
k As
12 Hunt Order
si
Tr
gn
u
me
6-
nk
nt
1
s
1
s
unk
r
T

---

Trunks
313 Caller ID Assignment
313 Caller ID Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 on page 6-8
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI,
DNIS, DID formats for TI and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Complete the "Caller ID
Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 6-13.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > Caller ID.
The Trunk Caller ID
Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Trunk Number in
Trunk Index for an existing
record.
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ to view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
·
Copy ­ Enter the Trunk Number in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new
Caller ID trunk numbers.
4. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trunk Number
Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values: 1~264 (default = no value)
01 Signaling Method
Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values: Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)
02 Signaling Contents
Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values: ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).
03 CLASS Equipment No.
If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit. Enter
the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08
Notes
·
CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to a RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
·
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit
to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID
circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
6-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
313 Caller ID Assignment
Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet
Trunk Number
01 Signal Method
02 Signal Content
03 CLID Equip
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-13

---

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
309 Direct Inward Dialing
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Complete the "DID
Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 6-17.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > DID. The
Trunk DID Assignments
screen displays (shown
right).
3. Select an ILG Number.
4. Enter a DID Number in the
01 DID Number field
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a list of programmed DIDs.
·
Create ­ Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID
assignment with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
·
Delete ­ Delete a DID.
5. Enter DID Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Group Number
Select the ILG number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 DID Number
Enter a DID number. This field is mandatory. These Numbers must not conflict with
any Called Party Number (CPN). No CPN and Out of Search are assigned other
Command.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Wild Card uses "?"
02 MOH Source
Set Music On Hold for Analog ISDN DID Trunk
Possible values: Quiet Tone or External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 GCO Key Group
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
04 Pool Key Group
Pooled Line Key Group
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
6-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Audio Day1 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Destination DN is only required if the destination type is "Dialing Digits"
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Audio Day2 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for Audio/Speech calls.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Audio Night Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for data calls
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Day1 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
09 Day2 Data Destination
Select the Destination Type for data calls.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Day2 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 Data Night Dst Type
Select the Destination type for data calls.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Night Destination DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-15

---

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 DNIS VMID Code
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01.
This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code
set in Program 309, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed;
therefore, if using Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DNIS Name
Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from the WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 VM Dial
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 16 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
6-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
DID Assignment Record Sheet
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
ILG ________________
Audio Destination Type
Data Destination Type
T
01 DID Num
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
runk
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
s
04 Pool Key Group
11 DNIS VMID
12 DNIS NAME
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-17

---

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
318 DID Intercept Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 304 on page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
1. Complete the "DID
Intercept Assignment
Record Sheet" on
page 6-21.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > DID
Intercept.The DID Intercept
Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter an ILG Number
...or click List to view a
summary list of
programmed ILGs.
4. Enter DID Type in the 01
Type field.
5. Enter DID Intercept Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Number
Enter ILG number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Type
Select Routing Type.
Possible values: No DID (default) or Not Determined
02 MOH Source
Select Music On Hold
Possible values: External 1~15 (default = External 1)
03 Group CO Destination
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
04 Pooled Line Group
POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Day2 destination type.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
6-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Audio Day2 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Night destination type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Audio Night Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the data call Day1 destination type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Day1 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Select the data call Day2 destination type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Day2 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 Data Night Dst Type
Select the data call Night destination type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
Bell
Data Night Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-19

---

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value).
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01.
This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code
set in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed;
therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number, or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DID/DNIS Name
Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from the WinAdmin (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS
VMID
number.
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 16 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CTX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
6-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
ILG Number ___________
Audio Destination
Data Destination
T
01 Type
05 Day 1
06 Day 2
07 Night
08 Day 1
09 Day 2
10 Night
runk
02 MOH Source
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
Type
Dest
03 GCO Key Group
s
04 Pool Key Group
11 VMID for DNIS
12 DNIS Name
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-21

---

Trunks
Service
Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Assigns Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > Service. The
Trunk Services screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Click Submit.
311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 DISA Enabled
Enable DISA security code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 DISA Code
Enter DISA security code.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
03 Response Timer
Enter the time, in seconds, for Strata CTX to respond to a call.
Possible values: 0~30 (default = 5)
04 Idle Timer
Enter the time in seconds to wait for idle DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 10)
319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CTX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions
are used when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.03 Night
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: None (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
03 Night Destination Type
Day1 Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Night Destination
·
To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
·
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
·
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
6-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
Timer/DIT
Timer/DIT
Program Number(s): 308 and 310
These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Complete the "Trunk
Timer/DIT Record Sheet"
on page 6-25.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > Timer/DIT.
The Trunk Timer and DIT
Assignments screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter Trunk equipment
number.Enter Program 308
data.
4. Enter Program 310 data.
·
List ­ to view a
summary list of programmed Trunks timers.
·
Copy ­ to copy to trunk timer ports.
5. Click Submit.
308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 on page 6-8
Assigns trunk timers for analog and T1 trunks.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trunk Equipment No.
Enter the trunk equipment number.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or
zz=T1 Circuit 01~24 (CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~24 (CTX100)
(default = no value)
Note
Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the
system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing
trunks.
01 Auto Release
Select the Automatic Release timing.
Possible values: Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
Note
Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic release signal to the
loop start trunk.
02 Short Flash
Select Short Flash Time.
Possible values: 0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5)
03 Long Flash
Select Long Flash Time
Possible values: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = 500msec. (default = 5)
Tr
04 Pause after Flash
Pause time after flash
unk
Possible values: 0~5 (default = 1)
s
05 Response Information
Response Information Timer (for analog DID/TIE trunks only).
Possible values: 0~3000 in increments of 50, where 1 = 1msec. (default = 250)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-23

---

Trunks
Timer/DIT
310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 on page 6-8
This command assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are
ground and loop start trunks.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line Equipment No.
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit
3, enter 050203.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01~07; yy =slot 01~10; zz = circuit 01~08 or
Channel 01~24 (CTX670).
xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 01~08; zz = circuit 01~24 or Channel
(CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: : No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
03 Night Destination Type
Bell
Day1 Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Night Destination
·
To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
·
To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
·
To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
04 MOH Source
Select the MOH source for Analog DIT Trunk. The Scroll key must be used to
select MOH sources indicated by 10 or higher.
Possible values: External1~15 (default = External1)
6-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
Timer/DIT
Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet
Program 308 Values
Program 310 Values
01 Auto
02 Short
03 Long
04
05
01 Day 1 Destination
02 Day 1 Destination
03 Night Destination
Trunk Equip No.
04 MOH
Release
Flash
Flash
Pause Response
Type
Destination
Type
Destination
Type
Destination
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-25

---

Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card
315 T1 Trunk Card
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
1. Complete the "Trunk
Timer/DIT Record Sheet"
on page 6-25.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > T1. The T1
Trunk Card Data
Assignment screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter T1 card location in
Shelf/Slot field (xxyy). The
selected slot requires a
DTU Card.
·
xx = Cabinet 01~07
·
yy = Slot 01~10
...or click the following buttons:
·
List ­ to view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
·
Copy ­ to T1 trunk equipment.
4. Enter values for Program 315.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
T1 Equipment Location
Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy =slot 03, 05, or 07
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy =slot 01, 03, or 05
Cabinet ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (Strata CTX
100).
Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet (Strata CTX 670).
Slot ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 100).
Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots
(Strata CTX 670)
(default = no value)
01 Coding Format
Select the Coding Format.
Possible values: None, PZC, B8ZS (default) or ZCS
02 Frame Format
Select the Frame Format.
Possible values: SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)
04 Receive PAD
Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
6-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 Send PAD
Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system settings.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI TE Trunks.
1. Complete the "ISDN BRI
Record Sheet" on
page 6-30.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN > BRI.
3. Enter Channel Group
number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Trunks.
·
Create ­ Assign a new
Trunk with default
settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment
with settings copied from the Channel Group you entered.
·
Delete ­ Delete an Trunk.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-27

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301 for
circuit 1.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04
(CTX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~04 (CTX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information
set in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
03 ILG
ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
received.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100), (default = no value).
04 OLG
OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100), (default = no value).
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
Enable speech capability. See Table 6-6 on page 6-31.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-6 on page 6-31.
Audio
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-6 on page 6-31.
Audio
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
09 Bearer Svc -
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-6 on page 6-31.
Unrestricted 64K
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
group.
10 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 56K
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
6-28
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
12 Outgoing B Ch Select
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
·
Explicit ­ Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
·
Preferred ­ (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
·
Any Channel ­ Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
13 B Ch Selection
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
·
Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
·
Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
·
Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
14 Initialize Type
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values: User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto
SPID or None (default)
15 Initialization Display
Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)
16 SPID #1
Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously entered information is
17 SPID #2
overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)
18 T-Wait Timer
Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing
SPID times to prevent BRI interfaces from re-initialize at the same time after a reset
or power outage.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
19 Voice Calls
Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be
consistent with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously
programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this
field any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-29

---

Trunks
ISDN
ISDN BRI Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2

Channel Group: _____________________
01 Equipment Number
07 3.1KHz Audio
12 Outgoing B Channel
17 SPID 2
02 Protocol
08 7KHz
13 B CH Selection
18 T-Wait Timer
03 ILG
09 Unrestricted 64K
14 Initialize Type
19 Voice Calls
04 OLG
10 Unrestricted 56K
15 Initialization Display
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
06 Speech
11 Unrestricted 2x64K
16 SPID 1
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
6-30
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Table 6-6
Bearer Capability Table
Bellcore
Bearer Services
ETSI
TTC
National ISDN
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz
X
X
X
7 KHz
X
X
64 Kbps
X
X
X
Circuit Mode
Rate adaptation
X
Unrestricted
from 56 Kbps
Digital
Information
2x64 Kbps
X
X
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-31

---

Trunks
ISDN
302 PRI Trunks
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1
The PRI Interface card needs to have a number of assignments for defining its operation. These
include which channels are available for use and the location of the D channel or signaling
channel. A number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
D Channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using "Call-by-Call" on page 6-37. Therefore, ILG and
OLG must be set to 0.
1. Complete the "PRI Trunks
Record Sheet" on
page 6-36.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN > PRI.
3. Enter Channel Group
number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Trunks.
·
Create ­ Assign a new
Trunk with default
settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter an
Channel Group number
and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings copied from the Channel
Group entered.
·
Delete ­ Delete an Trunk (Trunks 1~128 for CTX670 and 1~32 for CTX100).
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1 - 128 (default = no value)
01 RPTU Equipment No.
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01; yy = 03, 05, or 07; zz = Circuit 01
...or xx = cabinet 02~07; yy = 01, 03, or 05; zz = Circuit 01
(default = no value)
Note
zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.Enter the
equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
6-32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Protocol
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the
equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
Possible values: National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or Q-Sig
(default = None)
03 ILG
Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls being
received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then Call-by-
Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
04 OLG
Primary ISDN needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the calls being
originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then Call-by-
Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 0)
05 Trunk ID Type
Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier.
Possible values: Implicit (default) or Explicit
06 Trunk ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an "explicit" identified is
used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the
given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values: 0 ~ 126 (default = 0)
07 D Ch Position
PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note
This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span
interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values: 1 ~ 24 (default = 24)
08~13 Bearer Services:
1. Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
·
Speech
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
·
3.1 KHz Audio
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
·
7 KHz Audio
Note
In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel Number).
·
Unrestr. 64K
See Table 6-7.
·
Unrestr. 56K
Possible values: Channel Number (default) or Slot Number
·
Unrestr. 2x64K
14~18 Bearer Services:
1. The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k Unrestricted(H11),
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
·
Unrestr. 384K
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
·
Unrestr. 1536K
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
·
Unrestr. 1920K
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
·
Restr. Digital
Note
In North America, only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-7.
·
Video
Possible values: Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
T
Slot Map H
runk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-33

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11), 1920k
Unrestricted
Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted Multirate are not
used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-7.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 B Ch Selection Method
The method used for selecting an idle `B' channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CTX.
Possible values: Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
21 B-Ch Selection
The search method for choosing an idle `B' channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
24 T-Wait Timer
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only valid
for Nat'l ISDN.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
25 RBT on Incoming Call
Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat'l
ISDN.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Network Mode
Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates. This governs call setup
activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values: Master (default) or Slave
27 Negotiation Priority
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a QSIG PRI. The opposite value
must be set for the node in which this QSIG PRI terminates.
Possible values: Side A (default) or Side B
6-34
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Table 6-7
Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services
Nat'l ISDN
ETSI
TTC
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz Audio
X
X
X
7 KHz Audio
X
X
unrestricted digital
64 kbps
X
X
X
information
Rate adaptation from 56
X
kbps
Circuit
2x64
X
X
Mode
384kbp (H0)
X
X
X
1536kbps (H11)
X
X
X
1920kbps (H12)
X
multirate (n x 64 kbps)
X
Restricted digital Information
X
X
Video
X
X
Packet
Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Mode
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-35

---

Trunks
ISDN
PRI Trunks Record Sheet
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
Enable/
Ch
Enable/
Ch Method
Channel Group: __________________________
Disable
Method
Disable
En
Dis
Ch
Slt
En
Dis
CB CH SB SH
01 RPTU Equip
08 Speech
14 Unrestricted 384K
21 B Ch Select
02 Protocol
09 3.1KHz Audio
15 Unrestricted 1536K
22 T1 Time Slot
03 ILG
10 7KHz Audio
16 Unrestricted 1920K
23 E1 Time Slot
04 OLG
11 Unrestricted 64K
17 Restricted Digital
24 T-Wait Timer
05 Trunk ID Type
12 Unrestricted 56K
18 Video
25 RBT on Incoming
06 Trunk ID
13 Unrestricted 2x64K
19 Multirate Unrest.
26 Network Mode
07 D Ch Position
20 B Ch Sel Method
27 Negotiation Priority
6-36
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements
of different facilities vary at different times, and sharing B channels on a call-by-call basis makes
it possible to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the "324 CBC
Time Zones" on page 6-38.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN > Call
by Call. The ISDN Call by
Call Service screen displays
(shown right).
3. Enter Channel Group
number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.
323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 on page 6-32
To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related Line Group assigned and
minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service parameters may be set for
three different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different types at different
times of the day.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Index
Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
·
Create ­ Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
02 Type of Service
Select the CBC Service Type.
Note
To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.
Possible values: No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut
through), Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA
Out WATS or INWATS
03 Facility Code
Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously entered data is deleted.
Trunk
Possible values: 00~31(default = no value)
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-37

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Service Parameter
Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field,
any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
05 Network ID
Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
"Inter LATA Out WATS" Type of Service. If no data is entered in this field, any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 3 to 4 digits (default = no value)
06 ILG
Specify the ILG for this facility.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
07 OLG
Specify the OLG for this facility.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
08 Min Calls Zone 1
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
09 Max Calls Zone 1
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
10 Min Calls Zone 2
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
11 Max Calls Zone 2
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
12 Min Calls Zone 3
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
13 Max Calls Zone 3
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
324 CBC Time Zones
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Start Zone 1
Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
Possible values: hh = 00~23, 99 (hour)
02 Start Zone 2
mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes)
03 Start Zone 3
9999 = delete time zone, (default = no value)
6-38
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Call-by-Call Record Sheet
Program 323 Values
Program 324 Values
02 Type
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Start
Start
Start
03 Fac
04 Service
05 Network
Ch Group
01 Index
of
06 ILG
07 OLG
Zone
Zone
Zone
Code
Param
ID
08
09
10
11
12
13
Service
1
2
3
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-39

---

Trunks
ISDN
320 B Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 on page 6-32
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The B channel assignments allow
for a flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the PSTN.
1. Complete the B Channel
Select Record Sheet below.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN > B
Channel. The ISDN
B-Channel Assignments
screen displays (shown
right).
3. Enter the Equipment
Number, or click List to see
a summary of progammed
circuits.
4. Click the B Channel
numbers that you want to
activate (see Table 6-8
below for T1 and E1 B
Channel default settings).
5. Click Submit.
B Channel Select Record Sheet
Channel Group: _____________________ (Enter a check mark to indicate activated B Channels)
01 B Ch
02 B Ch
03 B Ch
04 B Ch
05 B Ch
06 B Ch
07 B Ch
08 B Ch
09 B Ch
10 B Ch
11 B Ch
12 B Ch
13 B Ch
14 B Ch
15 B Ch
16 B Ch
17 B Ch
18 B Ch
19 B Ch
20 B Ch
21 B Ch
22 B Ch
23 B Ch
Table 6-8
B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position
01~15
16
17~23
24
25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1)
ON
ON
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1)
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
ON
ON
ON
6-40
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
316 Shared D Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 on page 6-32
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a Channel Group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Complete the "Shared D
Channel Record Sheet" on
page 6-42.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN >
D Channel. The Share D
Channel Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter the Channel Group
number (1~128, default =
no value), or click the List
button to view a summary
list of programmed Channel
Groups.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01, yy = 03, 05, or 07 and zz = Channel 01 is
always used to assign RPTU parameters
...or xx = Cabinet 02~10, yy = 01, 03, or 05 and zz = Channel 01
is always used to assign RPTU parameters
(default = no value)
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
02 Trunk ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Possible values: 1~ 126 (default = 1)
03 D-Ch Provided
If a backup `D' Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
Possible values: D-channel or No D-channel (default)
Trunk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-41

---

Trunks
ISDN
Shared D Channel Record Sheet
01 Equipment
Ch Group
02 Trunk ID
03 D Ch Provided
Number
6-42
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services, the telephone number for which the call originates must
be identified to the PSTN.
1. Complete the "Calling
Number Record Sheets" on
page 6-45.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Trunk > ISDN >
Calling Number. The ISDN
Calling Number
Identification screen
displays (shown right).
3. Enter the OLG Number, or
click the List button to view
a summary list of
programmed OLGs.
4. Enter Program 321 data.
5. Enter Program 322 data.
6. Click Submit.
321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 on page 6-5
The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling Number. This number may
be optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are
allowed to originate calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Default Number
Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Number Prefix
Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to
create a User Identified telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the
distant end and could be used for returning your call.
03 Number Verification
Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the
call is to proceed.
T
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
runk
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-43

---

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Default Number 2
Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
number is for BRI only
322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 on page 6-5
When calls are received from the PSTN, a Called Number is supplied as part of the Setup
Message. This Called Number may be used for directing the call to the appropriate service with
Strata CTX.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Destination Type
Enter Destination Type.
Possible values: Prime DN, Group CO or Pool Line Group (default = no value)
02 Destination
Specify which device is assigned this PDN, GCO or Pooled Line number.
Possible values: Entries for this field depend on the Destination Type chosen.
There are no default values for this field (default = no value).
·
PDN: 0~99999
·
GCO: 1~128
·
POOL: 1~128
03 DID Number
Specify the number of digits received for reaching this service.
Possible values: Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note
Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a DID number
can be assigned.
6-44
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Trunks
ISDN
Calling Number Record Sheets
Program 321 Values
Program 322 Values
01 Default
02 Number
03 Number
04 Default
01 Destination
03 DID
OLG Number
02 Destination
Number
Prefix
Verification
Number 2
Type
Number
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
6-45

---

Trunks
ISDN
6-46
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Attendant
7
Attend
ant
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CTX attendants.
404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Complete the "Attendant
Group Record Sheet" on
page 7-2.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Attendant > Group
Assignment. The Attendant
Group Assignment screen
displays (shown right).
3. Select the Attendant Group
Member.
...or click one of the
following buttons.
·
List ­ to view data list
window.
·
Copy ­ to attendant
group numbers.
4. Enter Program 404 data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Attendant Group
Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
Member
Possible values: 1~8 (CTX670), 1(CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Call Distribution Method
Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Possible values: Most Idle First (default), Next Available First or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination
Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot
Number). If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
7-1

---

Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 Overflow Time
Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
04 Group Overflow
Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this
Destination
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the Attendant's Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field, any
previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
07 ICI1~16 ICI10
For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
·
ILG1
·
Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG2
·
Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG3
·
Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
·
ILG4
·
Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note
Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values: 0~128 (CTX670), 0~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
Attendant Group Record Sheet
00 Attendant Group
01 Call Dist Method
02 Alternate Destination
03 Overflow Time
04 Group Overflow Destination
05 Voice Mail ID
Member
ICI1
ICI2
ICI3
ICI4
ICI5
ICI6
ICI7
ICI8
ICI9
ICI10
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
ILG1
ILG2
ILG3
ILG4
7-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Attend
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group
for each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
ant
1. From the Program Menu,
click Attendant >
Emergency Call. The
Emergency Call screen
displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 400 data.
3. Click Submit
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Day/Night Mode
Select Mode.
Possible values: Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)
02 Called Number Index
Enter the Emergency Call Group Number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
03 Emergency Call
Enter the destination DN for the emergency call.
Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Action
Replace / Insert perform same function in this command.
Possible values: Replace (default) or Insert
Possible values: Choose whether you are replacing an existing Emergency
Number Index or inserting one in the list. If inserting, the new
entry will assume the specified index. The remaining indices will
be increased by one and the last one, four, will be deleted.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
7-3

---

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
7-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
8
This chapter covers a variety of services offered by Strata CTX. Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD), Voice Mail, Least Cost Routing (LCR), DR (DR), Networking, Station Message Detail
Se
Reporting (SMDR), External Devices, System Parameters and other miscellaneous services are
rv
discussed.
ice
s
Important!
Advanced Strata CTX programming topics are covered in this chapter. Programmers
should make sure each section is thoroughly understood before proceeding to pro-
gramming.
540 Pilot DN Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns Pilot DNs for ACD service.
1. Complete the "Pilot DN
Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 8-3.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > ACD Pilot
DN.
3. Enter a Pilot DN Number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Pilot DNs.
·
Create ­ Assign a new Pilot DN with default settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter a Pilot DN number and click Copy to make a new Pilot DN assignment with
settings copied from the Pilot DN entered.
·
Delete ­ Enter a Pilot DN and click OK.
4. Enter Program 540 data.
5. Click Submit.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-1

---

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Pilot DN
Enter Pilot DN Number.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 After Shift Type
Enter the ACD After Shift Forward Type.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
02 After Shift Destination
Enter the Destination number for After Shift Forwarding.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 Voice Mail ID
Enter the ACD Voice Mail ID.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
8-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
540 Pilot DN Assignment
Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet
After Shift
Pilot DN
03 Voice Mail ID
01 Type
02 Destination
Se
rvice
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-3

---

Services
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
The following steps are provided as a guideline to programming System Voice Mail settings.
These steps are identified for two purposes: "Voice Mail Ports Only" and "Telephone Station
Ports". A sequence of Voice Mail programs are also listed under "Station Setup" on page 3-10.
Voice Mail Ports Only
1. Program 100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments.
2. Program 200 Station Data.
·
03 Circuit Type ­ Assigns Voice Mail to be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail
RSTU circuits.
·
15 Display DN ­ DN to be displayed and assigned to Hunt Group.
3. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
·
10 Central Message Callback ­ Used for centralized voice mail SMDI only.
Note DTMF ­ Message Waiting Call Back DN across Qsig TIE lines. DTMF integration uses the
number that is displayed in Program 200, field 15.
4. Program 580 Voice Mail Port Data.
5. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
·
Complete 1~17. See "579 System Voice Mail Data" on page 8-5.
6. Program 209 Station Hunting Group. Voice Mail Group is determined by the Hunt Group.
7. Program 218 Station Hunt Assignments.
8. Program 803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments. Assign BSIS RS-232 port for SMDI.
Note System only provides Code 300 for SMDI. Code 301 is not supported.
9. Program 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port setup.
10. Program 309 Direct Inward Dialing.
11. Program 313 Caller ID Assignment. The ANI, DNIS, DID formats for T1 and analog DID CO
Lines are also defined.
12. Program 318 DID Intercept Assignments.
Telephone Station Ports
1. Program 200 Station Data.
·
19 VMID Code SMDI ­ Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band
integration for forwarded and direct calls.
·
22 MW to VM Port ­ Message Waiting center DN.
2. Program 579 System Voice Mail Data.
·
Complete 11~15. See "579 System Voice Mail Data" on page 8-5.
3. Program 204 DKT Parameters.
·
23 Mailbox Selection ­ Used for the Voice Recording Feature. Uses the VM ID from
Program 200 if set to Auto or allows the user to enter any valid mailbox on Stratagy
followed by .
4. Program 206 Phantom DN.
·
06 VM ID Code ­ Voice Mail ID number to send in SMDI and DTMF in-band integration
for forwarded and direct calls.
·
09 Message Center ­ Message Waiting center DN.
8-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Voice Mail
579 System Voice Mail Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns DTMF/SMDI Voice Mail interface parameters for the system.
1. Complete the "System
Voice Mail Record Sheet"
on page 8-7.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > Voice
Mail > System Voice Mail
Data.
Se
3. Enter Program 579 data.
rvice
4. Click Submit.
s
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 DID/DNIS VMID Option
Select DN VMID to send the DN's VMID to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that are
answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to voice mail.
Select DID/DNIS VMID to send the DID/DNIS number's VMID to voice mail on DID/
DNIS calls that are answered and then transferred to a DN which then forwards to
voice mail.
Possible values: DN VMID (default), DID/DNIS VMID.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN which then
forwards to voice mail, the VMID of the DID/DNIS number (Program 309, )% or
)%) or the VMID of the forwarding DN (Program 200, )% or 206, )%) will be
sent to voice mail per this option.
Note
The DID/DNIS number's VMID (Program. 309, )% or )%) is always
sent to voice mail on DID/DNIS calls that ring directly to voice mail or ring
a DN which then forwards to voice mail before it is ever answered.
02 Cancellation Method for
Select the method used to cancel Voice Mail message waiting indication.
VM MW
Possible values: Auto and Access Code Cancel or Access Code Cancel (default)
03 Message Desk Number
Enable to send the SMDI Message Desk Number (001) in the SMDI packet;
otherwise, 000 for a station call or the 3-digit CO line number is sent.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Output of CLASS / ANI
Enable to include Caller ID/ANI numbers in SMDR records.
and DNIS
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 Calling Number Digits
Select how many calling number digits to send to the VM unit.
Sent to VM
Possible values: 2~10 digits (default = 10)
Note
If 04 Output of CLASS / ANI and DNIS is enabled, this value must be 10.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-5

---

Services
Voice Mail
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 Blank Digits Sent to VM
Send SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default).
·
1 = 1985 (single space)
·
2 = 1991 (two spaces).
07 Auto Cancel of VM and
Setting of auto cancel of VM and MW.
MW1
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 DTMF Duration
Select VM ID Code and System DTMF Signal Time.
Possible values: 80 ms (default) or 160 ms
09 LCD Control of Voice
Enables Toshiba SMDI+ and integration for LCD control of VM. To enable this
Mail
feature you must have Stratagy Enterprise Server Release 3.x or higher.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
10 Central VM Callback
Enter the pilot DN for the centralized voice mail system. If this field is left blank, the
previously stored number will be deleted.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 CF - All Call Record
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via "Call Fwd All
Calls."
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
12 CF - Busy Record
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving to voice mail via "Call Fwd Busy."
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
13 CF - No Answer Record
Enter DTMF VM-ID prefix string for calls arriving at the voice mail via "Call Fwd No
Answer."
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
14 Direct Call
Enter DTMF VM-ID string for a call arriving at the voice mail as a Direct Call.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 Retrieve Messages
Enter DTMF VM-ID string for calls arriving at the voice mail to retrieve messages.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
16 Voice Main DN
Use a VM Pilot DN as a transfer destination.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
17 Length of VM ID
Select the number of characters in VM-ID string.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 10)
1. Not supported in this Release.
8-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Voice Mail
System Voice Mail Record Sheet
System Name:________________
System Type:__________________ Date:_______________________
01 VM ID to DID/DNIS
07 Auto Cancel
13 CF No Answer Record
02 Cancellation Method
08 DTMF Duration
14 Direct Call
03 Message Desk No.
09 LCD Control of VM
15 Retrieve Messages
04 CLASS Output
10 Central VM Callback
16 Voice Mail DN
05 Calling Number Digits
11 CF All Call Record
17 Length of VMID
06 Blank Digits
12 CF Busy Record
Se
580 Voice Mail Port Data
rv
Prerequisite Program: None
ice
s
Assign characteristics of individual voice mail ports.
1. Complete the "Voice Mail
Port Data Record Sheet"
on page 8-8.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > Voice Mail
> Voice Mail Port Data.
3. Enter a VM Port DN
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed VM
Port DNs.
·
Copy ­ Enter an VM
Port DN value in the field with the same name. Click Copy to make a new VM Port DN
assignment with settings copied from the Port entered in VM Port DN.
4. Enter Program 580 data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 VM Port DN
Enter the DN of an individual VM port.
Note
Do not enter a Pilot DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Control Method
Specify In-band or SMDI integration.
Possible values: Inband or SMDI (default = Inband)
02 Send A/D Tone
Select whether Strata CTX sends A or D tone when a station connecting to voice
mail answers or disconnects.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 Send B Tone
Enable Strata CTX to send B tones in the event of a Blind Transfer Recall.
Possible values: B Tone, No Tone (default) or B Tone and Extension Number
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-7

---

Services
Voice Mail
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 End-to-end
Enable Strata CTX to send DTMF tones to voice mail in response to key presses
from a digital telephone.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Voice Mail Port Data Record Sheet
01 Control
02 Send A/D
03 Send B
00 VM Port DNs
04 End-to-end
Method
Tone
Tone
8-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
The programs that follow control Strata CTX's Least Cost Routing (LCR) and Destination
Restriction (DR) capabilities.
LCR/DR Overview
Programming LCR/DR features in Strata CTX requires an advanced knowledge of telephone
programming. Make sure you have a thorough understanding of the discussion that follows before
attempting to program these features. For details on DR, see "DR Overview" on page 8-20
LCR Analysis Process
Se
r
The flowchart below represents the process by which Strata CTX analyzes dialed digits and makes
vice
LCR decisions. The graphic is divided into four areas each described below. DR and Call
s
Connection are described elsewhere in this document and are shown here only for their roles in the
LCR process.
DESTINATION RESTRICTION (DR)
TIME OF DAY
LCR
Check FRL
(1~16)
Receive
dialed digits
Time of
Zone 1
Zone 2
Day
Home
Insert home
area code
Zone 3
No
area code
included?
Type of
Weekday
Weekend
Yes
Day
Holiday
Allow
No
LCR DR?
Stop
Make LCR
Yes
Route Choice
Select Routing
Analysis Plan
(1~64)
ROUTE ANALYSIS
CONNECTION
Use Default
Dial string
No
Route Plan
match?
Hunt available
Yes
Route
Definition
Get Route
Exception
(1~6)
No
Plan from
Table?
Analysis Table
Apply Digit
Modification
Get Route Plan
from Exception
Table
Connect
and
send
Route Plan
Schedule
Table
Stop
Figure 8-1
LCR Analysis Process Flow
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-9

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR
LCR begins with the receipt of a dial string from a facility capable of originating an outgoing call:
station, automated attendant, Tie trunk, DISA trunk, DID trunk, etc. The dial string is identified as
an LCR call by the presence of the LCR Feature Access Code--typically . The LCR Access
Code is removed and the remaining external digits are processed.
Route Analysis
Route Analysis chooses a Route Plan based on the dialed digits. The Routing Analysis Plan
becomes the index into the time/date calculations described in the next section. If the Strata CTX
is unable to match the dial string, it uses the default route plan which assures a route out of the
system. If a match is found, Strata CTX determines if a exception table is associated with the dial
string. If the dial string appears in the exception table, the call is assigned to the Route Plan stored
in the exception table. Otherwise, the Route Plan stored in the initial table is used.
Time of Day
The Strata CTX maintains time and day values for LCR separate from those for the general
system. One day can be divided into three zones, and each day can be categorized as a Weekday,
Weekend, or Holiday.
Connection
Selection of a Route Choice Table begins the process of actually connecting the call to an outgoing
trunk. Each Route Choice Table consists of six Route Definitions which operate in terminal hunt
fashion to select an OLG and to apply a digit modification treatment.
8-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
LCR Assignment
Program Number(s): 520, 521 and 522
User access to LCR is determined by programming the following:
·
103 COS Assignment ­ 29 LCR Feature (see page 4-9) enables access to LCR COS.
·
200 Station Assignment ­ 07 LCR Group (see page 5-2) assigns a station to an LCR Group.
·
304 ILG Assignment ­ 23 LCR Group (see page 6-3) assigns an LCR Group to an ILG.
Note Appropriate COS, DRL and FRL assignments must be made to all LCR stations and trunks.
1. Complete the "LCR Time
Zone Record Sheets" on
Se
r
page 8-19.
vice
2. From the Program Menu,
s
click Services > LCR/DR >
Assignment.
3. Enter Program 520 data.
4. Enter Program 521 data.
5. Enter Program 522 data.
6. Click Submit.
520 LCR Local Route Plan Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
There are 64 LCR route plans. This assignment is used to select which LCR route plan should be
used to route local calls. The Local Route Plan, which must be defined in the route definition
assignment, determines which CO line group is used for local outgoing calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Local Area Code
Enter the area code for the dialing area in which the system is installed. This is the
area code for the Central Office (CO) that provides local CO lines to the system. If
no data is entered in this field, any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: 3 digits (default = no value)
02 Local Route Plan
Enter the LCR Route Plan number that should be used to route local calls. Local
calls are made by dialing 7-digit public telephone numbers that do not require an
Area Code. There are 64 LCR Route Plans from which to choose.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 1)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-11

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
521 LCR Route Plan Digit Analysis Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 on page 8-11
This program builds the basic LCR Analysis Table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Analysis Digits
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, destination prefixes, service codes,
etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Analysis Table.
Route Plan Analysis Tables may have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in
one table at a time. Wild cards (n & X) may be used from CTX WinAdmin only.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Wild Card uses n and X.
01 Route Plan Number
Enter the Route Plan number to which to assign the Analysis Digits.
Note
Entering 0 deletes the Analysis Digits from the table to which they had
been assigned.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)
522 LCR Exception Number Route Plans
Prerequisite Program: 521 on page 8-12
This command assigns up to 1280 dialed external digit strings to the Route Plan Exception
Analysis Table which assigns each string to 1 of 64 Route Choice Tables. The values expressed
here are exceptions to the values established in Program 521.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Exception Digits
Enter the external digit strings (area codes, destination prefixes, service codes,
etc.) to be assigned to a Route Plan Exception Analysis Table.
Strings may be up to 32 digits long. The Exception Route Plan Analysis Table may
have 1280 members. A digit string can only be in one table at a time.
Possible values: Up to 11 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Wild Card uses n and X
01 Exception Table
Enter the Route Plan Table in which to assign the Exception Digits.
Note
Entering 0 deletes the Exception Digits from the table.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = 0)
LCR Assignment Record Sheets
Program 520 Values
Program 521 Values
01 Local Area Code
00 Analysis Digits
02 Local Route Plane
01 Route Plan Number
Program 522 Values
00 Exception Digits
01 Exception Table
8-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Route Define
Program Number(s): 524, 525 and 526
Define the participants in the LCR Route Plan.Complete the "LCR Time Zone Record Sheets" on
page 8-19.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
Route Define.
2. Enter Program 524 data.
3. Enter Program 525 data.
Se
4. Enter Program 526 data.
rvice
5. Click Submit.
s
524 Route Table to Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 525 below
This command defines up to six possible Route Definitions for a given Route Table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Route Choice Table
Enter the Route Choice Table to be defined.
Possible values: 1~128
01 Route Definition 1
Enter Route Definitions to be assigned to this Route Table.
Possible values: 1~128, 0 = Delete (default = 1)
02 Route Definition 2
03 Route Definition 3
04 Route Definition 4
05 Route Definition 5
06 Route Definition 6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-13

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
525 LCR Route Definition Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 on page 8-11
This command assigns Route Definitions for LCR. A Route Definition consists of an OLG and a
Digit Modification index.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Route Definition
Select the Route Definition number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 OLG Number
Select the OLG Number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)
02 Digit Mod Index
Select the Digit Modification number associated with this Route Definition.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = 1)
526 Modified Digits Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 521 on page 8-12
This command modifies LCR dialed numbers by deleting digits from and adding digits to the
dialed numbers.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Digit Modification Index
Select the Digit Modification Index used by the LCR Route Choice table to
determine the digit modification treatment to be applied. Leading digits of a dialed
number may be deleted; leading and trailing digits may be added to the dialed
number.
Possible values: 1~128 (default = no value)
01 Delete Digits
Select the quantity of digits to be deleted from the beginning of dialed number.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)
02 Add Leading Digits
Enter the digit string to be inserted at the beginning of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 Add Trailing Digits
Enter the digit string to be inserted at the end of the number.
Possible values: Up to 23 ASCII characters (default = no value)
8-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Routing Definition Record Sheets
Program 524 Values
Program 525 Values
00 Route
01 OLG
02 Digit Mod
00 Route Choice Table
01 Rte 1 02 Rte 2 03 Rte 3 04 Rte 4 05 Rte 5 06 Rte 6
Definition
Number
Index
Se
rvice
s
Program 526 Values
02 Add
00 Digit Mod
01 Delete
03 Add
Leading
Index
Digits
Trailing Digits
Digits
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-15

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Route Schedule
Program Number(s): 523 and 528
1. Complete the "LCR Time
Zone Record Sheets" on
page 8-19.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
Route Schedule.
3. Enter Program 523 data.
4. Enter Program 528 data.
5. Click Submit.
523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Route Plan Schedule Tables for LCR. Each table is a 3-dimensional array
of 144 values (3 Types of Day x 3 Times of Day x 16 LCR Groups).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Route Plan
Enter the Route Plan Number to build a schedule indexed by Time of Day, Type of
Day and LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Type of Day
Select the Type of Day.
Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
02 LCR Time of Day
Select the Time Zone.
Possible values: Time Zone 1, Time Zone 2 or Time Zone 3 (default = no value)
03 Station LCR Group
Select the Station LCR Group.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
04 Route Choice Table
Enter the Route Choice Table Number to be used with this combination of time, type
and LCR group.
Possible values: 1~128, 0 = delete (default = 1)
8-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
528 LCR Public Day of Week Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: 520 on page 8-11
This command defines the days of the week as weekdays, weekend days or holidays for LCR.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Monday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Possible values: Weekday (default), Weekend or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
Se
r
05 Friday
vice
06 Saturday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
s
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
07 Sunday
Select the Day Type to assign to this day.
Weekday, Weekend (default) or Holiday
Route Schedule Record Sheets
Program 528 Values
Mon
Tues
Wed
Thur
Fri
Sat
Sun
Program 523 Values
LCR Group 1
LCR Group 2
LCR Group 3
LCR Group 4
LCR Group 5
LCR Group 6
LCR Group 7
LCR Group 8
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
LCR Group 9
LCR Group 10
LCR Group 11
LCR Group 12
LCR Group 13
LCR Group 14
LCR Group 15
LCR Group 16
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
Day Type
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Rte Choice
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-17

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
Program Number(s): 527 and 529
1. Complete the "LCR Time
Zone Record Sheets" on
page 8-19.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
Public Holidays and LCR
Time Zones.
3. Enter Program 527 data.
4. Enter Program 529 data.
5. Click Submit.
527 LCR Holiday Table
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns up to 128 holidays for LCR processing. These assignments are related to
the Day assignments established in Program 523.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Holiday
Enter Date (YYYYMMDD). A maximum of 128 dates is allowed.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no value)
01 Add/Delete
Choose to add or delete this date from the holiday table. Expired dates remain in
the table unless deleted.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
529 LCR Route Plan Time Zone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 520 on page 8-11
This command creates a three-dimensional array (Day, Time & LCR Group) for each Route Plan.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Route Plan
Select the LCR Route Plan Number to assign to this time zone.
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Day Type for Time Zone
Select a Day Type for which to define a time zone.
Possible values: Weekday, Weekend or Holiday (default = no value)
02 Time Zone
Select a Time Zone.
Possible values: Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3 (default = no value)
03 Time Zone Start Time
Enter the start time for the selected Time Zone (hhmm).
Note
Enter your Day Type and Time Zone selections before entering data in to
this field.
Possible values: hh = hour (0-23) and mm = minutes (0-59)
(default = 0000)
8-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
LCR Time Zone Record Sheets
Program 527 Values
00 Holiday
00 Holiday
00 Holiday
00 Holiday
Date
Desc
Date
Desc
Date
Desc
Date
Desc
Se
rvice
s

Program 529 Values
00 Route
01 Day
02 Time
03 Start
00 Route
01 Day
02 Time
03 Start
Plan
Type
Zone
Time
Plan
Type
Zone
Time
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-19

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR Overview
Strata CTX offers DR as a major expansion of traditional Toll Restriction. Toll Restriction was
used to prevent the unauthorized use of toll prefixes to the PSTN as follows:
·
­ long distance
·
­ operator assistance
·
­ international
Strata CTX has expanded this to include restriction based on any string of dialed digits. Strata
CTX can restrict any string of up to 11 dialed digits including and .
Eleven-digit screening allows control of access to individual telephone numbers in remote Area
Codes. Restriction of and controls users' access to vertical service codes from the central
office such as Camp On and Call Forwarding.
DR is always applied to calls originated through LCR and may be applied to calls originated
through Trunk Group Access, Individual Trunk Access, CO Key, Group CO Key, Pooled Line
Key, and Strata Net private networking. Special screening tables allow restriction of calls placed
through Centrex or PBXs to which the Strata CTX may be connected.
Each OLG can be programmed to require or not require DR in "306 Outgoing Line Groups" on
page 6-5. If a trunk group requires DR, a table must then be established using "531 DR Screening
Table for OLG" on page 8-25.
DR is controlled by a DR Level (DRL) that is assigned to any station or trunk capable of making
an outside call. Each of the 16 DRLs relate to a DR Table. A DR Table may be an Allow or Deny
table and may be associated with an Exception Table. A Deny Toll Restriction Table contains a list
of dial strings that are prohibited. Its associated Exception Table lists the dial strings within the
Deny Table ranges that would be allowed. For example, a Deny table might deny access to all of
Area Code -. Its exception table could permit access to specific office codes within that area
such as --.
8-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Basic Operation
The flow chart below describes the basic logic by which calls are connected or rejected as a result
of DR.
Facility
dials
outside
number
Se
r
No
v
LCR
DTA
DR Applies to
Access Method
ice
OLG?
s
Yes
Consult DR/LCR
Screening Table
Consult DR/OLG
Screening Table
Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation
DR Table
DR Table
Action
Action
Allow
Allow
Deny
Deny
Exception
Deny
Deny
Exception
Reject Call
Table Action
Table Action
Allow
Allow
Connect to OLG
5944
LCR
Stop
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-21

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Tables
Strata CTX uses two or three tables to apply DR:
·
Screening Tables. There are two types of screening tables as follows:
·
LCR Screening Tables.
·
OLG-Specific Screening Tables.
·
DR Table or Exception Table to the DR Table.
Screening tables are used in Behind Centrex/PBX operations to detect access codes required by the
Centrex/PBX and processes them appropriately in a way that is transparent to end users.
DR/LCR Screening
DR is applied to all LCR calls using "530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment" on page 8-24. It
analyzes the digits dialed after the LCR access code (typically ).
Example: A station user dials ---. The outgoing line will serve as an
incoming line that this user is attempting to forward to his home. The System Administrator has
created an LCR/Screening entry to prevent the forwarding of this line to the users home. With Skip
& Apply under DR action and a Skip Length of 0, the call will be forced to present to the DR
table where the call will be rejected. Apply under LCR Action ensures that the entire string will be
processed by LCR. In this case, Digit Modification is irrelevant.
DR Screening for OLG Table
An OLG-specific DR Screening Table is used when a call is originated through a Line Key, Pooled
Line Key, Group CO Key, Trunk Group Access Code or Direct Trunk Access Code and a CO line
is chosen that requires DR. The decision to apply DR to an OLG is made in "306 Outgoing Line
Groups" on page 6-5. If the OLG does not require DR, the call is connected to the desired line and
all dialed digits, minus the Strata CTX access code, are sent.
The OLG-specific table performs two functions:
·
It manipulates the digits that will be screened by the DR table.
·
It creates a Pause Value that ensures that the Centrex or PBX which is the source of the trunk
will receive and interpret the digits correctly. This is used to compensate for older, slower
equipment.
Example: A station user dials 81-9-1-617-234-5678 where 81 is the Trunk Group Access Code for
a Centrex trunk group. 9 is the Centrex' LCR access code. The Skip Length of 1 tells the system
how many of the first digits constitute an access code or other digits that may be ignored. The DR
Action of Skip & Apply tells the system to ignore the 9 and present 16172345678 to the DR Table
use in the next step in the process. The Pause Value of two seconds tells the system that, if it
passes the DR Tables and is connected to a trunk, it is to pause two seconds after outdialing the 9
and before outdialing 16172345678.
Dial String
DR Action
Skip Length
Pause Value
9
Skip & Apply
1
2
8-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR Table
Each DRL is associated with a DR Table that defines the destinations to which a holder of that
DRL is entitled to place a call. Permission may be expressed in Allow or Deny tables depending
on the field technician's choices. The DR Table is activated by defining the table as Allow or Deny
through "523 LCR Route Plan Schedule Assignment" on page 8-16. The table is then populated
one string at a time through "533 DR Level Table Assignment" on page 8-27. The table may have
up to 100 entries. Entries may include any DTMF character including and .
As soon as Strata CTX finds a match in the table, it acts upon it. Therefore, entering in a Deny
table will deny all 1+ calling to users with that DRL whereas entering - denies calls to the
888 Area Code. Exceptions can be created in the DRL Exception Table.
DRL Exception Table Assignment ­ Once a DR Table has been established for a DRL, its
Se
exception table can be created using "534 DRL Exception Table Assignment" on page 8-28.
rv
Exceptional DR Tables are optional. Dial Strings in Exception tables my be as long as 11 digits. If
ice
a field technician wanted to deny access to every office code in the 617 area code except Directory
s
Assistance, he would first create a deny table that included 617 and then create an associated
exception table that allowed 617-555-1212. See the table below for more examples.
Interaction With Other Features
Behind Centrex Operation
Behind Centrex operation for OLGs is defined in. The CTX will use the values stored here
to strip local and Centrex access codes from the dial string and determine the external
number being dialed. This external number will then be processed according to the DR
rules described above.
Note The Centrex to which the OLG is attached may impose its own DRs.
Credit Card Calling
If a valid credit card number is detected, the CTX will not apply DR to a call because the
charges for such a call are applied to the credit card rather than the outgoing line used.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-23

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
LCR/DR Screening
Program Number(s): 530 and 531
These programs enable and set up screening for DR and LCR.
1. Complete the "DR LCR
Screening Record Sheet"
on page 8-26.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
LCR/DR Screening.
3. Enter Program 530 and 531
data
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Screened Dial Strings
or Behind Centrex
Access Codes.
·
Copy ­ Enter a Screened Dial String or Behind Centrex Access Code in the field with the
corresponding name. Click Copy to make a new assignment.
4. Click Submit.
530 DR LCR Screening Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command screens dialed digits for access codes such as Carrier Identification Codes or
Behind Centrex/PBX access codes. Used only in LCR calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Screening Dial String
Enter the string of external digits to be screened.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Add String to Table
Add the Screening Dial String to the DR LCR Screening Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
02 DR Action
Select DR Action.
Possible values: Bypass (default) or Skip and Apply
·
Bypass ­ Do not apply DR.
·
Skip and Apply ­ Apply DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits
specified in Skip Length.
03 LCR Action
Select LCR Action.
Possible values: )
·
Apply ­ (default) Apply LCR to all of the external dialed digits.
·
Skip and Apply ­ Apply LCR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits
specified in Skip Length.
8-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Digit Modification
Select Digit Modification application.
Action
Possible values:
·
Apply ­ (default) Apply Digit Modification from the first digit.
·
Retain ­ Retain the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting from the
next digit specified by Skip Length.
·
Discard ­ Discard the skipped digits and apply Digit Modification starting from
the next digit specified by Skip Length.
05 Skip Length
Specify the number of digits at the beginning of the dial string to be ignored before
DR, Digit Modification, or LCR is applied.
Se
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = delete (default = 0)
rvice
s
531 DR Screening Table for OLG
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DR Screening Table for an OLG. Up to four codes may be assigned per line group. Used
for outgoing calls other than LCR.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 OLG
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Behind Centrex Access
Enter the access code expected by an attached Centrex PBX.
Code
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Add or Delete Code
Add or Delete the Code entered above. Leaving the field empty removes an
existing code. Activation requires entries in OLG Group number and 01 Behind
Centrex Access Code above.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
03 DR Action for Centrex
Apply DR to the dialed digits.
Possible values:
·
Bypass (default) ­ does not apply DR.
·
Skip and Apply­ applies DR to the dialed digits excluding the number of digits
specified in Skip Length.
04 Skip Length
Enter the number of leading digits to be ignored by DR.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
05 Pause Insertion
Enter the length of the pause to be inserted between dialing digits.
Possible values: 0~10 (default = 0)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-25

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR LCR Screening Record Sheet
Program 530 Values
00 Screening
01 Add String
02 DR
03 LCR
04 Digit Mod
05 Skip
Dial String
Add
Delete
Action
Action
Action
Length
Program 531
01 Behind Centrex
02 Code
03 DR Action
05 Pause
00 OLG
04 Skip Length
Access Code
Add
Del
for Centrex
Length
8-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR
Program Number(s): 532, 533, 534 and 111
Assign DR features for the Strata CTX.
1. Complete the "DR Record
Sheets" on page 8-29.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > LCR/DR >
Destination Restriction.
3. Enter 00 DR Level (DRL).
Se
4. Enter Program 532 data.
rvice
5. Enter Program 533 data. Click
s
List to view a summary list of
programmed Dial Strings.
6. Enter Program 534 data. Click
List to view a summary list of
programmed Dial Strings.
7. Enter Program 111 data.
8. Click Submit.
532 DR Table Allow/Deny Definition
Prerequisite Program: 533 below.
Specify the DR Table Type using this command.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 DRL Number
Select the DRL Number.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value).
01 Type of Table
Specify whether this DR Table is an Allow Table or Deny Table.
Possible values: Allow or Deny (default).
533 DR Level Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3
above.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Destination Restriction
Choose the DRL.
Level
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = no value)
01 Dial String
Enter the string of dialed digits to be added.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Wild card uses n and X
02 Add/Delete
Add or delete the string entered in 01 Dial String above to the DR Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-27

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
534 DRL Exception Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 533 above
This program assigns a DRL Exception Table to an existing DRL table. If the DRL Table is an
allow table, its Exception Table must be a deny table and vice versa.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Destination Restriction
Enter the DRL for which you want to populate an Exception Table.
Level
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 Dial String
Add the dial string you wish to be treated as an exception.
Possible values: Up to 11 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Add/Delete
Add or delete the string entered in 01 DR Exception Table above to the DR
Exception Table.
Possible values: Add or Delete (default)
111 DR Level
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables credit card calling for a DRL.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
DRL Number
Enter the DRL number.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 Credit Card Calling
Enable Credit Card Calling for this DRL.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
8-28
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
DR Record Sheets
Program 532 Values
Program 533 Values
Program 534 Values
01 Type
01 Dial
02 Action
01 DRE
02 Action
00 DRL
Allow
Deny
String
Add
Delete
Table
Add
Delete
Se
rvice
s
Program 111 Values
Credit Card Calling
Credit Card Calling
DRL Number
DRL Number
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
















Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-29

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
Account Codes
Program Number(s): 570, 506 and 571
Assign Account Code data to Strata CTX.
1. Complete the "Strata Net
Private Networking" on
page 8-35.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
Account Codes.
3. Enter Program 570 data.
4. Enter Program 506 data.
Click List to view a
summary list of
programmed Account
Codes.
5. Enter Program 571 data.
6. Click Submit.
570 Account Code Digit Length
Prerequisite Program: None.
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for
registering a number. This allows dialing within Strata CTX to proceed automatically once the
correct account code is dialed. The following numbers are then dialed digits used for making the
phone call.
A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification of the code to
be less than the total code entered; thus, the code may contain two parts, one required and one part
optional to the user.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Verified Digit Length
The Verified Digit Length sets a number of digits to verify with a pre-set list. This
number may be the same or smaller than the account code digits set to be entered
for creating a complete accounting code.
Note
This field is not changed, when "506 Verified Account Codes" on
page 8-31 are registered.
Possible values: 4~15 (default = 4)
02 Registered Digit Length
The Registered Digit Length sets a number for the digits to be entered to make a
complete accounting code entry.
Note
The Registered Digit Length ()%) must be greater than or equal to the
Verified Digit Length ()%).
Possible values: 4~15 (default = 6)
8-30
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
506 Verified Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 570 on page 8-31
This program adds or deletes entries in the DR Table associated with the DRL entered in Step 3
above.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Account Code
Enter a valid accounting code that the user will be expected to dial. Digits 0~9 can
be used.
Note
The Account Code is set to the same digit length as the Verified Digit
Length in Program 570 above.
Se
Possible values: Up to 15 ASCII characters (default = no value)
rvice
01 Verified Flag
The Account Code Flag determines whether the number entered is to be used as a
s
verified account code or not. Some applications may allow users to dial an
accounting code which changes the restriction level for the call allowing it to be
placed.
Possible values: Set or No Set (default)
Note
To delete a Verified Account Code set this field to No Set.
02 DRL
The DRL assigned to an accounting code allows users to override their stations
assigned DRL enabling a call to be placed.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
03 FRL
The FRL assigned to an accounting code enables users to override the station
assigned FRL.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
04 Network COS
Assign the Network COS to be used by this accounting code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
571 Exception Numbers for Forced Account Codes
Prerequisite Program: 506 on page 8-31
Up to four telephone numbers can be programmed as exceptions to the forced and /or verified
account code entries (including 911). These special codes enable numbers to bypass the
verification process and proceed unhindered.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Exception Number 1
Enter a Forced Account Code Exception.
Possible values: Up to 4 digits
02 Exception Number 2
Exception 1 default = 911
03 Exception Number 3
Exception 2~4 default = no value
Note
One of the assigned exception numbers should be 911. Exception
04 Exception Number 4
Numbers for Forced Account Code fields cannot be duplicated.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-31

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the COS, DRL, FRL and QPL values used by DR Override by Speed Dial.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services > LCR/DR >
DR Override by System
Speed Dial.
2. Select the COS, DRL, FRL
and QPL override values.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Override COS
Select the override COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default =1)
02 Override DRL
Select the override DRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
03 Override FRL
Select the override FRL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
04 Override QPL
Select the override QPL value.
Possible values: 1~16 (default =1)
8-32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
510 COS Override Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns Class of Service Overrides and their parameters (COS, FRL, DRL, QPL).
1. Complete the "COS Override
Code Record Sheet" on
page 8-34.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > System Param > COS
Override.
3. Enter Program 510 data or Select
Se
a COS Override Index and click
rvice
Copy to copy settings from the
s
selected COS Override Index.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 COS Override Index
Select the COS Override index.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
01 COS Override Code
Select the COS Override Code as entered by users. If no data is entered in this
field, any previously entered data is erased.
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Set COS
Select COS number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
03 Set DRL
Select DRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
04 Set FRL
Select FRL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
05 Set QPL
Select QPL number for this override code.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
06 Set Network COS
Select Network COS index for this override code.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-33

---

Services
Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
COS Override Code Record Sheet
01 COS
00 COS
02 Set
03 Set
04 Set
05 Set
Override
06 Network COS
Override
COS
DRL
FRL
QPL
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8-34
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Networking
Networking
Strata CTX enables networking of resources using Strata Net Private Networking. Read the
following discussion before programming Strata CTX networking features.
Strata Net Private Networking
The Strata CTX introduces robust private networking, Strata Net, to the Toshiba family of
telecommunications products. Based on an international standard, QSIG, Strata Net will allow
multiple Strata CTX systems to share voice mail systems and attendants, share features and a
coordinated numbering plan and route calls simply and easily throughout the enterprise. Strata Net
is distinguished from CTX Basic Networking which provides interconnection of nodes through
Se
conventional, E&M tie lines.
rvice
QSIG
s
Toshiba has adopted QSIG as the basis for Strata Net. QSIG is an open, international standard for
networking PBXs. It was begun in 1994 with a memo of understanding between twelve leading
PBX manufacturers. The QSIG Handbook may be found on the web at http://www.qsig.ie/. The
standards were developed and are maintained by the European Computer Manufacturers
Association (ECMA), an international, Europe-based industry association founded in 1961 and
dedicated to the standardization of information and communication systems. ECMA may be found
on the web at http://www.ecma.ch.
QSIG is an intelligent and powerful signalling system, providing great flexibility in terms of
network architecture. Any network node can establish routes to 128 other nodes and segmented
networks can grow beyond that. New nodes can be added to the network as business needs dictate.
The use of QSIG does not impose the use of a specific network topology and it can be used with
any network configuration: meshed, star, main and satellite, etc.
Toshiba, like most of its competitors, has chosen to implement QSIG over Primary Rate Interface.
Strata Net supports QSIG Basic Call Control that allows it to interoperate with other PBXs that
conform to the QSIG standard.
Node ID
The basic logical element in Strata Net routing is the Node ID. It functions similarly to the address
in a packet data network. As a call is routed through the network, each node examines the leading
received digits for a Node ID defined in its Flexible Numbering Plan. After first discerning a Node
ID, the Strata CTX then determines whether the Node ID is for itself or for a remote node. If it is a
remote Node ID, the call goes through a routing process that selects an OLG, manipulates the
digits and sends the call to the next node in the network. If the call contains the local Node ID, the
Strata CTX manipulates the number according to the Overlap Code and delivers the call to a local
station, trunk or feature.
The Node ID is 1 to 6 digits long. The Strata CTX knows that a Node ID to which an Overlap
Code has been assigned is for the local node and that all others are for the remote nodes.
Strata Net bases its routing decisions exclusively on the Node ID and makes no attempt to analyze
or restrict the remaining dialed digits. These remaining digits are not processed until delivered to
the destination Strata Net node. This provides a simple, powerful tool because the programmer
does not need to consider local conditions in transit nodes and does not need to fear interference
with the call regardless of the path it takes through the network.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-35

---

Services
Networking
Network Directory Number
A Network Directory number consists of two elements: the Node ID and the local directory
number. A Node ID is a string of 1 to 6 digits that identifies one node on the network. A Network
DN may be a simple concatenation of the two elements in which the complete Node ID precedes
the complete extension or the two elements may overlap. In the event of an overlap, an Overlap
Code identifies the digits to be substituted for the received Node ID.
The Node ID allows a call to route through multiple Strata Net nodes until its destination node
recognizes it as a local call. Local Node IDs are programmed using Command 656 "Node ID."
Remote Node IDs are programmed in Command 651 "Network Routing Plan Analysis" to define
the appropriate outgoing route to the desired destination. Digits received after the Node ID are
passed on to the distant node without analysis.
One node may have up to four Node IDs. A unique Overlap Code is programmed for each Node
ID. The Overlap Code allows the programmer to control the number of digits to be dialed for
network calls and to create a coordinated dialing scheme across the network. If the Network DN is
to be a simple concatenation with no overlap, the Overlap Code field is left blank. All Node IDs,
local and remote, must be defined as such in the Flexible Numbering Plan.
The following are examples of concatenated and overlapped Node IDs.
Concatenated:
·
Node ID = 789
·
Extension = 2345
·
Overlap Code = BLANK
·
Network DN = 7892345
Overlapped:
·
Node ID = 789
·
Network DN = 789345
·
Overlap Code = 2
·
Local Extension = 2345
This simple, powerful, logical tool will support large, complex networks. It is the means by which
a Coordinated Numbering Plan can be established across all Strata Net nodes including existing
systems with established numbering plans.
Network Feature Access Code
The Network Feature Access Code is similar to the Network DN but is used to access features in a
remote Strata Net node. Features may include routing features, such as Trunk Group Access and
Least Cost Routing, or user features such as Message Waiting and Paging.
The Network FAC format is:
Node ID (1~6 digits) + Local FAC (1~5 digits) + Parameters (unlimited)
For example, access' Node ID 789 and uses that node's LCR () to dial
directory assistance in Boston.
Given their variability, Network Faces are usually processed without Overlap Codes. If a Node ID
with an Overlap Code has been established for local extensions, it cannot be used for feature
access; a separate Node ID must be established. If no Overlap Codes are used, one Node ID will
serve for all purposes.
8-36
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Networking
Digit Manipulation
Digit Manipulation is the term for the altering of an original string of dialed digits in order to re-
route a call or connect it to a specific service. Digit Manipulation is usually applied to the leading
digits in the string which appear left-most in written form. Strata Net uses two forms of
manipulation: Overlap Codes, described above, for inbound calls and Network Digit Modification
Tables for outbound calls. The Network Digit Modification Tables contain up to 64 treatments in
each of which as many as 10 leading digits may be deleted and as many as 23 leading digits
substituted. These 64 treatments may be applied to any of 64 Route Definitions.
Traveling Class Mark
Calling privileges, restrictions and priorities may be imposed across Strata Net using the Traveling
Se
Class Mark. The Traveling Class Mark accompanies all calls across the network. When the call
rv
reaches its terminating node, that node uses the Traveling Class Mark to determine whether the
ice
originator of the call is entitled to the dialed facility. The mark is a single information element
s
concatenated from the following:
·
Network Class of Service
·
Network DR Level
·
Network Facility Restriction Level
·
Network Queuing Priority Level
All nodes contain tables to translate between local and network DR Levels, Facility Restriction
Levels and Queuing Priority Levels. DRL, FRL and QPL each require two tables: one to translate
from the local level to the network level for outgoing calls and one to translate from network to
local level for incoming calls.
Network Class of Service is an exception for two reasons. First, at the originating node, each
station is assigned a Network Class of Service; there is no translation. The terminating node does
contain a table to translate the received Network Class of Service to a local Class of Service but it
adds parameters to the local Class of Service before determining how to process the call. Those
parameters are:
·
Permission for Off-Hook Call Announce
·
Ability to register System Speed Dial numbers in the terminating node
·
Ability to register Class of Service Override in the terminating node and
·
Trunk Group Override Access
Time of day considerations are handled at the originating node. If a call originates in a node that is
in Night Mode and terminates in another node, it will deliver the Night Mode values regardless of
the condition of the terminating node.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-37

---

Services
Networking
Centralized Voice Mail
Users in multiple network nodes may use the services of a single voice mail system attached to one
node. The network transmits the Voice Mail ID (VMID) for remote stations and the calling
conditions under which the call is being directed to voice mail (Call Forward All Calls, Busy, etc.).
The centralized voice mail system can control message waiting indications and provide automated
attendant services throughout the network through its integration with a single node.
Centralized Voice Mail requires a Coordinated Numbering Plan throughout the network for proper
operation. The Coordinated Numbering Plan allows the voice mail to interact with the entire
network as if it were on large PBX. Basic operations include:
·
Forward to Voice Mail ­ A forwarded, busy or unanswered extension may forward across the
network to the voice mail unit. Centralized Voice Mail notifies the voice mail of the source and
calling conditions and the voice mail returns the greeting of the original target extension.
Notification of calling conditions requires SMDI integration.
·
Message Retrieval ­ A user can press the a Message button on his phone and be directed to a
voice mail system connected to his own or a remote node. The call will be correctly identified
as a retrieval for the correct VMID and the user will be prompted for his security code. The
same operation may be programmed for PhDNs in Station Programming.
·
Message Waiting ­ The voice mail system can control message waiting indications in distant
switches by accessing the remote node via Node ID, registering the Message Waiting Feature
Access Code and specifying the desired station.
·
Automated Attendant ­ Automated attendant calls to the voice mail may be transferred to
stations or services in distant nodes using the Network Directory Number. If the automated
attendant transfers the call to a busy destination, it can activate Call Transfer with Camp-on
across the network simply by hanging up.
Not all Stratagy features available to a single switch are available to remote Strata Net nodes. This
is a result of the local node being directly integrated to the voice mail system. The following table
shows the availability of voice mail features across the Strata Net.
Stratagy Feature
Attached Node
Remote Node
Message Lamp Control
X
X
Forward to Voice Mail
X
X
Message Retrieval
X
X
Automated Attendant
X
X
Manual Voice Recording
X
LCD Control of Voice Mail
X
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail
X
Multiple Voice Mail Systems ­ More than one voice mail system may be connected to one network
node and one or more voice mail systems may be connected to multiple nodes. Access, integration
and message waiting are controlled on a call-by-call basis according to parameters assigned to
individual extensions. There is nothing to prevent a single DKT from having access to four voice
mail systems, each connected to a remote node. The Prime DN and three PhDNs are each
programmed with independent voice mail destinations, Voice Mail IDs and Record and Playback
codes. See the Programming Manual for details.
Centralized Attendant
It is possible for one Attendant to serve an entire Strata Net. Station users anywhere in the network
can simply dial to reach the centralized attendant. Calls to the attendant are identified with
calling number and name. Incoming trunk calls to any node in the network can be routed to one
attendant and then extended anywhere in the network.
8-38
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Networking
Path Replacement
Known also as Route Optimization and Release Link, Path Replacement makes the most efficient
use of talk paths between network nodes. For example, if a series of transfers around the network
results in a conversation between two stations in the same node, all of the tie line circuits are
released and a simple station-to-station call is established in the one node. This efficiency reduces
the number of facilities to be provided and improves transmission quality by minimizing the
number of links over which loss could occur.
Path Replacement applies to:
·
Call Transfer
·
Ring Transfer
Se
·
Station Call Forward
rvice
·
System Call Forward
s
Coordinated Numbering Plan
A Coordinated Numbering Plan rationalizes the dialing patterns required of network users and
relieves them of the need to know complicated access codes to navigate the network. The basic
mechanism is the Network Directory Number described above. The combination of Node ID and
Directory Number appear to the user as simple extension dialing. The ability to overlap the two
components reduces the number of dialed digits. If it is necessary to preserve legacy extension
ranges at individual nodes, a Network Access Code can be used to resolve numbering conflicts
with other nodes.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Strata Net generates call records for incoming or outgoing calls from the nodes in which they
originated or terminated. For example, if a station user in Node 3 makes an outside call that is
routed through transit Node 2 to gateway Node 1 for connection to the public network, Nodes 1
and three generates SMDR records; Node 2 does not.
IqrÃÆ
IqrÃÆ!
IqrÃÆ"
QvhrÃGvr
QvhrÃGvr
9I"
BhrhÃIqr
UhvÃIqr
@rvÃIqr
The record in Node #3 will include the Network DN of the calling station, the dialed digits and the
OLG number and Channel Group number used to access Node #2. The record in Node #1 will
include the ILG number and Channel Group number of the Strata Net trunk on which the call was
received and the PSTN trunk to which it was connected. The record format and conditions are the
same as for a single node system using the new format adopted for Strata CTX.
Station-to-station calls across Strata Net are considered internal calls and do not generate SMDR
records in any nodes. Abandoned Call SMDR records are only generated for incoming calls over
local trunks.
Unforced account codes are generated from the node in which they originated. Forced account
codes are included in the records of the node that required them. Similarly, the node which
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-39

---

Services
Networking
provides DISA services is responsible for checking the DISA Security code and for generating the
SMDR record. The remote node and the transit node will not generate the SMDR record.
Plowable buffers are usually attached to each network node and polled by a central call accounting
system. If the buffer is not available, the Strata CTX will buffer up to 1000 records. Equipment
numbers, time stamps and call type designations assist the call accounting system in associating
records for the same call from different nodes.
Network Feature Content
The following is a list of Strata CTX features that operate across multi-node Strata Net
connections.
·
Account Codes Forced/Voluntary/Verified* ·
DISA Security Code Revision*
·
Automatic Busy Redial*
·
Do Not Disturb *
·
Automatic Camp-on
·
Do Not Disturb Override*
·
Automatic Release of CO
·
Door Lock Control
·
Call Forward
·
Executive Override*
·
Call Park Orbits Park and Page
·
External Ring Repeat
·
Call Transfer
·
Flexible Numbering
·
Call Transfer Immediate
·
Intercept
·
Call Transfer With Camp-on*
·
Least Cost Routing *
·
Call Waiting
·
Lost Call Treatment
·
Caller Identification
·
Message Waiting
·
Class Of Service
·
Offhook Camp-on*
·
Conference On Hold
·
Outgoing Call
·
Conferencing
·
Recall Treatment
·
Consultation Hold Manual
·
Speed Dial System/Station
·
Credit Card Calling*
·
Station CO Line Access
·
Day/Night Modes*
·
Station To Station Connection
·
Dial For Quick Launch
·
System Call Forward
·
Dialed Number Identification Service
·
Tandem CO Line Connection
·
Digital PAD
·
DR
·
Direct Inward Dialing
·
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial
·
Direct Inward System Access
·
Traveling Class Of Service
·
Direct Inward Termination
·
Trunk Access*
·
Directory Number Presentation
·
Trunk Group Access*
*
Features that can be limited by Network Class of Service.
8-40
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Networking
Configuration
RPTU2 PCB
The Strata CTX will use a new Primary Rate Interface printed circuit board that can terminate
either a Strata Net connection or a public PRI: the RPTU-2A. The RPTU-2A is backwardly
compatible with the RPTU-1A for standard ISDN operation. The mode of operation (standard or
QSIG) is controlled by a programming parameter named "Private Service Type." This parameter
must be chosen in establishing both incoming and OLGs.
Circuits
Two Strata Net nodes are connected to each other by a full or fractional DS1. The QSIG basic call
Se
convention will select one DS0 to act as the "D" channel and the remainder as "B" channels. This
rvice
allows the interconnecting DS1(T-1) to act as a Primary Rate Interface. The appropriate command
s
set is in new firmware on the card to allow Strata CTX for signal according to CPE-to-CPE rules
which differ from CPE-to-PSTN rules. Fractional DS1s may consist of 8, 12 or 16 channels
including the "D" channel.
The most common type of interconnection is a leased DS-1 from a Common Carrier such as the
local telephone company or long distance provider. DS1s may also be created across fiber optics,
Frame Relay equipment, IP networks or other transport media using dealer-supplied equipment as
long as they conform to the following specifications.
·
1.544 MBPS
·
B8ZS
·
ESF
Nodes may also be connected directly over two copper pairs to a maximum distance of 738 feet.
See the Installation and Maintenance Manual for pin configurations and other details.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-41

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Strata Net Programming Overview
Follow the sequences below to program Strata Net.
Step 1: Basic Incoming Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of the Flexible Numbering Plan (Program 102).
Note Node ID is located under 01 Feature Name as "Node ID (CTX network number prefix)."
2. Establish up to four Local Node IDs (Program 656) for the local node. Each Node ID can have
a unique Overlap Code.
3. Process the digit string as manipulated by the Overlap Code from Flexible Numbering Plan.
The resulting number can be an extension call, feature activation, or tandem call.
Step 2: Basic Outgoing Network Calls
1. Establish the Node ID as part of 102 Flexible Numbering Plan.
2. Use Program 651 Routing Plan Analysis Table Assignment to associate each Remote Node ID
with a Private Route Choice table which will provide up to six routing choices to the desired
node.
3. Use program 653 to define a Private Route Choice table. The table should contain up to six
Route Definitions. The system steps through these Route Definitions in terminating hunt
fashion to find a route to the desired private networking node.
4. Use program 654 to define a Private Route Definition consisting of an OLG and a pointer into
the Private Digit Modification table.
5. Use program 655 to set up Private Digit Modification tables containing up to 64 entries. Each
entry specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the dialed number and the dial
string to be added as leading digits.
8-42
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
656 Node ID Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 102 on page 4-4
This program assigns up to four Network Node IDs to process incoming network calls. Each Node
ID has an overlap code. Strata CTX will substitute the Overlap Code for the Node ID before
processing the call further. A Network Directory Number consists of a Node ID and the desired
node.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Node ID.
2. Enter Program 656 data.
Se
3. Click Submit.
rvice
s
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Primary Node ID
Enter the Primary Node ID for this node. This Node ID identifies the node used for
administering Strata Net.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Primary Overlap Code
Enter the Overlap Code associated with the Primary Node ID. An Overlap Code is
the string of digits that replaces the Node ID to continue call processing.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Node ID 2
Enter Node ID 2 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 2
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 2.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 Node ID 3
Enter Node ID 3 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 3
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 3.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Node ID 4
Enter Node ID 4 for this node.
Possible values: Up to 6 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Overlap Code 4
Enter Overlap Code for Node ID 4.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-43

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
Prerequisite Program: 656 on page 8-43 and 306 on page 6-5
Assigns the Node IDs to Route Choice Tables for Private Networking.
1. Complete the "Private
Routing Plan Analysis
Table Record Sheet" on
page 8-44.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Route Plan
Analysis.
3. Enter the Node ID number
(six digit numeral) to add to
the Private Routing Plan
Analysis Table.
Click List to see a summary
list of programmed Node
IDs or click Copy to copy
data from an existing Node ID.
4. Select the Private Route Choice Table in which to add the Node ID entered in Step 3 above.
Possible values are 1~64, 0 = Delete and default = 0.
5. Click Submit.
Private Routing Plan Analysis Table Record Sheet
01 Route
01 Route
01 Route
00 Node ID
Choice
00 Node ID
Choice
00 Node ID
Choice
Table
Table
Table
8-44
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Private Route Choice Definition
Program Number(s): 653, 654 and 655
Use these command to define Private Network Routing parameters.
1. Complete the "Route
Choice Definition Record
Sheet" on page 8-47.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Route
Choice Definition.
Se
r
3. Enter Program 653, 654
vice
and 655 data.
s
Select the Private Network
4. Click Submit.
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Choice Table. A Private Route Choice Table contains
up to six Route Definitions. The system will step through these Route Definitions in terminating
hunt fashion to find a route to the desired private networking node. There may be up to 64 Route
Choice Tables.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Pvt Ntwk Route Choice
Select the Private Network Route Choice Table Number.
Table Number
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01~06 Route Definition
Select Route Definition Tables 1~6 to be used for this Private Network Route
Tables
Choice.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-45

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to define a Private Route Definition. A Private Route Definition consists of an
OLG and a pointer into the Private Digit Modification Table that contains the dialed digits to be
deleted and/or inserted before being communicated to the distant node.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Private Network Route
Select the number of the Private Route Definition to be defined or deleted.
Definition
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 OLG
Select the OLG to be used by this route.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) 0 = delete (default = 0)
02 Digit Modification Table
Select the Digit Modification Table to be used by this route.
Possible values: 1~64, 0 = delete (default)
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Digit Modification Tables for Private Networking.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Private Digit
Select the Private Network Digit Modification Table to be defined.
Modification Table
Possible values: 1~64 (default = no value)
01 Deleted Digits
Select the number of leading digits to be deleted.
Possible values: 1~10, 0 = delete (default)
02 Insert Leading Digits
Select the leading digits to be inserted.
Possible values: Up to 23 digits (default = no value)
8-46
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Route Choice Definition Record Sheet
Program 653 Values
Program 654 Values
Program 655 Values
00 Route
Route Definition Tables
00 Route
02 Digit
00 Digit
01 Delete
01 OLG
02 Insert Digits
Choice Table
Definition
Mod
Mod Table
Digits
01
02
03
04
05
06
Se
rvice
s
Mapping
Program Number(s): 657, 658, 659 and 660
The following programs map network and local COS, DRL, FRL and QPL settings to each other.
1. Complete the "Network
Mapping Record Sheets"
on page 8-49.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Networking > Mapping.
3. Enter Program 657 data.
4. Enter Program 658 data.
5. Enter Program 659 data.
6. Enter Program 660 data.
7. Click Submit.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-47

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
657 Network COS Mapping Table
Prerequisite Program: None
This table maps a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of
Service for access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Ntwk COS
Enter the Network COS to be mapped.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
01 Local COS
Enter the Local COS to be used in place of the received Network COS.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = no value)
02 Off-hook Call Announce
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can activate OCA.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 System Speed Dial
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use a System Speed
Dial number to make an outgoing call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 COS Override
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can use Class of Service
Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 TGAC Override
Choose whether an incoming call with this Network COS can override local Trunk
Group Access Control. Typically an attendant function.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
658/659/660 Network DRL/FRL/QPL Mapping Tables
Prerequisite Program: None
These commands are used to establish two mapping tables to equate local DRLs, FRLs and QPLs
with network DRLs, FRLs and QPLs for both outbound and inbound network calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Type
Select the Network DRL/FRL/QPL type.
Possible values: Outbound or Inbound (default = no value)
·
Outbound ­ maps a local DRL/FRL/QPL to a Network DRL/FRL/QPL.
·
Inbound ­ maps a Network DRL/FRL/QPL to a local DRL/FRL/QPL.
Network DRL/FRL/QPL
Enter the Network DRL/FRL/QPL (for outbound) you want to map to a Local DRL/
FRL/QPL.
Possible values: DRL/FRL/QPL1~DRL/FRL/QPL16 (default = 1~16)
Local DRL/FRL/QPL
Enter the Local DRL/FRL/QPL (for inbound) you want to map to the Network DRL/
FRL/QPL selected in the Network DRL/FRL/QPL field above.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1~16)
8-48
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Network Mapping Record Sheets
Program 658
Program 659
Program 660
Program 657 Values
Values
Values
Values
Network Local
02
03
04 COS 05 TGAC
Table Type:
Table Type:
Table Type:
COS
COS
OCA Sys SD Override Override
_______
_______
_______
DRL1
FRL1
QPL1
DRL2
FRL2
QPL2
DRL3
FRL3
QPL3
DRL4
FRL4
QPL4
DRL5
FRL5
QPL5
DRL6
FRL6
QPL6
Se
DRL7
FRL7
QPL7
rv
DRL8
FRL8
QPL8
ice
DRL9
FRL9
QPL9
s
DRL10
FRL10
QPL10
DRL11
FRL11
QPL11
DRL12
FRL12
QPL12
DRL13
FRL13
QPL13
DRL14
FRL14
QPL14
DRL15
FRL15
QPL15
DRL16
FRL16
QPL16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-49

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Miscellaneous
The Strata CTX system can monitor SMDR, Call History and Behind Centrex. Use the following
programs to set up these services.
SMDR
The following enable programming for SMDR, Call History and Behind Connection settings.
Program Number(s): 512, 513 and 514
The following programs assigns system-wide SMDR parameters.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Miscellaneous > SMDR.
2. Enter Program 512 data.
3. Enter Program 513 data.
4. Enter Program 514 data.
5. Click Submit.
512 SMDR for System Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This table translates a Network COS received as part of a Traveling Class Mark to a local Class of
Service for access to local services. There is no translation of Outgoing Network COS.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Caller ID Field
Include Caller ID records in SMDR.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 B-Record for
Generate B Record for an abandoned call.
Abandoned Call
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
03 Automatic Number
Include ANI in SMDR record.
Identification (ANI)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
04 Authorization Code
Include authorization codes in SMDR records.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 End-of-Record CR
Include a Carriage Return (CR) at the end of an SMDR record.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
8-50
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
513 SMDR for ILG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program assigns SMDR parameters for ILGs.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Incoming Line Group
Specify the ILG for which to set SMDR parameters.
(ILG)
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Generate SMDR
Enable to generate records for this ILG
Records
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Se
02 DNIS Field Indication
Check to include DNIS information in records for this ILG.
rvice
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
s
03 B Record for Incoming
Enable B Record generation for incoming calls with or without incoming SMDR
Call
being enabled.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Abandoned Call Record
Enable record generation for abandoned calls. Incoming SMDR must be turned on.
Output
Abandoned call records will be generated whether or not incoming SMDR has been
set.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
05 Display Transferred Call
Select whether to charge a transferred call to the source or destination party.
Records
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination
514 SMDR for OLG Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns SMDR parameters for OLGs.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Outgoing Line Group
Specify the OLG for which to set SMDR parameters.
(OLG)
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100)
02 Outgoing Records
Generate records for outgoing calls. SMDR Record Display must be Enabled.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
03 Charged Station
Apply the SMDR record of a transferred call to its source or its destination.
Possible values: Source (default) or Destination
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-51

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
577 Caller History
Prerequisite Program: None
Accounting Codes need to be specified for the number of digits that are expected to be used for
registering the number. This allows the dialing within the system to proceed automatically once
the correct account code is dialed, the following numbers are then dialed digits used for making
the phone call. A second length is provided to allow the number of digits to be used for verification
of the code to be less than the total code entered, thus the code may contain two parts, one required
and one part optional to the user.
1. Complete the Call History
Record Sheet below.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Services >
Miscellaneous > Behind
Connection.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Ckt Type/Number
Enter the Circuit Type and number. See the Table 8-1 below.
Possible values: Up to 6 digits (default = no value)
01 Prime DN
Enter Station DN to store call history data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Table 8-1
Circuit Type Code Definitions
Circuit Name
Circuit Type
Circuit Number
Example
DN
1
0~99999 (DN)
if DN is 200, value is 1200
CO
2
1~264 (Trunk Number)
if CO is 30, value is 230
GCO
3
1~128 (GCO Key Group Number)
if GCO is 50, value is 350
POOL
4
1~128 (POOL Key Group Number)
if POOL is 80, value data is 480
8-52
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Call History Record Sheet
Circuit Type
01 PDN
Circuit Type
01 PDN
Circuit Type
01 PDN
Se
650 Behind Centrex Assignment
rvice
Prerequisite Program: None
s
This feature allows Strata CTX to connect to the station side of a PBX or Centrex using a physical
loop trunk interface. DR and Least Cost Routing may need to account for access codes required by
the PBX or Centrex before connecting to the public network.
1. Complete the Behind Centrex
Assignment Record Sheet below.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Miscellaneous >
Behind Centrex Assignment.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 OLG Number
Select OLG that is attached to a Centrex (or other PBX).
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100), (default = no value)
01 Behind Centrex
Enable Behind Centrex Operation for this OLG.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 Assume 9
Enable the Assume 9 feature.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-53

---

Services
Strata Net Programming Overview
Behind Centrex Assignment Record Sheet
01 Behind 02 Assume 03 Pause
01 Behind 02 Assume 03 Pause
00 OLG Number
00 OLG Number
Centrex
9
Timer
Centrex
9
Timer
8-54
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
External Devices
External Devices
Door Phones
Program Number(s): 507, 576 and 508
This command assigns Door Phone parameters.
1. Complete the "Door Phone
Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 8-59.
2. From the Program Menu,
Se
click Services > External
rv
Device > Door Phones.
ice
s
3. Enter Door Phone Number
...or click one of the
following buttons:
·
List ­ view a summary
list of programmed
Door Phones.
·
Create ­ Assign a new
Door Phone with
default settings.
·
Copy ­ Enter an existing Door Phone Number in the corresponding and click Copy to copy
settings from an existing Door Phone.
·
Delete ­ Delete a Door Phone.
4. Enter remaining Program 507 data.
5. Enter Program 576 data.
6. Enter Program 508 data.
7. Click Submit.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-55

---

Services
External Devices
507 Door Phone Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment configures Door Phone Control Boxes (DDCBs) and Door Phones (MDFBs).
DDCBs can be connected to ADKU, PDKU and/or BDKU interface PCBs. Up to three MDFBs
can be connected to one DDCB. A Door lock control relay may be assigned to the B output of the
DDCB in place of a MDFB door phone (see "508 Door Lock Control Assignment" on page 8-58).
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Door Phone Number
Enter the door phone number.
Possible values: 1~24 (default = no value)
Door phone numbering for both CTX100 and CTX670 is as follows:
·
DDCB 1 provides door phone numbers 1~3, 2 can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 2 provides door phone numbers 4~6, 5 can be a door phone or door lock.
Door phone numbering for CTX670 only is as follows:
·
DDCB 3 provides door phone numbers 7~9, 8 can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 4 provides door phones 10~12, 11can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 5 provides door phones 13~15, 14 can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 6 provides door phones 16~18, 17 can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 7 provides door phones 19~21, 20 can be a door phone or door lock.
·
DDCB 8 provides door phones 22~24, 23 can be a door phone or door lock.
DDCBs are numbered by the system automatically by DDCB Equipment (Shelf/
Slot/Circuit). DDCB1 is assigned to the lowest DDCB Equipment and DDCB2 to the
next lowest, etc.
If DDCB Circuit B is set to Door Lock, a Door Phone cannot be set.
01 DDCB Equipment No.
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door phone should be assigned.
Possible values: xx = cabinet 01~07; yy = slot 01~10; zz = circuit 01~16
(default = no value)
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
·
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
·
If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted, using
Program 201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.
Cabinet numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion
cabinet.
Slot numbers:
·
CTX100 ­ Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
·
CTX670 ­ Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Tenant Number
Select the Tenant Number for which the door phone should ring over external page
in the system Night mode.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
8-56
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
External Devices
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Ring Duration
Select the time that the door phone should ring destination devices when the door
phone button is pressed. The ring time can be 3 to 30 seconds set in 3 second
intervals - each 3 second interval provides one ring to the destination. Destination
devices include selected DNs and Page groups.
Possible values: 3~30 (default = 9)
05 LCD Name Display
Enter the Door Phone name that should display on LCD telephones when the door
phone rings the telephones; or, when the telephone calls the door phone.
Possible values: Up to 16 characters (default = no value)
06 Day1 Destination
1. Select Destination Type ­ Select the type of destination that should ring when
Se
the door phone button is pressed during the system Day1, Day2 or Night mode.
r
07 Day2 Destination
vice
Possible values: None (default), DN or Paging Group
08 Night Destination
s
2. Enter the Destination Number ­ If the ring destination type is a PDN or PhDN,
enter the directory number. If the ring destination type is Page, enter the Page
Group number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
576 Door Phone Night Ring Over External Page
This command assigns a Page Group to ring during system Night Mode when a door phone button
is pressed. The assignment can be made independently for each Tenant.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number
Select the system Tenant number to be assigned Door Phone to Page Group/Night
Ringing.
Possible values: 1~8 (CTX670) or 1 (CTX100) (default = no value)
01 Page Group Number
Select the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected Tenant
when a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-57

---

Services
External Devices
508 Door Lock Control Assignment
This assignment is used to configure up to 10 door lock control relays. The contacts of these relays
are used to control electrical door locks. One door lock relay can be assigned to each of the eight
Door Phone Control Boxs (DDCB, Port -B) and/or one to each of the two BIOU PCBs (any one of
the four control relays).
Note If a door lock is assigned to a DDCB, the second jack (Port B) will provide the door lock
relay contacts. This jack can not be used to connect an MDFB door phone.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Door Lock Number
Enter the door lock control number to configure.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = no value)
01 Interface Type
Enter the system Page Group number that should ring for the selected tenant when
a door phone button is pressed during the system Night Mode.
Possible values: None (default), BIOU or DDCB
02 BIOU Relay Number
Assign BIOU control relay as a Door Lock Relay. This relay activates when the Door
Lock button is pressed or a Door Lock access code is dialed.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides control relays 1~4
BIOU2 provides control relays 5~8.
Note
Note: The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this
relay operation BIOU2 is installed as default in a virtual equipment position
Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install an actual
BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming
telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01/slot 01~08 in the normal manner. BIOU relay functions are
assigned in "515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments" on
page 8-60.This field is required if you selected BIOU in 01 Interface Type
above.
03 DDCB Equipment No.
Enter the DDCB equipment number to which the Door Lock should be assigned.
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU interface
PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~16 (default
= no value)
Example: If the DDCB interface should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
Notes
·
This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the BDKU/BDKS or PDKU
interface PCB to which the DDCB is to be connected.
·
If a PDN is assigned to the DDCB equipment number it must be deleted, using
PRG201, before attempting to assign the DDCB console.
8-58
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
External Devices
Door Phone Assignment Record Sheet
Program 507 Values
Program 576 Values
00 Door Phone
01 DDCB 02 Tenant 04 Ring 05 LCD
06 Day 1
07 Day 2
08 Night
00 Tenant 01 Page
Number
Equipment
Number
Duration
Name
Number
Group
Dest
Num
Dest
Num
Dest
Num
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program 508 Values
Se
00 Door
01
02 BIOU 03 DDCB
rv
Lock
Interface
Relay
Equip
ice
1
s
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-59

---

Services
External Devices
515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 100 on page 4-1, and 105 on page 4-13
This assignment is used to view functions of the four control relays on each BIOU PCB set in
Program 105 12 Night Relay and 18 Night Bell Relay; Program 508 Door Lock Control
Assignment; and Program 503 19 BGM Mute Relay. The system allows up to two BIOU PCBs to
provide a total of eight control relays.The control relays can be configured as an external BGM
mute control, Night Bell control, Night Mode Control, and Door Lock Control.
Notes
BIOU-1 relays are identified as Control Relays 1~4.
BIOU-2 relays are identified as Control Relays 5~8.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Services > External Device >
BIOU Relay Type.
2. Enter Program 515 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 BIOU (1 or 2)
Enter the BOIU PCB number.
Possible values: 1 or 2 (default = no value)
Note
BIOU 1 and BIOU 2 are assigned in Program 100 - Card Assignment.
01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 1 or BIOU2, control relay 5:
02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 2 or BIOU2, control relay 6:
03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 3 or BIOU2, control relay 7:
04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
View the function of BIOU1, control relay 4 or BIOU2, control relay 8:
Possible values: Not Use, Ext Paging, Night Bell, Night Relay or Door Lock
(default = no value)
·
NOT USE ­ if the relay is not used.
·
PAGE MUTE ­ External BGM mute control activates during an external page
(see "503 Paging Devices Group Assignments" on page 8-61).
·
NIGHT BELL ­ Night Bell control activates during the system Night Mode only
when incoming CO lines ring (see "102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes"
on page 4-4).
·
NIGHT RELAY ­ Night Mode Control activates continuously during the system
Night Mode (see "105 System Data" on page 4-13).
·
DOOR LOCK ­ Door Lock Control activates when a telephone's Door Unlock
button is pressed (see "508 Door Lock Control Assignment" on page 8-58).
8-60
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
External Devices
503 Paging Devices Group Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 502 on page 5-22
Assigns BIOU Page Zone Relays to Page Groups.
1. Complete the "Door Phone
Assignment Record Sheet" on
page 8-59.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > External Device > Paging
Devices.
Se
3. Enter 00 Zone Relay Number.
rv
4. Check the Paging Groups that you
ice
wish to activate.
s
5. Select the external generic relay
number.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Zone Relay Number
Select the BIOU Page Zone relay that should be assigned to the Page Groups
below. This relay activates whenever the selected Page Group is paged.
·
BIOU1 = Zone Relays 1~4.
·
BIOU2 = Zone Relays 5~8.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
01 PG 1~16 PG 16
Check the box if the selected BIOU Page Zone Relay should activate with this Page
17 All Page Group
Group.
18 All Emergency Page
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Group
19 BGM Mute Relay
Assign BIOU generic relay as the BGM mute relay. This relay activates whenever
the external page is in use
·
BIOU1 = Generic Relays 1~4.
·
BIOU2 = Generic Relays 5~8.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 0)
Note
The CTX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay
operation,BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment position -
Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20, in Program 100. To install an actual
BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming
telephone to remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in
Cabinet 01 Slot 01~08 in the normal manner.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-61

---

Services
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Paging Device Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 Zone
Paging Groups (Enter Check to turn On)
17 Include in All
18 All Emerg
19 Ext Generic
Relay
Paging Group
Page Group
Relay Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns OLGs to the
Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group.
1. Complete the "Emergency Call
Group Assignment Record Sheet"
on page 8-63.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Services > Enhanced 911.
3. Select Program 550 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Emergency Call Group
Specify the Emergency Call Group.
Number
Possible values: 1~8 (default = no value)
01 OLG1~08 OLG8
Specify the first through eighth OLG to be chosen for an E911 call.
Possible values: 1~128 (CTX670), 1~32 (CTX100) (default = 0)
8-62
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Services
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet
00 E-Call
OLG Number
Group
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
0 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Se
7
rv
8
ice
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
8-63

---

Services
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
8-64
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
9
This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin's operational programming functions.
System Setup
Program Number(s): 900, 901 and 902
These programs enable programmers to simulate system Power Off/On, initialize Strata CTX,
check software versions and set system clock data.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > System
O
Setup.
per
2. Click Restart CTX to reset
ati
o
Strata CTX.
n
...or click Initialize CTX to
delete programmed data
and revert to default
settings.
3. 901 CTX Version data is
for viewing only.
4. Set Strata CTX date and
time.
5. Click Submit.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-1

---

Operation
System Setup
900 CTX Restart
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores programmed data.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Restart CTX
Clicking on this button initializes a System Power Off/Power On sequence to reset
hardware. This is also known as an Initialize Level 2.
Initialize CTX
Clicking on this button invokes an Initialize Level 1 sequence which erases
programmed data and enters default data into the Strata CTX System.
If Smart Media is installed in the available slot, using this option restores data from
backed up data from the Smart Media (see Restoring Data from Smart Media
below).
Important!
Choosing Initialize Level 1 (Initialize CTX) without installing a Smart Media Card
deletes all programmed data and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings.
All previously programmed data is lost.
Restoring Data from Smart Media
When initializing with Initialize CTX, you can restore custom data that was previously
programmed and stored on a Smart Media card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Insert a Smart Media card that contains the Progdata directory with the default.dat file.
The default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data
Backup. See "910 Data Backup" on page 9-8.
2. Run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
Restoring data from the Smart Media card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the
restore process access the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the
system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does
not necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
9-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
System Setup
901 Display Version
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the current and standby software versions for the Strata CTX
system. The version code also enables you to view the Strata CTX installed options (see "Reading
the Version Code" below).
Reading the Version Code
The figure below is an example of the Strata CTX software version code.
Country
Code
CTX
CTX
IPL
DTMF
Installed
Product ID
Release
Software
Version Version
Equipment ID
Level
Version
N A 1 0 1 M 0 0 X X P 1 D 1 2 B X S E M . 0 0
5796
Figure 9<n+>Version Code
O
·
Product ID ­ This is the first character in the version code string. "N" designates Strata
per
CTX670 and "S" Strata CTX100.
ati
o
·
Country Code ­ "A" identifies the country (USA, Canada, Mexico).
n
·
CTX Release Level ­ This string of numbers identifies the Strata CTX Release level.
·
CTX Software Version ­ This string of characters identifies the current software version. For
the example above, the software is called "M00XX."
·
DTMF Version ­ This three character string identifies the existence of DTMF and the version.
The "D" designation indicates that DTMF is being applied to the Strata CTX while "09"
indicates the DTMF version number.
·
Installed Equipment ID ­ There are five characters, each referencing a unique equipment
identification value assigned to hardware installed in your Strata CTX system. If the particular
hardware is not installed a "-" is displayed. The following are the equipment identifier
designations.
·
B ­ BBMS is installed.
·
X ­ BEXS is installed.
·
S ­ BSIS is installed.
·
E ­ The Ethernet is installed.
·
M ­ The Modem is installed.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-3

---

Operation
908 Smart Media
902 Set Time and Date
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
CTX Date
Set Strata CTXs current date.
1. Set the current date (YYYYMMDD).
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month and DD = Day (default = no value)
2. Current Day of Week will display once the Year, Month and Day parameters
have been entered.
Possible values: Sunday ~ Saturday (Read only) (default = no value).
3. Leap Year will display based on the year entered.
Possible values: Leap, Leap Next 1, Leap Next 2, Leap Next 3 (Read only)
(default = no value).
CTX Time
Set Strata CTXs current time (hhmmss).
Possible values: hh = hour, mm = minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value).
908 Smart Media
This program enables Administrators to format a Smart Media card.
Note CTX WinAdmin can view Smart Media event and alarm log file lists directly using the File
Information Screen, but the WinAdmin PC can use File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to
administer SmartMedia files, otherwise a SmartMedia read/writer is required. For more
information, see "SmartMedia Card" on page B-46.
1. Install the Smart Media Card into
the designated slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Smart Media.
3. Click one of the following:
·
Normal Format ­ creates any
CTX Smart Media directory
that does not exist already.
Existing directories are not
overwritten by this procedure.
·
Forced Format ­ erases any
existing directories and files.
All existing data is
overwritten. See CTX Smart
Media Directories below for
more information.
·
Unmount ­ stops CTX from writing to the Smart Media Card so it can be removed without
damaging it. It writes data onto the Smart Media Card from static RAM. Always run
unmount before removing the Smart Media card to prevent damage to the card.
·
Transfer ­ writes data onto the Smart Media Card from static RAM.
9-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
908 Smart Media
4. The Operation Status fields display the progress and status of the procedure selected.
CTX Smart Media Directories
Running the Normal and
Forced options of this
program creates five
directories on the Smart
Media card as follows:
·
Admlog ­ The Admlog
folder saves
·
Errlog ­ System error
logs are saved into this
folder.
·
Evnttrce ­ CTX
WinAdmin Event Trace
files are saved into this
folder.
·
Progdata ­ Your Strata
O
CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder. When a backup is performed, Strata CTX
per
saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.
ati
o
·
Program ­ The operating software and default data of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder.
n
Managing the Strata CTX SmartMedia card using File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Use FTP to administer the Strata CTX Smart Media card. The Strata CTX processor has a built-in
FTP server function that allows users to manage the CTX Smart Media card files and folders using
the DOS FTP Commands on a PC.
Example
To copy a CTX administration log file from the CTX SmartMedia card to the WinAdmin PC using
FTP follow the steps below:
1. Setup a CTX FTP User Account using the WinAdmin "FTP User Accounts" on page 9-10.
Make sure the Home directory is /0/. This is the CTX Smart Media card root directory.
2. Exit CTX WinAdmin after the CTX FTP account is set up.
3. On the CTX WinAdmin PC root directory, create a folder named CTXFILES
(C:\>CTXFILES). The SmartMedia card files will be copied to this directory.
4. On the CTX WinAdmin PC, click Start, then RUN and type cmd.exe then click OK.
5. The DOS prompt screen appears and displays C:\. At the DOS prompts, type the commands
that are in the following table and press Enter.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-5

---

Operation
908 Smart Media
Type Command at DOS prompt
DOS Prompt
Comments
And press enter
C:\>
CD CTXFILES
Change directory to the CTXFILES folder
C:\>CTXFILES
ftp 192.168.254.253
Connect the CTX WinAdmin PC to the
Strata CTX using the ftp command and
the IP address of the target Strata CTX.
Connected to .........
username
Enter CTX FTP Account User Name.
Welcome to server......
User:
Password:
password
Enter CTX FTP account user password
User logged in.
Binary
Set to binary mode.
ftp>
Type set to I
DIR
At the ftp prompt, enter the DIR command
ftp>
to list the CTX smart media card
directories.
ERRLOG
CD ADMLOG
At the ftp prompt, enter CD ADMLOG
EVNTTRCE
command to change to the ADMLOG
ADMLOG
directory.
PROGDATA
PROGRAM
ftp>
CWD Command Successful.
DIR
At the ftp prompt, enter the DIR command
ftp>
to list the ADMLOG directory files.
12151100.DKT
mget 12151100.DKT
At the ftp prompt, enter the mget
12191400.SNP
command (plus space and file name) to
ftp>
copy the log file from the smart media card
to the CTXFILES directory on the PC.
mget 12151100.DKT?
y
When prompted with (?) enter y
Transfer complete
The DKT administration log file was
ftp>
copied to the WinAdmin PC CTXFILES
directory successfully
The above is only one example of what can be done using FTP file management on the Strata
CTX. Using the DOS FTP commands listed provides some other possible functions. See table
below.
DOS FTP command
Function
mget
Copy file from smart media card to WinAdmin PC
(example above)
mput
Copy a file from the WinAdmin PC to the smart media
card
mdelete
Delete a file or folder from the smart media card.
bye
To exit the ftp connection
?
Lists available FTP commands
cd
Change directory
cd ..
Change back to previous directory
9-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
911 Remote Program Update
911 Remote Program Update
This program enables you to update the Strata CTX programs.
Prerequisite Program: 908 on page 9-4
1. From the Program Menu, click Operation > Program Update.
2. Obtain the update file from
Toshiba. This is a zipped
Unix file about 4MB. It is
named CTX100-Mxx-
rmobj.tgz or CTX670-
Mxx-rmobj.tgz.
3. On the Strata CTX
WinAdmin PC, under the
WinAdmin "Upload"
folder, create a new sub
folder named CTX100-
Mxx or CTX670-Mxx
(where xx is the version
number of the Strata CTX
O
software that will be
p
updated). Create the new
erati
folder on the C: drive or
o
whichever drive Strata CTX WinAdmin is installed, in this path:
n
CTX\WinAmin\ctmc\ctmc_Local\Upload\CTXM100-Mxx.
4. Unzip the CTX100-Mxx-rmobj.tgz file into the CTXM100-Mxx folder ­ approximately 236
files should be unzipped. The text file is a header which contains the Strata CTX software
version number. These individual files will be sent to the Strata CTX processor standby side of
flash memory (Strata CTX 670) or Smart media card (Strata CTX 100) during the Update
process.
5. Install a SmartMedia Card into the Strata CTX processor. This SmartMedia card must be
formatted using the PC SmartMedia read/writer.
6. From the SmartMedia selection in Strata CTX WinAdmin, format the SmartMedia with the
Strata CTX format using "Forced Format."
7. From the Backup Data selection in WinAdmin, backup the Strata CTX program database onto
the SmartMedia card using "Back Up."
Note Keep this SmartMedia card installed on the Strata CTX processor to allow the programmed
data to be restored automatically following the remote Update and Restart process.
8. Update the Strata CTX software remotely from the Remote Update screen.
·
From the "Upload From Folders" drop-down menu select the folder that you created in Step
3 above.
· Click on Start Remote Program Update.
Note The Update starts immediately after clicking the Start Remote Program Update button. This
process may take 25 minutes or more, depending on the number of files to be transferred.
9. A message display will indicate the completion of the Update process.
10.Current Status displays the update progress.
11. Restart the Strata CTX.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-7

---

Operation
910 Data Backup
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Upload from Folder
Select the Strata CTX type.
Possible values: CTX100-MxxS, CTX 670-Mxx, where xx = software version
number (default = no value).
Version Number
Software version number is displayed.
Number of Files
Displays number of files uploaded. This field is dynamic and will change during the
process.
Files Uploaded
Displays number of files uploaded.
Operation Completion
View operation status.
Copied blocks
View number of blocks copied.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)
Total Blocks
View total blocks to be updated.
Possible values: 0~65536 (default = 0)
Active Side ID
Active Side Number.
Possible values: 0 or 1 (default = 0)
Active Side Status
Backup Type Display.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don't care or Error
Standby Side Status
Standby Backup Type. This field will display only when connected to a Strata CTX
670. It will not display when connected to Strata CTX 100.
Possible values: Normal (default), Trial, Fault, Don't Care or Error
910 Data Backup
Prerequisite Program: 908 on page 9-4
This program enables you to backup and restore date from Strata CTX to a Smart Media Card.
1. Install the Smart Media
Card into the designated
slot of the Strata CTX
processor.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > Data
Backup.
3. Select the Backup button.
Click Cancel to interrupt
the selected function.
4. Click Run.
5. The Progress field displays
the progress of the selected
function.
9-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
910 Data Backup
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Backup
Select one of the following buttons. When performing a Backup/Restore, use a
formatted Smart Media card.
·
Backup ­ Backup Strata CTX data to Smart Media card. This creates a
Default.dat file under the Progdata directory of the Smart Media card.
Default.dat contains all CTX programmed data.
Notes
·
Default.dat is the name of the file and it contains all programmed
Strata CTX data. It is not limited to default data only.
·
The Progdata directory on the SmartMedia card must be empty.
·
Cancel ­ Cancel the Backup/Restore function.
Completion
Current Status of Backup.
Possible values:
·
All_Ok ­ Backup completed with no errors.
·
Partial_Ok ­ Backup has completed with errors.
·
NG ­ Backup has failed.
O
·
Cancel ­ Cancel Backup.
perati
·
Importing ­ Program data is being restored.
o
·
Exporting ­ Program data is being sent out.
n
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-9

---

Operation
916 TCP/IP Configuration
916 TCP/IP Configuration
Prerequisite Program: None
This program displays Network Communication Protocols. To change TCP/IP settings see "Assign
IP Address to Strata CTX" on page 2-7.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > IP Configuration.
2. The following Strata CTX addresses
are displayed:
·
IP Address ­
192.168.254.253 (NIC/
Ethernet).
·
192.168.255.254 (Strata
CTX modem fixed IP address for
Dial-up connections).
·
Subnet Mask (default =
255.255.255.0).
·
Default Gateway (default =
0.0.0.0).
3. Select another program from the
Program Menu.
FTP User Accounts
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes up to four FTP users for the built-in Strata CTX FTP server function
located on the Strata CTX processor. These Strata CTX FTP accounts allow FTP access to the
Strata CTX SmartMedia card. This allows administration of the Strata CTX SmartMedia folders
and files. For more details refer to, "Managing the Strata CTX SmartMedia card using File
Transfer Protocol (FTP)" on page 9-5.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > FTP User Account.
2. Select the FTP Index. Up to four FTP
Users can be established.
3. Enter the FTP User's Account Name.
4. Assign the FTP User a Password.
5. Enter the default directory to which
this FTP account is to access. This
should be /0/ which is the root
directory of the Strata CTX
SmartMedia card.
6. Click Submit.
Note FTP User Accounts are stored in
memory on the Strata CTX
processor and are intentionally deleted for security when the Strata CTX is powered off/on
or initialized.
9-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
File Information
File Information
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view details about Alarm and Administration files stored on the
Strata CTX SmartMedia card. See "908 Smart Media" on page 9-4 for more information about
these files.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > File
Information.
2. Select from one of the
following options
...or click List to see a
summary list of Files
already programmed into
the system. View the file
name index, number,
name, and creation and
modification dates under
each of the categories
O
listed below.
perati
·
Error Alarm Files.
on
·
Error Alarm Expansion
Files.
·
SNMP Administrator Files.
·
DKT Administrator Files.
Note For a detailed description on Trace function go to "Trace Function" on page B-52.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-11

---

Operation
Community Name
Community Name
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to create and set up a File Information to maintenance and monitor
Strata CTX.
1. From the Program Menu, click
Operation > Community Name.
2. Select the ID Number to assign to
the Community or click one of the
following buttons:
·
Remove ­ highlight an existing
community from the table and
click this button to remove the
selected community from the
index.
·
Modify ­ highlight an existing
community from the table and
click this button to modify the IP
Address, Privileges and
Administrator Level settings for
this community.
3. Enter the remaining fields and click
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Community Name
Enter the Community name. The Community Name is a password that is stored in
the Strata CTX. To communicate with a Strata CTX, the WinAdmin PC must send a
legal community name to the CTX when attempting to connect. The default
community name stored in the CTX is communityName (case sensitive). The Strata
CTX can store up to 10 community names.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address the Community Name. Each community name is associated
with an IP Address. This IP address is stored in the CTX with its associated
community name.
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Notes
·
To allow any CTX WinAdmin PC to connect to the Strata CTX with a particular
community name, enter as the IP address for that Community Name.
·
To allow only a specific WinAdmin PC to connect to the CTX with a particular
community name, enter the static IP address of that PC for that community
name.
Privileges
Select User Privilege Levels. These privileges are to assign the community name or
IP address to an internal Strata CTX level.
Possible values: Read (default) or Write
Note
Read ­ The user cannot modify Strata CTX data regardless of the
WinAdmin User level 1~4.
Write ­ The user can modify Strata CTX data according to the WinAdmin
user level 1~4.
9-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
909 MAC Address
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Administrator Level
Select Administrator Level. This level is to assign the community name or IP
address to an internal Strata CTX access level.
Possible values: Super User (default) or Ordinary User
Notes
·
Super User ­ Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX commands.
Super Users can only view ordinary user community names and their own
community name but not other Super User community names.
·
Ordinary User ­ Strata CTX allows the user access to all Strata CTX programs
except 900 Initialization/Restart and 911 Update. Ordinary users can only view
their own community name.
909 MAC Address
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to view the Media Access Control (MAC) Address assigned to your
Strata CTX System. The MAC Address is printed on the back of the processor card that is used for
the Strata CTX 670 (Processor Part Number BBCU1A) and Strata CTX 100 (Processor Part
Number ACTU1A). A MAC Address must be converted to the applicable serial number utilized in
O
Internet FYI for License code generation.
perati
1. From the Program Menu, click
o
Operation > MAC Address.
n
2. Enter your system serial number.
Note The serial number is printed on
the invoice and bar code of the
product shipment.
3. MAC Address is displayed as
shown to the right.
AABBCCDDEEFF = Hex a Decimal
values 0~9, A~F.
4. Click another program from the
Program Menu.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-13

---

Operation
Trap Destinations
Trap Destinations
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to setup Trap IPs.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > Trap IP
Setup.
2. Select a Trap IP Index
number or click Add to
add a Trap IP index.
3. Click Submit
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Community Name
Enter the Name of the Community.
Possible values: Alpha characters (default = no value).
IP Address
Enter the IP Address for remote connection.
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
9-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Operation
License Control
License Control
Program Number(s): 913 and 914
The following programs enable you to issue and maintain License Activation settings for CTX
WinAdmin users.
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to issue new licenses.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > License
Control.
2. Issue a License by cutting
and pasting or manually
entering the 60-character
string in the License Code
text box.
3. Click one of the following
buttons:
·
Issue ­ to issue the
Op
License Code.
erati
·
Cancel Issue ­ to cancel
on
the License Code issue.
4. Activate the License entered
above by selecting the delay timer.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
·
Activate ­ for license activation.
·
Cancel Activate ­ to cancel license activation.
License Issue
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables System Administrators to issue Licenses for CTX WinAdmin users.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Status
Displays Licensing Status:
Possible values: Not yet, Issue Stand by, Issue Finished, Cancel Issue, Activate
Stand by, Activate Finished or Cancel Activate
License Code
Cut and paste the License code text string or manually enter the License Code (six
characters per box).
Possible values: 60 characters.
Note
The License Code will have to be generated from Toshiba's FYI website
(http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com). After obtaining the License code from FYI save
it as a Text file. Cut and paste the License code obtained from Toshiba's
FYI website. The License Code is made up of the MAC Address and the
number of ports. The License Code that is generated for a particular MAC
Address is only good for the processor that contains that MAC Address.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
9-15

---

Operation
License Information
License Activate
Prerequisite Program: 913 above
This program enables activation of CTX WinAdmin licenses issued in Program 913.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Delay Timer
Select Activation Delay Timer in hours.
Possible values: 0~24 (default = 0)
Notes
·
Enter 0 to issue or activate the license immediately or 1~24 to set the automatic
delay activation feature, where 1 = 1 hour delay; 2 = 2 hour delay, etc.
·
After the license is activated, use the License Information screen below to check
that all Ports and features have been activated properly.
License Information
The following programs enable you to set up Licensing details for CTX WinAdmin users.
Prerequisite Program: None
1. From the Program Menu,
click Operation > License
Information.
2. View Licensing details for
this Strata CTX account.
3. Click Submit.
9-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Maintenance
10
This chapter discusses CTX WinAdmin's maintenance functions.
Trace Function
To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN
trace data. These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is
helpful for troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the procedures that appear
in this section. Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.
Trace Data
By running traces when tests are conducted on your Strata CTX system, you ensure that data are
being kept in the event your system encounters a problem. This data can be sent to Toshiba Tech
Support for analysis and troubleshooting.
Strata CTX can collect the following trace data:
· Error Log (including crash dump)
Ma
· Event Trace
inte
nanc
· ISDN L3 trace
Event traces can be performed by running Program 903 "Event Trace Control" on page 10-3,
e
through Program 908 "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59.
Error Log
When Strata CTX detects an error, the information is stored automatically without executing a
program. However, if the system locks up, you must restart the system to save the data to
SmartMedia.
Start/Stop/Store Trace Data
Whenever you execute a test, start recording the trace data by enabling the Event Trace Control
(Program 903). See page 10-3. If you use ISDN extensions or trunks, please record ISDN trace
data by starting "904 ISDN Trace Location" on page 10-4.
To test and retrieve trace data
Note
This procedure requires use of optional SmartMedia reading hardware and software or
FTP management with a personal computer. See "908 Smart Media" on page 9-4.
1. Start your test. If a problem occurs, stop the trace (please refer to the Event Trace Control and
904 ISDN Trace Location program instructions in this manual).
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
10-1

---

Maintenance
Trace Function
2. Verify the results by running the same test(s) again. If the problem can be duplicated the
information contained in the trace data becomes more useful.
3. Unmount data to SmartMedia using "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59.
4. Remove the SmartMedia card from Strata CTX. Use caution. The SmartMedia device can be
damaged if removed incorrectly.
5. Insert the SmartMedia card into your SmartMedia reader.
6. Locate the Evnttrce folder and save all files ending with .sdt and .mdt to your PCs hard
drive.
7. Locate the Crash Dump in the errlog folder. File extensions are .exp and .mnl and append
to your hard drive.
8. E-mail the files to your Toshiba support person.
If you start recording trace data after a problem occurs, the previous data is overwritten. Make sure
the required data files are stored to SmartMedia and saved to disk prior to starting another trace.
10-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Maintenance
Event Trace Control
Event Trace Control
Program Number(s): 903/904/905/906
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX. Program Numbers
903, 904, 905 and 906 are consolidated in one CTX WinAdmin screen (shown below).
1. Install the Smart Media Card
into the designated slot of the
Strata CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Maintenance > Event
Trace Control.
3. Enter Program 903 data.
4. Enter Program 904 data
5. Enter Program 905 data.
6. Enter Program 906 data.
7. Trace data is displayed in the
dialog boxes.
903 Start/Stop Trace
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Start/Stop Trace
Click in the appropriate button to Start or Stop Message Trace. Start Trace
Ma
indicates that the system's trace data collection process has begun. Stop indicates
the trace data collection process is terminated
inte
Before removing the Smart Media card run Program 908. See "908 Smart Media"
nanc
on page 9-4.
e
Possible values: Start Trace or Stop Trace (default)
Size
Set the trace data size. Toshiba recommends leaving this parameter at the default
setting which provides approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
Possible values: 1~256 bytes with 1 unit = 16 bytes (default = 2)
Category
Select Trace data type to be stored.
Possible values: Call Processing, Maintenance, and Call Processing and
Maintenance (default)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
10-3

---

Maintenance
Event Trace Control
904 ISDN Trace Location
ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions are established using this program.
Note This trace can be performed on BSU and PTU cards only.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Cabinet/Slot/Port
Enter the Equipment Location to be traced (xxyyzz).
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~04
Trace Kind
Select the trace collection level.
Possible values: LLCI Trace, Layer 2, Layer 2 & Layer 3 Trace, State Transitions
Trace, ERRORS Trace, Layer 2 Trace.
Trace Level
Select the extent to which the trace collects information.
Possible values: No Trace (default), Brief or Extensive
905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trace all ISDN Trunks
Select whether to trace all ISDN PRI and BRI trunks.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
906 Change Trace Side
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trace side
Select Trace side change.
Possible values: Message Trace (default), ISDN Trace or Both
10-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Maintenance
Error Alarm Log
Error Alarm Log
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to trace errors and alarms in Strata CTX.
1. Install the Smart Media
Card into the designated
slot of the Strata CTX
processor.
2. From the Program Menu,
click Operation >
Maintenance > Error/
Alarm Logs.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Ma
Start Date
Enter the date (YYMMDD) and time (hhmmss) on which to start the log.
inte
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
nanc
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)
End Date
Enter the date and time on which to end the log.
e
Possible values: YY = Year, MM = Month and DD = day (default = no value)
hh = Hour, mm = Minutes and ss = seconds (default = no value)
Start Rank Code
Prioritize by selecting a Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)
End Rank Code
Organize by selecting an End Rank Code.
Possible values: 1~99 (default = no value)
Error Code
This field logs the number of error codes.
Possible values: n (default = 0)
Org. Code
This field reflects the Error origination code.
Possible values: 1~10 (default = no value)
Search Number
Displays the search sequence.
Possible values: n (default = 0)
Search Result Number
This field displays the Search result number.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = no value)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
10-5

---

Maintenance
907 System Admin Log
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Log
This field displays the log information.
Expand Log
This field displays details of the logged data.
Search Result
Search results are displayed in this field.
907 System Admin Log
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log. When running this program, make sure to
insert the Smart Media card into the appropriate slot.
1. Insert the Smart Media Card into
the designated slot of the Strata
CTX processor.
2. From the Program Menu, click
Maintenance > System Admin Log.
3. Click to Start or Stop the System
Admin Log.
4. Click the Checking System Admin
Log Completion Status button to
view progress of this operation.
Note When Strata CTX670 stops
logging data, it automatically
sends data to the Smart Media
card. Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the Smart Media card to
ensure complete data transfer.
10-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Maintenance
Memory Access Operation
Memory Access Operation
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to manipulate memory settings.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Maintenance > Memory
Access.
2. Click the Read Memory or
Write Memory button to
access memory.
3. Enter the memory Address to
be accessed.
4. Select size of memory to
access (1~256, default = no
value).
5. Click one of the following
buttons:
·
New ­ click this button to create a new Memory Access filename.
·
Open ­ click this button to open an existing Memory Access file.
6. Click Submit.
7. Click Save to save Memory Access file.
Note The Content box displays the contents of the memory address selected.
Ma
Flash Memory Test
inte
Prerequisite Program: None
nanc
This program enables you test the system Flash memory.
e
1. From the Program Menu,
click Maintenance > Flash
Memory Test.
2. Click Start Test.
3. In the Flash Test Result dialog
box, wait for "Press Get
Result Button" to display.
4. Click Get Result.
5. Flash Memory Test Results
(OK or failed) are displayed
in the Flash Test Result dialog
box.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
10-7

---

Maintenance
Component Status/Control
Component Status/Control
Prerequisite Program: None
The following programs enable you to monitor the performance of various Strata CTX
components.
Main
This is your main system component monitor.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Maintenance >
Components > Main.
2. The System Component
Status dialog boxes are
displayed. The following
system components are
monitored from this
dialog box:
·
Main CPU
·
Data Highway
Sub-CPU 1~4.
·
PCM Sub CPU
·
Serial Sub CPU
Component.
·
Program Memory
·
General Memory
·
Backup Memory
·
Modem
·
Smart Media
·
LAN Controller
·
Network Clock Component Program Memory
3. Select a control from the scroll down menu for each Component.
10-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Maintenance
Component Status/Control
The table below states the possible conditions that can be displayed in the Status column of the
Main Components screen shown above.
Component Type
Status Code
Description
BSIS ­ RS232C
SC
Subcpu crash
BSIS ­ RS232C
SE
Subcpu error
Expansion Cabinet
CP
Cabinet power failure
Line/Station/Option PCB
CR
Card PCB set in Program 100, but not installed
Port (ISDN)
IL
ISDN loss of signal
Port (ISDN)
IF
ISDN frame sync failure
Port (ISDN)
IA
ISDN AIS
Port (ISDN-U)
UM
ISDN-U maintenance mode
Port (ISDN-U)
UE
ISDN-U Eoc maintenance mode
Port (ISDN-U)
UA
ISDN-U Act
Port (ISDN-U)
UB
ISDN-U aib
Port (T1)
TY
T1 Yellow alarm
Port (T1)
TB
T1 Blue alarm
Port (T1)
TF
T1 Frame sync. failure
Port (DKT)
DO
Digital Telephone not connected.
Control Scroll Down Menu
The Control scroll down menu appears in each of the Component Control/Status monitors (Main,
Ma
CTI Server, SMDI-VMS and Data Highways). This field is also called Make Busy or Program
inte
912.
nanc
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this field can make
them busy. The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts
e
replacements as well. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Note The slot to which your programming phone is connected cannot be set to Make Busy.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
10-9

---

Maintenance
Component Status/Control
10-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Tools and Profile
11
This chapter discusses Tools and Utilities to customize and manage your Strata CTX System.
Tools
The download tool provided in CTX WinAdmin enables you to download databases stored in
system memory into a WinAdmin folder named "Download". These downloaded databases can
then be viewed in your PC to check for errors or other anomalies. The downloaded commands are
saved as files on the C: drive or on whichever drive Strata CTX WinAdmin is installed, in this
path: CTX\WinAdmin\ctmc\ctm c_Local\DownLoad. They may be opened and viewed using
Excel, Word or some other application.
Download
Prerequisite Program: None
1. From the Program
Menu, click Tools >
Download
2. A list of all CTX
WinAdmin programs
is displayed as shown
to the right.
3. Click on the program
to be downloaded.
Selected programs are
highlighted in green
and the word Selected
Tools
is displayed to the right
as shown in the figure
an
to the right. The
d Profil
following buttons are
also available:
e
·
Clear All ­ click
this button to clear all previously selected files.
·
Select All ­ click this button to select all programs for downloading.
4. Click the Start Dowloading button in the top right corner of the display.
5. The system prompts you when the download is complete.
Strata DK I&M 11/99
11-1

---

Tools and Profile
Profile
Profile
The Programs included in the Profile menu enables you to change GUI display settings in CTX
WinAdmin and change the system IP Address.
Customize
Prerequisite Program: None
Customize the look and feel of CTX WinAdmin using this program.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Profile > Customize.
2. Select your customized
settings.
3. Click Save Changes.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ASP Idle Time
CTX WinAdmin is designed to automatically log off any inactive users after the time
set in this field.
Possible values: Default = 120, value in minutes
Back Ground Color
Select the background Color from the scroll down menu.
Possible values: Aqua, Yellow, Sky Blue, Light Sky Blue, Light Blue, Medium
Spring Green, Light Green, Powder Blue, Light Goldenrod Yellow
(default), Misty Rose, Lavender.
Group Name Color
Select the color in which to display the Group Name (see figure above).
Possible values: Black, White, Dim Grey (default), Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.
Label Color
Select the color with which to display the field name text.
Possible values: Black (default), White, Dim Grey, Red, Dark Red, Blue, Indigo,
Navy, Purple, Maroon, Teal, Fuchsin, Dark Green.
11-2
Strata DK I&M 11/99

---

Tools and Profile
Profile
User Management
Prerequisite Program: None
This program lets the administrator add or remove users to CTX WinAdmin.
1. From the Program Menu,
click Profile > Users
Management.
2. Enter User Name,
Password, Confirm
Password, and FAC
Group Level fields.
3. Click Save.
4. Enter the remaining
fields.
5. Click Add/Modify/
Remove.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter the User name. The initial user name is administrator.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Password
Enter password. The initial password is password.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Confirm Password
Repeat password entered in Password field.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
FAC Group Level
Select the FAC Group Level.
Possible values: Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 (default = No value.)
CTX Host Name
Enter CTX Host Name (name to identify host/equipment).
Tools
Possible values: Alpha characters.
an
CTX IP/Name
Enter the IP Address of the CTX host.
d Profil
Possible values: a.b.c.d.; a = 0~255, b = 0~255, c = 0~255, d = 0~255
Community Name
Enter the Community Name of the host.
e
Possible values: Alpha characters.
DialUp Number
Enter the telephone number for Dial Up access.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits
Confirm Community Name
Re-enter the Community Name.
Possible values: Alpha characters.
Strata DK I&M 11/99
11-3

---

Tools and Profile
Profile
11-4
Strata DK I&M 11/99

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
A
This appendix shows you how to install CTX WinAdmin in a Windows NT4 OS environment.
Refer to the Installation chapter for information on Hardware requirements before proceeding.
Important!
Some of the steps in this appendix require that you have certain patches/options -
available on the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM through executable files or via Internet
access. Therefore you must have Internet access to perform this entire installation.
Step 1: Install Windows NT 4.0 Workstation
Install Windows NT4 Workstation on your PC. When prompted, make sure the following are
checked:
·
This computer will participate on a network
·
Wired to the Network
·
At the Windows NT installation "Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server" prompt, respond
by clicking the Yes button.
Important!
The Windows Installation Wizard will require you to restart your PC. Upon restart,
you may get an error message that reads "At least one service has failed to start." If
you experience this error, see "Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation" on
page A-8 for details. You can continue your installation without resolving this error,
but the error must be resolved before "Install CTX WinAdmin" on page A-4.
Note If you are already running Windows NT 4.0, but do not have SP6a installed make sure RAS
is set up on your PC and proceed to "Install Windows NT 4.0 SP6a" on page A-1. If you are
currently running Windows NT 4.0 SP6a verify RAS setup and proceed to "Install Windows
NT Workstation Option Pack 4.0" on page A-3.
Step 2: Install Windows NT 4.0 SP6a
1. Place the WinAdmin CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2. From the Main Menu, select "Install CTX WinAdmin," then select "Windows NT 4.0".
3. Select "Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Wi
Insta
ndo
w
lla
s NT 4
tion
.0
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
A-1

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 3: Install/Set up RAS
Step 3: Install/Set up RAS
CTX WinAdmin requires Dial-Up Networking (DUN) which uses RAS services to connect
through a modem. Complete this procedure even if you do not have a modem.
Important!
Set up RAS whether you intend to connect to Strata CTX via modem or a LAN.
Make sure your COM ports are set up correctly even if you do not have a modem.
Install RAS
1. From the Windows Desktop, choose Start, Programs, Accessories, then Dial-Up Networking
(DUN).
2. Click Install. If RAS setup asks to invoke the Modem Installer, click Yes.
3. At the Install New Modem dialog box
·
If you have a modem, click Next and
follow the installation instructions.
·
If you do not have a modem, click the
"Don't detect my modem; I will select it
from a list" box, click Next and
continue.
4. From the modem selection dialog box,
choose "(Standard Modem Types)" under
Manufacturers and choose any modem
shown under Models.
5. Click Finish.
6. The Add RAS Device dialog box appears. Your modem's COM port and model should appear
in the RAS Capable Device field. Click OK
7. Click Continue and when prompted, restart your PC.
8. Re-apply Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Set up RAS
The following steps are necessary if you intend to connect your CTX WinAdmin PC to the Strata
CTX using the DUN Service.
1. From the Windows Desktop, choose Start, Programs, Accessories, then Dial-Up Networking.
2. Type the name "RemoteNhs1" for the phone book entry to identify your connection and click
Next.
3. Click in the "non-Windows NT server" radio button and click Next.
4. Enter the phone number for the RAS Server and Click Next.
5. Select Point-to-Point (PPP). Click Next.
6. Select None and click Next.
7. Enter an IP Address between 192.168.255.2 and 192.168.255.252 and click Next.
8. Click Next again and click Finish.
A-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 4: Add SNMP Services to Your Network Settings
Step 4: Add SNMP Services to Your Network
W
Settings
i
Ins
nd
ow
t
1. From the Windows NT Control Panel, double-
alla
s NT 4
click the Network icon. The Network dialog
tion
box is displayed.
.0
2. Click on the Services tab and click the Add
button.
3. In the Select Network Service dialog box
(shown right), scroll down and highlight SNMP
Service.
4. Click OK.
5. Load your Windows NT Workstation
CD-ROM and follow the install directions.
Step 5: Install and Set up Internet Explorer 5.5
If your PC does not have Internet Explorer, or you have and version earlier than version 5.5,
install/upgrade it.
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows NT 4.0".
2. Select "Internet Explorer 5.5" and follow the prompts to complete installation.
Step 6: Install Windows NT Workstation Option
Pack 4.0
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows NT 4.0".
2. Select "Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack" and to download the package from the Microsoft
website.
3. Follow the directions at the site to install the package.
Following your installation, a new icon named "Publish" will appear on your desktop. This is the
Personal Web Server icon that should not be activated at this time.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
A-3

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 7: Install WMI Packages
Step 7: Install WMI Packages
Install both the WMI Core Package and the WMI SNMP Package by following the directions
below. Install each package separately.
WMI Core Package
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows NT 4.0".
2. Select "WMI Core Package" to download the package from the Microsoft website.
3. Follow the directions at the site to install the package.
WMI SNMP Package
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows NT 4.0".
2. Select "WMI SNMP Package" to download the package from the Microsoft website.
3. Follow the directions at the site to install the package.
4. Re-apply Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Step 8: Install CTX WinAdmin
Important!
If you are experiencing the "At least one service has failed to start" error, correct the
error before proceeding (see "Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation" on
page A-8 for more details).
CTX WinAdmin is the main application program that enables you to program, maintain, and
upgrade your Strata CTX Digital Business Telephone System.
1. From the Main Menu of the CTX WinAdmin CD-ROM, select "Install CTX WinAdmin", then
select "Windows NT 4.0".
2. Select "Run Install" and follow the prompts.
A-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 9: Set Up Personal Web Tools
Step 9: Set Up Personal Web Tools
W
Before using CTX WinAdmin you need to create a Web site, using Personal Web Server.
i
Ins
nd
ow
talla
Important!
Perform this operation only once.
s NT 4
tion
1. Double-click on the Personal
.
Web Server Icon (see "Install
0
Windows NT Workstation Option
Pack 4.0" on page A-3).
The Personal Web Manager
dialog box appears (shown right).
2. Press the Stop Button.
3. Click on the Advanced icon to
create a virtual directory for your
web site.
The Advanced Options dialog
box appears.
4. Press the Add button. The Add
Directory dialog box appears.
5. Press the Browse button and browse to C:\Nhs\WinAdmin\Ctmc\Ctmc_Local. Make
sure Ctmc_Local is highlighted and click OK.
6. In Alias: enter Ctmc_Local.
7. Click OK.
8. Click on the Main icon and press the Start button.
CTX WinAdmin is now ready to connect to Strata CTX.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
A-5

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 10: Set up Private Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin
Step 10: Set up Private Network Settings for CTX
WinAdmin
CTX WinAdmin can communicate with Strata CTX from any location that provides modem, LAN
or WAN connections. You can connect your CTX WinAdmin PC with Strata CTX using an RJ45
crossover cable (see the Strata CTX I&M Manual for more details) to create a Private LAN
environment.
To establish a TCP/IP for Private Networking
1. From your CTX WinAdmin PC, choose Start, then
Control Panel.
2. Click Network. The Network dialog box appears.
3. Click the Protocol Tab.
4. Double-click TCP/IP Protocol. The TCP/IP
Protocol Properties dialog box is displayed (shown
right).
5. In the IP address field enter 192.168.255.251.
6. Enter 255.255.255.0. in the Subnet Mask
field.
7. Click OK twice.
8. Restart your PC.
To set up CTX WinAdmin for a LAN Network
Note If you do not know the values to enter in the
required fields, contact your System Administrator (the values shown are examples only).
You do not need to be connected to Strata CTX to perform this task.
1. Establish Communications with Strata CTX by following the directions in "Use Default
Auto-Programming to Start up" on page 3-1.
2. From the CTX WinAdmin Program Menu Bar select Operation/IP Configuration.
3. In TCP/IP Configuration (Program 916) enter the following:
·
IP Address ­ enter the IP address for your LAN (e.g., 159.119.6.35).
·
Subnet Mask ­ enter the Subnet Mask for your LAN (e.g., 255.255.0.0).
4. On the Toolbar, click submit. Your Private Network is disconnected and an operation failure
error message is displayed.
5. Close your CTX WinAdmin session.
6. Set up TCP/IP for CTX WinAdmin by following the directions in "To establish a TCP/IP for
Private Networking" above.
A-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 11: Verify Communications from a Command Prompt
Step 11: Verify Communications from a
W
Command Prompt
i
Ins
nd
ow
t
This ensures your PC and Strata CTX are communicating. To run this test, you need the IP address
alla
s NT 4
for the Strata CTX system you are communicating with. This information is available from the
tion
Network Administrator. If you do not have access to this information, you can run this test by
.
connecting your PC directly to Strata CTX's Network Interface jack using an RJ45 crossover
0
cable.
1. From the Windows Start Menu, choose Programs > Command Prompt. Use Programs >
Accessories > Command Prompt if you are using Windows 2000.
2. At the C:\> type ping followed by a
space and the Strata CTX IP address
(default = 192.168.255.251) as
shown in the example to the right.
3. If Strata CTX responds with four
replies and returns to the command
prompt (shown right) your PC and
Strata CTX are communicating.
4. Close the Command Prompt dialog
box.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
A-7

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 11: Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation
Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation
If you are installing Windows NT Workstation 4 without connecting to a live network server, your
PC may have given you the error message: "At least one service has failed to start." Use the
Windows NT Event Viewer to investigate the details of the error message.
To open and view Windows NT Event
Viewer
1. Choose Start, Programs, Administrative
Tools (Common), then Event Viewer.
The Event Viewer dialog box is displayed
(shown right). The services that could not
be started by Windows NT are listed with a
red Stop icon to the left of the entry.
2. Double-click on the Service Control
Manager entry with the red Stop icon on the
left.
The Event Detail dialog box is displayed. Look in
the Description box (shown right) to see the detail
of the problem encountered.
If the error looks like the example shown to the
right, you might be experiencing a problem with
the NIC on your PC. To resolve this problem,
proceed to the next section.
If you are experiencing other problems, contact
your PC manufacturer or Microsoft for assistance
with your installation.
3. Press the Close button to return to the Desktop.
Correcting NIC Recognition Errors
If the error described above applies to your particular
installation, it is very likely that Windows NT is not
recognizing your NIC. The problem could be related
to your NIC driver installed with Windows NT Workstation 4.0 setup. Try the following
resolutions:
Reinstall the Windows NT NIC Driver
1. Choose Start, Settings, then Control Panel.
2. Double-click on the Network icon. The Network settings are displayed.
3. Click on the Adapters Tab.
4. Your NIC driver installed by Windows NT should be highlighted.
5. Write down the Name of the driver.
6. Press the Remove button. The driver should be removed from the Network Adapters window.
7. Press the Add button. "Select Network Adapter" dialog box is displayed.
8. Scroll down the list to reinstall the adapter you just removed.
9. Click on the adapter and press OK.
A-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 11: Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation
10.Close the Network dialog box and restart Windows NT.
11. Upon restarting, the "At least one service has failed to start" error should not appear. If the error
still appears proceed to the next option.
Reinstall New NIC Driver
In some installations, certain PC manufacturer's provide Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) NIC drivers that are designed to function more efficiently than the generic drivers provided
by Windows NT.
For example, Toshiba uses Intel and 3Com NICs for a particular PC product category.
Toshiba.com features a convenient download site that enables a Toshiba PC owner to download
the OEM drivers from the Internet.
Verify the NIC in your PC and check with the PC manufacturer to see if they require any
special drivers for the NIC installed on your PC. If so, download the needed drivers and follow
the steps in "Reinstall the Windows NT NIC Driver" on page A-8. Instead of reinstalling the
Windows NT NIC driver, install the OEM driver.
Live Network Server Connection
Your installation may require a live network server connection for Windows NT to activate your
NIC. If you have access to a live network server, connect your PC with the standard RJ45 cable
and restart your PC. If you do not have access to a live network server, please contact your PC
manufacturer or Microsoft for technical support.
Important!
Even if you have access to a live network, restarting your PC may not resolve this
issue. If you still are experiencing problems after restarting, reinstall your Windows
NT or OEM NIC driver with your PC connected to a live network, using the instruc-
tions above.
Note If the problem still persists, reinstalling the entire software package with your PC connected
to a live network server (beginning with "Install Windows NT 4.0 Workstation" on
page A-1) should resolve this issue.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
A-9

---

Windows NT 4.0 Installation
Step 11: Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation
A-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Pr
Button Programming
B
ogram
ming
This appendix discusses the button programming interface provided with Strata CTX. Toshiba
highly recommends using Strata CTX WinAdmin to program your Strata CTX telephone system.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-1

---

Button Programming
Record Sheet Overview
Record Sheet Overview
Fill out the record sheets that are provided in chapters 5~8, then enter this data using Strata CTX
WinAdmin or a 20-button LCD digital (DKT) telephone (see Figure B-2). Strata CTX WinAdmin
software enables you to enter data from an on-site or off-site PC. Toshiba highly recommends this
easier method of programming.
Programming Section Layout
Each programming section within a chapter begins with the program's number and title, followed
by Prerequisite Program and Reference and record sheets. A program overview and additional
program information are given after the record sheets (see Figure B-1).
Note Some common program sections also include examples for your convenience.
Station
Assignment
Title
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 on page 61
Program Overview
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1.
Use the "DKT Parameters Record Sheet" on page 69 to record your desired DKT settings.
Brief description of
2.
From the Program
Menu, click Station >
Assignment.
program function(s).
3.
Click on the DKT
tab.
4.
Enter a DN number
in the Prime DN field
...or click one of the
following buttons:

List ­ view a
Prerequisite Program
summary list of
programmed
DKTs.
A list of any programs that need to

Extended List ­
view a detailed
be completed before completing
list of
programmed DKTs.
this program.

Copy ­ Enter a DN in the Prime DN field and click Copy to make a new DKT assignment
with settings copied from the DN entered into.
5.
Setup the DKT by adding values to the remaining fields.
6.
Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Station Type
Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Parameter Fields Table
Possible values:
Extension or Attendant (default = Extension)
02 Key Strip Pattern
Assign the Key strip pattern that is used by this DKT. See "Feature Button Patterns"
Gives description of program
on page 70 for pattern details.
Possible values:
Pattern 1, 2 or 3 (default = Pattern 1)
parameters with reference to
03 Key Strip Type
Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note
Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
FB buttons and Default
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.
Possible values:
10, 14 or 20 (default = 20)
Values.
04 Add on Modules
Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See "Key" on page 73.
Station
Possible values:
None, 1 unit, or 2 units (default = None)
Assignment
FB00 ­ Equipment, Station,
05 Tone 1st /Voice 1st
Select Tone First or Voice First signalling.
DKT Parameters Record Sheet
Possible values:
Tone or Voice (default = Tone)
Trunk, or Group numbers.
PDN: _____________________
Station Type
Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF
Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern
Not Used
Display Language
Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference
Adapter
Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules
Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer
Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First
Ringing Preference.
Mail Box Selection
OCA Type

Text Message Display
MIC Init. Value
FBnn ­ Programmable
H
66
andsfree MIC

BET
Call Hi A
stor DOC - PRELIMINAR
y Memory
Microph
Y & CONFIDENTIAL
one
Strata CTX Programming Manual 11/01
Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone
Speaker Mode Tones
parameters.
PDN: _____________________
Station Type
Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF
Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern
Not Used
Display Language
Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference
Adapter
Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules
Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer
Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First

Ringing Preference.
Mail Box Selection
OCA Type

Text Message Display
MIC Init. Value
Handsfree MIC

Call History Memory
Microphone
Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone
Speaker Mode Tones
PDN: _____________________
Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF
Ring Over Busy Cycles
Record Sheet
Key Strip Pattern
Not Used
Display Language
Attd. Overflow Dest.
Key Strip Type

Ringing Line Preference
Adapter
Trunk Test and Verify
Add-on Modules
Off-hook Preference

Blind Transfer
Auto Line Hold
Tone/Voice First

Ringing Preference.
Mail Box Selection
Provides a list of
OCA Type

Text Message Display
MIC Init. Value
Handsfree MIC

Call History Memory
Microphone
Handsfree Tone

DTMF Back Tone
Speaker Mode Tones
available features. The
PDN: _____________________
Station Type

Ext. Ring Repeat

Continuous DTMF
Ring Over Busy Cycles
Key Strip Pattern
Not Used
Display Language
Attd. Overflow Dest.
sheet is used to record
the assignment of
5865
features or the operation
of each program. Each
sheet provides space to
record data. This data
will be referred to when
programming the
system.
Figure B-1
System Record Sheet Sample
B-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Button Pr
Telephone Button Overview
Strata CTX programmers can access programming mode from any station with an LCD equipped
DKT telephone. A 20-button model as shown in Figure B-2 below is required to ensure full access
o
to all programming parameters. The telephone button programming interface allows limited
gram
programming capabilities over ranges of stations or trunks.
m
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU or PESU cannot be used to program Strata CTX.
ing
Figure B-2 shows the telephone button pad for the DKT3020-SD series digital telephone.
DKT3020-S, DKT3020-SD
LCD
(24 Characters by 2 lines)
Mode
Page
Scroll
Feature
DKT3010-S
DKT3010-SD
(FB10)
(FB20)
(FB
(FB09)
(FB19)
(FB
(FB08)
(FB18)
(FB
(FB07)
(FB17)
(FB
(FB06)
(FB16)
(FB
Q
Z
(FB05)
(FB15)
(FB
(FB04)
(FB14)
(FB
(FB03)
(FB13)
(FB
Msg
Spdial
Vol
(FB02)
(FB12)
(FB
Mic
Redial
Spkr
Cnf/Trn
Hold
(FB01)
(FB11)
(FB
5441
Figure B-2
DKT3000 Telephone Button Pad
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-3

---

Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Telephone Button Commands
Use the following buttons to execute the following commands.
· +ROG ­ Enter.
· 3DJH/6FUROO ­ Scroll up or down.
· 6SNU ­ This delimiter moves cursors between sub-parameter values.
· 9RO ­ Escape.
· 9RO ­ Back space for line editing.
·
+ROG ­ Cancel.
· ­ Use this button between values to specify a range of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001*1005 enables programming of stations 1001 through 1005).
· ­ Use this button between values to specify a set of objects to be programmed (e.g.,
1001**1005**1012 enables programming of stations 1001, 1005 and 1012).
· Off-hook ­ lift and replace the handset to immediately exit programming mode.
Keep the following in mind as you maneuver through Strata CTX programs.
· Default and/or current settings are displayed on the telephone LCD with an asterisk.
· Some Strata CTX Programs have more than 20 programmable parameters. To toggle from
parameters )%~)% and )%~)% press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button after entering
Program Mode.
· To view parameter options on your telephone LCD, press the desired )% button and press the
6FUROO or 3DJH button.
· Each parameter shows a number to the left (e.g., 2:DISABLE). Program the desired parameter
by pressing the number button (in this example ) that corresponds to your desired parameter.
· To enter data, use the number keys.
· To submit your program entry press +ROG. To confirm a submitted entry, press +ROG again.
· To exit a program press
+ROG.
· To enter the character in your data string press the 9RO and the button simultaneously. A
sign appears in your LCD. Press the button, then enter the remaining data.
· If you get an error code, press +ROG (twice) to continue programming. See "System Error
Codes" on page C-1 for error code details.
Programming Parameters
Programs can have between one and 40 programmable parameters, each represented by the )%QQ
buttons. The LEDs light up for each )%QQ button that features a programmable parameter. Each
parameter is programmed by entering values into the LCD from the telephone button pad.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press the appropriate )%QQ button.
2. Enter the appropriate value from the telephone button pad using the Parameter Fields tables
supplied with each program.
3. Press +ROG to submit.
4. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program.
B-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Telephone Button Overview
Programming Sub-parameters
Button Pr
Some commands enable programming of Sub-parameters to further refine Strata CTX settings.
Internet or Network IP addresses are entered using sub-parameter data. IP addresses are displayed
as four three digit values, or Octets, separated by "periods" (e.g., 192.168.255.253). Your
og
programming telephone's LCD is only capable of displaying the IP information three digits, or one
ram
Octet, at a time.
ming
For example, selecting )% in Program 916 displays the first Octet, 192, on the LCD. To view or
change the next Octet (in this example 168) in the IP Address, press the 6SNU button. Pressing
6SNU again, displays the following Octet (in this example 255).
The following is an example from Program 200, )% (see "Assignment" on page 5-1 for details).
)% is broken down into three sub-parameters as follows COS DAY1, COS DAY2 and COS
NIGHT.
1. At the SELECT PARAM prompt, press )%.
2. At the COS DAY1= prompt enter a value from one~32.
3. Press 6SNU.
4. At the COS DAY2= prompt enter a value from one~32.
5. Press 6SNU.
6. At the COS NIGHT= prompt enter a value from one~32.
7. Press +ROG to submit.
8. Press another )%QQ button to program more parameters
...or press +ROG again to program a new DN.
Note To change one of the sub-parameters, you must proceed through all three sub-parameters
before pressing +ROG. For example, to change the value of COS DAY1, you must change the
COS DAY1 value, then press 6SNU twice, and finally, press +ROG.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-5

---

Button Programming
Button Programming Examples
Button Programming Examples
The following examples show you how to use the Strata CTX button programming interface.
Toshiba highly recommends the use of Strata CTX WinAdmin to meet the demands of your
telephone system programming.
Suppose a customer needed to assign a DKT Station to a PDN. Based on the "Identify Program
Sequences" on page 3-10, you can immediately identify the Program numbers and sequence
required to complete this basic task. Login to the Button Programming Mode using the directions
on page B-8 and follow the steps below.
Program 100
Reference "Program 100" on page B-9. For this example, an eight station BDKU PCB is assigned
to Slot 01/Cabinet 01 (xxyy).
1. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
2. At the EQUIP= prompt enter (xxyy) and press +ROG.
"Program 100" on page B-9 tells us that a three digit PCB code (nnn) is required. From the
table, "PCB Codes" on page B-10, we can derive that the PCB code for a BDKU is "017."
Furthermore, the "Program 100" table shows us the button sequence required for programming
a BDKU in the fourth row of the table.
3. Press )%. Enter and press +ROG.
"Program 100" on page B-9 also informs us that an "n" value is required to complete the PCB
assignment. These "n" values are listed in the column titled "Value(s)." When you look in the
fourth row of the "Value(s)" column there are five "n" value choices. For this example, select
"2. 8 DKT no OCA."
4. Press )%. Enter and press +ROG twice.
5. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Program 200
Reference "Program 200" on page B-16 and "Basic/200 Station Data" on page 5-1. A DKT
assignment (DN = 1000) is made to Circuit 01, Slot 01, and Cabinet 01 for the BDKU Card
installed in Step 1 above. The
1. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
2. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
3. Press )%. At the EQUIP= prompt enter (xxyyzz) and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to select a DKT and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to select Extension as the Circuit Type and press +ROG.
For this example, only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding
to the next step.
6. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune this DKT assignment. See "Basic/200
Station Data" on page 5-1 for field descriptions and default values. If specific assignments
are not made, the system automatically assigns the default value.
B-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Button Programming Examples
Program 204
Button Pr
Reference "Program 204" on page B-19 and "204 DKT Parameters" on page 5-6. This program
enables you to setup the DKT parameters.
og
1. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
ram
2. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
ming
3. Press )%. Press to select a Extension and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to select Pattern 3 for this DKT and press +ROG.
For this example, we are using a 20-button DKT. There are three button patterns to choose from
(see "Feature Button Patterns" on page 5-10) for each type of digital telephone.
Only the above )%s need to be assigned. Press +ROG again before proceeding to the next step.
5. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Note Additional assignments can be made to fine tune DKT parameters. See "204 DKT
Parameters" on page 5-6 for field descriptions and default values. If specific assignments
are not made, the system automatically assigns the default value.
Program 208
Reference "Program 208" on page B-23 and "208 Station Timer Assignments" on page 5-20. This
program assigns timing parameters to Prime DNs.
1. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
2. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
3. Press )%. Press to set the number of ABR attempts and press +ROG.
4. Press )%. Press to set ABR to attempt redials in 60 second increments and press +ROG.
5. Press )%. Press to set the ABR Recall Timer and press +ROG.
6. Press )%. Press to set the Hold Recall Timer and press +ROG.
7. Press )%. Press to set the First Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
8. Press )%. Press to set the Second Interdigit Timer and press +ROG.
9. Press )%. Press to set the Ring Transfer No Answer Timer and press +ROG twice.
10.Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
Program 205
Reference "Program 205/213/215" on page B-20, "Feature/Button Code Sub-parameter
Assignments" on page B-21 and "Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table" on page B-22.
This program assigns features and parameters to the FB buttons on your DKT telephone. In this
example, the )% button on your DKT will be programmed to act as a GCO button.
1. At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
2. At the DN= prompt enter (n) and press +ROG.
3. Press )%. Enter to assign a GCO and press 6SNU.
To select the n1, n2, n3, n4 and n5 values required in "Program 205/213/215" on page B-20,
see "GCO" in the table titled "Feature/Button Code Sub-parameter Assignments" on
page B-21.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-7

---

Button Programming
Button Programming Procedures
4. Enter to assign a GCO number and press 6SNU.
5. Enter to assign a GCO index and press 6SNU.
6. Enter to enable immediate ringing for this GCO and press 6SNU.
7. Enter to assign a soft ring tone to this GCO and press 6SNU.
8. Enter to assign an Owner DN to this GCO number and press +ROG twice.
9. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
10.Press
+ROG again to exit Button Programming Mode.
Now that you are more familiar with the Strata CTX button programming interface, begin
programming your Strata CTX system beginning with Step 1 below.
Button Programming Procedures
Step 1: Enter Program Mode
Enter the button sequence displayed below to enter the Strata CTX670 programming interface
from a DKT station.
1. Log in by pressing: +ROG .
2. At the PASSWORD= prompt, enter your password. Default is .
3. press +ROG
Step 2: Enter Program Number
1. At the PROG= prompt enter the three digit program code (e.g., ) and press +ROG.
2. Programmable parameters are identified by the FB LEDs that are illuminated on the DKT. Go
to "Choose a Button Sequence" on page B-8 Press on the related )%QQ button to program a
parameter.
...or if there are no illuminated FB LEDs, continue to Step 3.
Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters
)% parameters designate a specific station, trunk, or circuit to be programmed. The )%
prompt (e.g., EQUIP=, DN=, INDEX=, etc.) appears automatically in the LCD screen.
1. At the )% prompt, enter the desired value using the telephone number pad.
2. Press +ROG.
Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence
Select the button sequences based on the programs required for programming the Strata CTX
from the Telephone. For 100~800 series programs, refer to page B-9~page B-44, and for the
900 series programs, refer to page B-52~page B-65.
B-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
100 Series Programs
Button Pr
Program 100
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Equipment Number
xxyy, Cyq.
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
o
yy =
Slot (01~10)
gram
Assign one of the following:
)%, nnn, +ROG, +ROG
nnn =
3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 000, 001, 002,
·
BIOU1 or BIOU2 Page/
m
MOH/BGM Relay Control.
005, 006, 009, 010, 011,
ing
·
RSTU or PSTU w/ 8
013.
standard phones.
·
All Analog CO Line OCBs.
·
BVPU with 4 VoIP circuits.
·
RBSU/RBSS with 4 BRI S/T
interface.
·
Delete PCB
Assign one of the following:
)%, nnn, +ROG, )%, n, +ROG, +ROG
nnn =
3 digit PCB Code. Valid
Codes: 003, 007, 014
·
PDKU with OCA toggle
·
RDTU or RPTU, T1 or PRI
n =
1.
None
Channel
2.
DKT no OCA or 8 Ch
3.
DKT w/ OCA or 16 Ch
4.
24 Ch (n/a for PDKU)
5.
30 Ch (n/a for PDKU)
Assign BDKU or BDKS
)%, nnn, +ROG, )%, n, +ROG, +ROG
nnn =
3 digit PCB Code Valid
Codes: 003, 007, 014
n =
1.
None
2.
8 DKT no OCA
3.
8 DKT w/ OCA
4.
16 DKT no OCA
5.
16 DKT w/ OCA
Assign RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/
)%, nnn, +ROG, )%, n, +ROG, +ROG
nnn =
3 digit PCB Code. Valid
RBSS.
Codes: 012, 013, 015,
016
n =
1.
None
2.
8 DKT no OCA
3.
8 DKT w/ OCA
4.
16 DKT no OCA
5.
16 DKT w/ OCA
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-9

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Table B-1
PCB Codes
Assigned
Assigned
Code
PCB Type
Circuit/Type
Code
PCB Type
Circuit/Type
Name
Name
No Card or
REMU
000
None
n/a
011
EMU
4 Circuits
Delete Card
BVPU
RCOU
4 Loop Lines
001
COU
012
BSU
RBSU
2 S/T interfaces
RGLU2
8 Gnd./Loop Lines
002
STU
RSTU2
8 Stations
013
BSU_BSS
RBSU+RBSS
4 S/T interfaces
PDKU2
8 Stations
003
DKU
014
PTU
RPTU
8, 16 and 24 PRI Lines
RWIU
8 or 32 wireless
004
Not used
n/a
n/a
015
BUU
RBUU
2 U Interfaces
005
8COU
RCIOU+RCOS
8 Loop CO Lines
016
BUU_BUS
RBUU+RBUS
4 U Interfaces
006
DDU
RDDU
4 DID Lines
017
NEW_DKU_8
BDKU1
8 Stations
8, 16, 24 and 30 channel
007
DTU
RDTU2
018
NEW_DKU_16
BDKU1+BDKS1
16 Stations
T1
4 Standard Ports
008
DSU
RDSU
019
IOU1
BIOU
Page/MOH/BGM Relay
4 Digital Ports
009
CIU
RCIU2
4 or 8 Circuit Caller ID
020
IOU2
BIOU
Page/MOH/BGM Relay
010
MCU
RMCU
2 or 4 E911 CAMA Lines
Program 102
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Assign Flexible Numbering
n, Cyq, A7 , nnn, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5-digit Flexible
Plan
Numbering Plan
nnn =
3 digit Feature Code
Assign Flexible Numbering
n, Cyq, A7 , nnn, Cyq, A7!, n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5-digit Flexible
OLG
Numbering Plan
nnn =
551
n1 =
0~128
Program 103
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Assign COS
n, Cyq, A7 ~A7"', n1, Cyq Cyq
n =
1~32 (COS Number)
3 digit Feature Code
n1 =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 104
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 ACB Callback Timer
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
5~180 sec.
02 ACB Cancel Recall Timer
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
5~180 sec.
03 Park Recall Timer
A7", n, Cyq
n =
10~600 sec.
04 Camp-on Timer
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
5~15 sec.
05 SMDR Valid Call Timer
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
0~180 sec.
06 Tandem Connection #1
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~3600 sec.
07 Tandem Connection #2
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
0~180 sec.
08 Call Forward No Ans Time
A7', n, Cyq
n =
1~180 sec.
09 Dial Input Timer
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
0~60 sec.
10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~60 sec.
11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~60 sec.
12 Door Unlock Timer
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
1~30 sec.
13 9+11 Judgement Timer
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1~30 sec.
14 Emergency Call Timer
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
10~180 sec.
15 ABR Busy Detection Time
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1~30 sec.
16 Lost Call Timer
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1~600 sec.
B-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Program 104
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
17 Lost Call Final Timer
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1~600 sec.
18 DTMF Tone Sending Time
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
1.
80 ms
2.
160 ms
o
19 Auto Disconnect
g
A7 (, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~60 sec.
ram
m
Program 105
Button Sequence
Value(s)
ing
01 Executive Override
A7 , n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
02 Station MOH
A7!, n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Quiet Tone
2.
External 1
3.
External 2
4.
External 3
5.
External 4
6.
External 5
7.
External 6
8.
External 7
9.
External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
03 Ringing Transfer
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
RBT
2.
MOH
04 Transfer Privacy
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
Not supported in Release 1
2.
Disable
05 Privacy Override
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
06 Credit Card Code
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 digits
07 Credit Card Digits
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1~66 digits
08 E911 Service
A7', n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
09 DR Override by SSD
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
10 Auto Station Release
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
11 ISDN SPID
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Operable
2.
Not Operable
12 Night Mode Relay
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
0~8
13 BGM External Paging
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
0~8
14 Lost Call Destination
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
15 COS Override Code
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1~8
16 Multi-Conference
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
17 Caller Number Display
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
18 Night Bell Relay
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
0~8
19 Display Preference
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1.
DNIS
2.
Caller ID
20 Transit Counter
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
21 Primary Clock
A7! , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-11

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Program 105
Button Sequence
Value(s)
22 Secondary Clock
A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Add
2.
Do not Add
23 Call History Prefix 1
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
24 Emergency Digits Sent
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
25 DP Make Ratio
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
DPMakeRatio33
2.
DPMakeRatio40
26 Call Button Jumping
A7!%, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 106
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Monday
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
02 Tuesday
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
03 Wednesday
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
04 Thursday
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
05 Friday
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
06 Saturday
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
07 Sunday
A7&, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Working Day 1
2.
Working Day 2
3.
Holiday
Program 107
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Sender PAD Device Number A7 , n, Cyq, A7!, n1, Cyq, A7", n2, Cyq,
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
Cyq
02 Receiver PAD Device
Up to 5 ASCII characters
Number
See Table 4-6 on page 4-24
n1 =
1.
6 dB Net Gain
03 PAD Loss
2.
3 dB Net Gain
n2 =
3.
0 dB
4.
3 dB Net Loss
5.
6 dB Net Loss
6.
9 dB Net Loss
7.
12 dB Net Loss
8.
15 dB Net Loss
Program 108
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 PAD Group Device Type
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
01 PAD Group Number
See Table 4-7 on page 4-25
0~32
n1 =
Program 109
Button Sequence
Value(s)
MOH/BGM #1 (BECU)
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
B-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Program 109
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
o
2.
Disable
gram
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
ming
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU)
A7', xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
A7(, xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)
A7 , xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)
A7 , xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)
A7 !, xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)
A7 ", xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
A7 #, xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)
A7 $, xxyyzz, Tx, n, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit ((01~31)
n =
1.
Connected
2.
Disconnected
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-13

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Program 110
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Select Password Level
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Unrestricted Admin
2.
Restricted Admin
01 Enter Password
n1 =
Up to 16 digits
Program 111
Button Sequence
Value(s)
DRL Number
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~16
01 Credit Card Calling
n1 =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 112
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Enter Calendar Day
YYYYMMDD, Cyq, A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
YYYY =
Year
MM =
Month
01 Working Day Type
DD =
Day
n =
1.
Delete
2.
Work Day
3.
Non-Working Day
4.
Holiday
Program 113
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Enter Day 1 Mode
A7 , hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
ya
02 Enter Day 2 Mode
A7!, hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
D
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
rk
Wo
9999 to delete
03 Enter Night Mode
A7", hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
04 Enter Day 1 Mode
A7#, hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
Day
05 Enter Day 2 Mode
A7$, hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
rko
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
W
9999 to delete
Non-
06 Enter Night Mode
A7%, hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
07 Enter Day 1 Mode
A7&, hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
08 Enter Day 2 Mode
A7', hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
Holiday
9999 to delete
09 Enter Night Mode
A7(, hhmm, Cyq, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
Start Time
mm =
minute (00~59)
9999 to delete
B-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
100 Series Programs
Button Pr
Program 114
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 PAD Conference Trunks
A7 , n, Cyq, A7!, n1, Cyq, A7", n2, Cyq,
n =
0~6
Cyq
o
02 PAD Conference Telephone
n1 =
0~8
g
see Table 4-8 on page 4-25
ram
03 PAD Conference Value
n2 =
1.
6 dB Net Gain
2.
3 dB Net Gain
m
3.
0 dB
ing
4.
3 dB Net Loss
5.
6 dB Net Loss
6.
9 dB Net Loss
7.
12 dB Net Loss
8.
15 dB Net Loss
Program 115
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Message Number
This Program can only be accessed through Strata
CTX WinAdmin. Please see "115 Advisory
01 Message
Messages" on page 4-32
02 Additional Digits
Program 116
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Command Number
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
3 digit Program Number
See Table 4-11 on page 4-33
Program 117
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prefix Number
A7 , n, Cyq, n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 digits
(Wild Cards n and x)
01 Digits to Follow
n1 =
1~64
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-15

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
200 Series Programs
Program 200
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
01 PDN Equipment Number
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 Station Type
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
DKT
2.
SLT
03 Circuit Type
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Extension
2.
Voice Mail
04 Station COS
A7#, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~32
·
Day1 COS
·
Day2 COS
·
Night COS
05 Station DRL
A7$, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 DRL
·
Day2 DRL
·
Night DRL
06 Station FRL
A7%, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 FRL
·
Day2 FRL
·
Night FRL
07 LCR Group
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
08 Station QPL
A7', n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 QPL
·
Day2 QPL
·
Night QPL
09 Station Name
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 9 ASCII characters
Strata CTX WinAdmin is required to program this
field.
10 Call Waiting Tone for
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
Off-hook Camp-on
2.
Singular
3.
Continuity
11 Dialing Progress Tone
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Dial Tone
2.
Entry Tone
3.
Quiet Tone
12 System Call Forward Group A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
0~32
Number
13 Call Pickup
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Permitted
2.
Group Only
3.
Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability ­ 3.1KHz
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Audio
2.
Speech
15 Display DN
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
16 Caller Emergency Service
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
Identification (CESID)
17 Emergency Call Group
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1~8
18 Remote CF DND Password
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 digits
19 VMID Code SMDI
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
22 Message Waiting to VM Port A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
23 Travelling COS Change
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
B-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 200
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
24 TGAC Override
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
25 Service Tones
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
o
2.
Disable
gram
26 Call Waiting and ROB Tone
A7!%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
ming
27 Name Display
A7!&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
28 Door Ovr DND
A7!', n, Cyq
n =
1.
Override
2.
Do not Override
29 Emergency Ringdown
A7!(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
30 Change System Speed Dial
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
31 Network COS
A7" , n, Cyq
n =
1~32
32 Auto OCA
A7"!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
33 Originate OCA
A7"", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
34 RSTU Supervision
A7"#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Received
2.
Not Received
35 Station Speed Dial Bins
A7"#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~100
Program 201
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Prime DN
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
Program 202
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Equipment
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 ISDN Channel Group
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~128
03 ISDN Protocol
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Nat'l ISDN
2.
ETSI
3.
TTC
4.
Nat'l ISDN - Nortel
04 Type Connection
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1~128
05 BRI Station COS
A7$, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~32
·
Day1 COS
·
Day2 COS
·
Night COS
06 BRI Station DRL
A7%, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 DRL
·
Day2 DRL
·
Night DRL
07 BRI Station FRL
A7&, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 FRL
·
Day2 FRL
·
Night FRL
08 LCR Group
A7', n, Cyq
n =
1~16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-17

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 202
Button Sequence
Value(s)
09 BRI Station QPL
A7(, n, Tx, n, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
·
Day1 QPL
·
Day2 QPL
·
Night QPL
10 Speech Capability
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
11 3.1 KHz Audio
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
12 7 KHz Audio
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
13 64Kbps Unrestricted
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
14 56Kbps Unrestricted
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
15 2 x 64Kbps Unrestricted
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
16 B Channel Selection
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Exclusive
2.
Preferred
3.
Any Channel
17 Idle B Channel Selection
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Forward Cyclic
2.
Backward Cyclic
3.
Forward Terminal
4.
Backward Terminal
18 Interdigit Timer 1
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
1~180
19 Interdigit Timer 2
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1~180
20 CESID
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
21 Number Voice Calls Allowed A7! , n, Cyq
n =
1.
One
2.
Two
22 Service Tone Permission
A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
23 TGAC Override
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
24 Change System Speed
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
25 Network COS
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1~32
26 Additional DN2
A7!%, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
27 Additional DN3
A7!&, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
28 Additional DN4
A7!', n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
29 Additional DN5
A7!(, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
30 Additional DN6
A7", n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
31 Additional DN7
A7" , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
32 Additional DN8
A7"!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
33 Auto OCA
A7"", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
34 Originate OCA
A7"", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 203
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 New PDN
n1 =
Up to 5 digits
B-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Button Pr
Program 204
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Station Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Extension
og
2.
Attendant
ram
02 Key Strip Pattern
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Pattern1
m
2.
Pattern2
ing
See "Feature Button Patterns" on page 5-10
3.
Pattern3
03 Key Strip Type
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1~24
04 Add on Modules
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
One Unit
3.
Two Units
05 Tone 1st /Voice 1st
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Tone
2.
Voice
06 OCA Type
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Handset
2.
Speaker
09 Handsfree MIC Setting
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
10 Handsfree Tone
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
12 Not Used
n =
13 Ringing Line Preference
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Idle
2.
Ringing
3.
Prime
4.
No Preference
5.
Prime and Idle
6.
Prime and Ringing
7.
Ringing and Idle
14 Off-hook Preference
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
1.
CO Key
2.
DN Key
15 Ringing Preference
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Longest
2.
Call Type
16 Text Message Display
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Immediate
2.
Not Immediate
17 Call History Memory
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
0~100
18 DTMF Back Tone
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
1.
Padded
2.
DTMF Tone
3.
No Tone
19 Continuous DTMF
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Continuous
2.
Not Continuous
20 Display Language
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
English
2.
British English
3.
French
21 Adapter
A7! , n, Cyq
n =
1.
BPCI
2.
BATI
22 Blind Transfer
A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Leave
2.
Separate
23 Mail Box Selection
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Auto Input
2.
Manual Input
24 MIC Init. Value
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
On
2.
Off
25 Microphone
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-19

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 204
Button Sequence
Value(s)
26 Speaker Mode Tones
A7!%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Yes
2.
No
27 Ring Over Busy Cycles
A7!&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Two Cycles
2.
Continuous
28 Attd Overflow Dest.
A7!', n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
29 Trunk Test and Verify
A7!(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Yes
2.
No
30 Auto Line Hold
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 205/213/215
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
Assign Feature Code
Select one of the following:
·
Assign a PDN (100)
A7 ~A7!, , Tx, n1, Tx, n2, Cyq, Cyq
n1 =
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
n2 =
1~4
·
Assign a PhDN (110)
A7 ~A7!, , Tx, n1, Tx, n2, Tx, n3,Ã
n1 =
PhDN (Up to 5 digits)
Cyq,ÃCyq
n2 =
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
n3 =
1~4
·
Assign a CO (120)
A7 ~A7!, !, Tx, n1, Tx, n2, Tx, n3,Ã
n1 =
0~264
Tx,Ãn4,ÃCyq,ÃCyq
n2 =
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
n3 =
1~4
n4 =
Up to 5 digits
·
Assign a GCO (130)
A7 ~A7!, ", Tx, n1, Tx, n2, Tx, n3,Ã
n1 =
0~128
Tx,Ãn4,ÃTx,Ãn5, Cyq,ÃCyq
n2 =
0~128
n3 =
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
n4 =
1~4
n5 =
Up to 5 digits
·
Assign a Pooled Line
A7 ~A7!, #, Tx, n1, Tx, n2, Tx, n3,Ã
n2 =
0~128
Button
Cyq,ÃCyq
n3 =
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
n4 =
1~4
·
Assign Door Lock Cancel
A7 ~A7!, $#, Tx, n, Cyq,ÃCyq
n =
1~10
(540)
·
Assign PhDN Message
A7 ~A7!, $%, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
Waiting (560)
·
Assign DSS Button (610)
A7 ~A7!, % , Tx, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
·
Assign Start Application
A7 ~A7!, (, Tx, n, Cyq
n =
0~99
(900)
B-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 205/213/215
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
·
Assign other Feature
A7 ~A7!, n, Cyq,ÃCyq
n =
3 digit Feature Code
Codes
See "Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code
Table" on page B-22 for details.
ogram
ming
Table B-2
Feature/Button Code Sub-parameter Assignments
Button
Feature
Sub-parameters
Description
Values
LCD Prompt
Code
PDN

Sub-parameter 1
Set ring pattern.
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
Sub-parameter 2
Set ring tone.
Enter a value of 1~4.
PITCH=
PhDN

Sub-parameter 1
Set PhDN.
Maximum 5 digit number.
DN=
Sub-parameter 2
Set ring pattern.
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
Sub-parameter 3
Set ring tone.
Enter a value of 1~4.
PITCH=
CO
!
Sub-parameter 1
Set CO number.
Enter a value of 0~264.
LINE NO=
Sub-parameter 2
Set ring pattern.
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
Sub-parameter 3
Set ring tone.
Enter a value of 1~4.
PITCH=
Sub-parameter 4
Owner DN.
Max 5 characters
OWNER DN=
GCO
"
Sub-parameter 1
Set GCO number.
Enter a value of 0~128.
GCO NO=
Sub-parameter 2
GCO Index.
Enter a value of 0~128.
INDEX=
Sub-parameter 3
Set ring pattern.
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
Sub-parameter 4
Set ring tone.
Enter a value of 1~4.
PITCH=
Sub-parameter 5
Owner DN.
Max 5 characters
OWNER DN=
Pooled Line
#
Sub-parameter 1
Pooled Line
Enter a value from 0~128.
POOL NO=
Button
number.
Sub-parameter 2
Set ring pattern.
1.
No Ring
2.
Immediate
3.
Delay 1
4.
Delay 2
Sub-parameter 3
Set ring tone.
Enter a value of 1~4.
PITCH
Door Lock
$#
Sub-parameter 1
Door Lock number.
Enter a value from 1~10.
NUMBER=
Cancel
PhDN
$%
Sub-parameter 1
Set PhDN number.
Max 5 characters.
PH DN=
Message
Waiting
DSS Button
%
Sub-parameter 1
DSS Button PDN
You cannot set the same
PDN=
number.
DN in DSS Key for one
station.
Start
(
Sub-parameter 1
Enter Application
Enter a value between
APL NO=
Application
number.
0~99.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-21

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Table B-3
Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table
Feature
Buttons Code
No Data/Delete Code

Account Code (Frequently used codes)
%%
Attendant Console Group Access Code
n/a
Automatic Attendant (The extension terminal having the simplified attendant console attribute
must set at least the ATT-ANSWER button)
·
Answer
&
·
Overflow
&(
Automatic Busy Redial
$
Automatic Callback Cancel
%
BGM
$"
Call Forward
·
All Call
"#
·
All Call (Remotely)
"$
·
Busy (External Call Activation)
"(
·
Busy CF-A (External Call Activation)
"'
·
No Answer
"%
·
No Answer (External Call Activation)
#
·
Busy No Answer
"&
·
Busy No Answer (External Call Activation)
#!
Call Handling
·
Cancel
!(
·
Release
!&
·
Destination Party
"
·
Release/Answer
!'
·
Privacy
"!
·
Privacy Release
""
·
Source Party
"
Call Park
·
System Orbit
&
Call Pickup
·
Incoming - Group Pickup
#"
·
Incoming - Directed Terminal Pickup
##
·
Incoming - Directed Group Pickup
#$
·
Incoming - Directed DN Pickup
#%
·
On hold - Local Retrieve
#(
·
On hold - Remote Retrieve
$
·
On hold - Outside line Retrieve
#'
·
On hold - Directed DN Retrieve
$
·
On hold and Incoming - Any External Call
#&
·
On hold and Incoming -
$!
Calling Number Identification (CLID)
$'
Dialing
·
Dial Out
%!
Do Not Disturb (DND)
'
B-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Table B-3
Flexible Button Assignment Feature Code Table (continued)
Button Pr
Feature
Buttons Code
Door Lock Cancel
$#
Flash - Short
!
ogram
Flash - Long
!
·
Attendant
'!
ming
·
Supervised
'"
Message Waiting
·
Phantom (PhDN) Message Waiting
$%
Night Transfer
%
Paging
·
Page All Groups
!!
·
Page Individual Groups
!"
·
Emergency Page - Individual Group
!$
·
Emergency Page - All Groups
!#
·
Answer Feature
$(
Position Busy
'
Programming Mode (Enter User Programming Mode)
%$
Single-touch Button
$&
Speed Dial (register Speed Dial)
!%
Start Application
(
Trunk Test
'
Voice Mail
·
Auto Voice Mail Playback
%#
·
Auto Voice Mail Record
%"
Notes
1.
T = Telephone type PCB
2.
L = CO line type PCB
3.
= Allowed T1/PRI slots
4.
The Base cabinet allows Speaker OCA and DIU data with PDKU in all slots; expansion
cabinets provide these features in slots S_01~S_06 only.
5.
Last available slot: B1C=S108, B2C=206, B3C=310, and B5C=510.
Program 206
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 PhDN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Owned PDN
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
02 Tone/Voice First
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Tone First
2.
Voice First
04 Display DN
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
05 System Call Forward
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
0~32
06 VM ID Code
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
09 Message Center
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
10 User Name
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
11 Display Name
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
Program 208
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
1~640
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-23

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 208
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 ABR Retry Count
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
5~20
02 ABR Retry Interval Timer
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
03 ABR Recall Timer
A7", n, Cyq
n =
Up to 9 digits
04 Hold Recall Timer
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
05 First Interdigit Timer
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
0~32
06 Second Interdigit Timer
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
07 Ring Xfer No Answer Timer
A7&, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 209
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Group Number
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Hunt Method
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
5~20
02 Pilot Number
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
30~180
04 Number to Display
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1~120
05 Pilot No. SCF
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1~180
06 Multiple DN Hunt
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1~180
07 DHG Auto Camp-on
A7&, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~600
Program 210
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Group 1~32 Group 32
A7 ~A7"!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
On
2.
Off
Program 213
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 PDN + ADM
See "Program 205/213/215" on page B-20 for details.
A7# in Program 204 must be set to 1 or 2 for ADM
settings to be valid.
Program 214
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 DSS 1~08 DSS 8
A7 ~A7', xxyyzz, Cyq, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
Program 215
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 DSS
See "Program 205/213/215" on page B-20 for details.
A7# in Program 204 must be set to 1 or 2 for ADM
settings to be valid.
Program 216
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
B-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
200 Series Programs
Program 216
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
Assign Emergency Ringdown
A7 , n, Cyq, A7!, n1, Cyq, A7", n2, Cyq,
n =
1.
Enable
Cyq
2.
Disable
n1 =
5~60
o
n2 =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
gram
ming
Program 217
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 Station Name
A7 , n, Cyq,
n =
Up to 9 digits
02 Dial Method
A7!, n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Dial Tone
2.
Entry Tone
3.
No Tone
03 System Call Forward
A7", n, Cyq,

n =
0~32
04 CF Password
A7#, n, Cyq,
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
05 Door Phone Override DND
A7$, n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
06 Emerg Call Group
A7%, n, Cyq,

n =
1~8
07 COS Override Code
A7&, n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
08 Display DN
A7', n, Cyq,
n =
Up to 5 digits
09 VMID Code SMDI
A7(, n, Cyq,
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
12 Name Display
A7 !, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
Program 218
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Hunt Group Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~640
01 Hunt Order
A7 , n, Cyq,
n =
1~560
02 DN
A7!, n, Cyq,
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
03 DN Set Type
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Modify
2.
Insert
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-25

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
300 Series Programs
Program 300
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Trunk Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~264
01 Trunk Equipment Number
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 ILG
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~128
03 OLG
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~128
04 Dial Mode
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Rotary Dial 10PPS
2.
Rotary Dial 20PPS
3.
DTMF
05 Signalling
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
DID
2.
Loop
3.
Ground
4.
Tie
5.
LP (Japan)
6.
SR (Japan)
7.
ACU (UK)
06 Start Method
A7%, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Immediate Start
2.
Timing Start
3.
Wink Start
07 Release Supervision
A7&, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Receive
2.
Do not Receive
08 Answer Supervision
A7', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Receive
2.
Do not Receive
09 Trunk Name
A7(, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 14 ASCII characters
10 External Ring Repeat
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Supply
2.
Do not Supply
11 DTMF Back Tone
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Padded
2.
DTMF Tone
3.
No Tone
12 Hunt Order
A7 !, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~264
999 = last position
Program 302
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Channel Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 RPTU Equipment No.
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 Protocol
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Nat'l ISDN
2.
ETSI
3.
TTC
4.
Nat'l ISDN - Nortel
5.
QSIG
03 ILG
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~128
04 OLG
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
05 Trunk ID Type
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Implicit
2.
Explicit
06 Trunk ID
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~126
07 D Ch Position
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1~24
B-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 302
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
08 ~ 13 Bearer Services:
A7'~A7 ", n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
·
Speech
see Table 6-7 on page 6-35.
·
3.1 KHz Audio
n1 =
1.
Channel Number
o
·
7 KHz Audio
2.
Slot Map
gram
·
Unrestr. 64K
·
Unrestr. 56K
ming
·
Unrestr. 2x64K
14 ~ 18 Bearer Services:
A7 #~A7 ', n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
·
2.
Disable
Unrestr. 384K
see Table 6-7 on page 6-35
·
Unrestr. 1536K
n1 =
1.
Channel Number B
·
Unrestr. 1920K
2.
Channel Number H
·
3.
Slot Map B
Restr. Digital
4.
Slot Map H
·
Video
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
Unrestricted
2.
Disable
see Table 6-7 on page 6-35
20 B Ch Selection Method
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Explicit
2.
Preferred
3.
Any Channel
21 B Ch Selection
A7! , n, Cyq
n1 =
1.
Forward Cyclic
2.
Backward Cyclic
see Table 6-7 on page 6-35 for more details
3.
Forward Terminal
4.
Backward Terminal
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Fixed1
2.
Fixed2
3.
Flexible
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Fixed1
2.
Fixed2
3.
Flexible
24 T-Wait Timer
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
25 RBT on Incoming Call
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
26 Network Mode
A7!%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Master
2.
Slave
27 Negotiation Priority
A7!&, n, Cyq
n =
3.
Side A
4.
Side B
Program 304
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Group Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Group Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Analog
2.
ISDN
02 Trunk Type
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
CO
2.
Tie
03 Service Type
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
DID
2.
DIT
04 Private Service Type
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
non-QSIG
2.
QSIG
05 GCO Key Number
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
06 Pooled Key Number
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
07 COS
A7&, n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~32
08 DRL
A7', n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~16
09 FRL
A7(, n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-27

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 304
Button Sequence
Value(s)
10 QPL
A7 , n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~16
11 DID Digits
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
0~7
12 Speech/3.1 KHz
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Audio
2.
Speech
13 Ringing Timer Delay 1
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
0~60 sec.
14 Ringing Timer Delay 2
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
0~60 sec.
15 Interdigit 1 Timer
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1~180 sec.
16 Interdigit 2 Timer
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1~180 sec.
17 Auto Camp-on
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1.
On
2.
Off
18 Calling Number ID
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
1.
User Provided
Number
2.
Network Provided
Number
19 Intercept
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
20 Send Dial Tone
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
21 TGAC Override
A7! , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
22 Network COS
A7!!, n, Cyq
n =
1~32
23 LCR Group
A7!", n, Cyq
n =
1~16
24 Change COS Override
A7!#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
Code
2.
Disable
25 Register Speed Dial Codes
A7!$, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
26 Originator Invoke OCA
A7!%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
27 Senderized Tone Mode
A7!&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Dial Tone
2.
Entry Tone
3.
Silence
Program 306
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Group Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Group Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Analog
2.
ISDN
02 Trunk Type
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
CO
2.
Tie
03 Private Service Type
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
DID
2.
DIT
04 GCO Key Number
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
non-QSIG
2.
QSIG
06 Pooled Key1 Number
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
07 Pooled Key2 Number
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
08 COS
A7', n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~32
09 FRL
A7(, n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~16
10 QPL
A7 , n, Tx, n,ÃTx, n,ÃCyq
n =
1~16
11 Speech/3.1 KHz
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Audio
2.
Speech
B-28
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 306
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
12 MOH Source
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Quiet Tone
2.
External 1
3.
External 2
4.
External 3
og
5.
External 4
ram
6.
External 5
m
7.
External 6
ing
8.
External 7
9.
External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
13 Account Code
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
14 Destination Restriction
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
15 Credit Card Calling
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
16 Send CESID
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
17 QSIG Sending Type
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Cut through
2.
Senderized
18 Network COS
A7 ', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~32
Program 308
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Trunk Equipment No.
xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
01 Auto Release
A7 , n, Cyq,
n =
1.
Disable
2.
Detect 95ms
3.
Detect 450ms
02 Short Flash
A7!, n, Cyq,

n =
0~15
03 Long Flash
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~30
04 Pause after Flash
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~5
05 Response Information
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~3000 (in increments of
50ms)
Program 309
Button Sequence
Value(s)
ILG Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 DID Number
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 ASCII characters
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-29

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 309
Button Sequence
Value(s)
02 MOH Source
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Quiet Tone
2.
External 1
3.
External 2
4.
External 3
5.
External 4
6.
External 5
7.
External 6
8.
External 7
9.
External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
03 GCO Key Group
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~128
04 Pool Key Group
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
05 Audio/Speech ­ Day 1
A7$~A7 , n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
1.
No Data
Destination~10 Data ­ Night
2.
Dialing Digits
Destination
3.
DISA
4.
Built-in modem
5.
Night Bell
n1 =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
11 DNIS VMID Code
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
12 DNIS Name
A7 !, n, CyqÃCyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
Program 310
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Trunk Equipment No.
xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
01 Day 1~ 03 Day 3
A7 ~A7", n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
1.
Disable
2.
Detect 95ms
3.
Detect 450ms
n1 =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
04 MOH Source
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Quiet Tone
2.
External 1
3.
External 2
4.
External 3
5.
External 4
6.
External 5
7.
External 6
8.
External 7
9.
External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
Program 311
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 DISA Enabled
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Necessary
2.
Unnecessary
B-30
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 311
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
02 DISA Code
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 15 ASCII characters
03 Response Timer
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~30
04 Idle Timer
A7#, n, CyqÃCyq
n =
0~60
ogram
ming
Program 313
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Trunk Number
n, Cyq,

n =
1~32
01 Signalling Method
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Nothing
2.
ANI-MCI
3.
ANI-Sprint
4.
CLASS
02 Signalling Contents
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
ANI and DNIS
2.
ANI
3.
DNIS
4.
DID
03 CLASS Equipment Position
A7", xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
Program 315
Button Sequence
Value(s)
T1 Equipment Location
yyzz, Cyq
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
01 Coding Format
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
PZC
3.
B8ZS
4.
ZCS
02 Frame Format
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
SF mode
3.
ESF mode
03 Time Slots
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
8 Time Slots
3.
16 Time Slots
4.
24 Time Slots
04 Receive PAD and 05 Send
A7# or A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
None
Pad
2.
Plus 6 dB
3.
Plus 3 dB
4.
Zero dB
5.
Minus 3 dB
6.
Minus 6 dB
7.
Minus 9 dB
8.
Minus 12 dB
9.
Minus 15 dB
Program 316
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Channel Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Equipment Number
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 Trunk ID
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
0~127
03 D Channel Provided
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
D-Channel
2.
SF mode
04 Backup D Channel Position
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-31

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 317
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Channel Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
see Table 6-6 on page 6-31 for details.
01 Equipment Number
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 Protocol
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
National ISDN
2.
ETSI
3.
TTC
4.
National ISDN (Nortel)
03 ILG
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~128
04 OLG
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz Audio
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz Audio
A7', n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
09 Bearer Svc - Unrestricted
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
64K
2.
Disable
10 Bearer Svc - Unrestricted
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
56K
2.
Disable
11 Bearer Svc - Unrestricted
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2x64K
2.
Disable
12 Outgoing B Ch Select
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Explicit
2.
Preferred
3.
Any Channel
13 B Ch Selection
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Forward Cyclic
2.
Backward Cyclic
3.
Forward Terminal
4.
Backward Terminal
14 Initialize Type
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
1.
User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID ON
2.
User Entry Of SPID
Auto SPID OFF
3.
Auto SPID
4.
None
15 Initialization Display
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
16 SPID #1
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 20 ASCII characters
17 SPID #2
A7 &, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 20 ASCII characters
18 T-Wait Timer
A7 ', n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
19 Voice Calls
A7 (, n, Cyq
n =
1.
One
2.
Two
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 ASCII characters
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
A7! , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 ASCII characters
Program 318
Button Sequence
Value(s)
ILG Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
No DID
2.
Not Determined
B-32
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 318
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
02 MOH Source
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Quiet Tone
2.
External 1
3.
External 2
4.
External 3
og
5.
External 4
ram
6.
External 5
m
7.
External 6
ing
8.
External 7
9.
External 8
10. External 9
11. External 10
12. External 11
13. External 12
14. External 13
15. External 14
16. External 15
03 GCO Destination
A7", n, Cyq
0~128
04 Pooled Line Group
A7#, n, Cyq
0~128
05 Audio Day1 ~ 10 Data Night
A7$~A7 , n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
1.
No Data
2.
Dialing Digits
3.
DISA
4.
Built-in modem
5.
Night Bell
n1 =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
11 VMID for DNIS No.
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
12 DNIS Name
A7 !, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
Program 319
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Day1 Destination
A7 ~A7", n, Tx, n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
Dialing Digits
02 Day2 Destination
3.
Night Bell
03 Night Destination
n1 =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
Program 320
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 RPTU Equipment No.
xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
01~23 B Channel
A7 ~A7!", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
see Table 6-8 on page 6-40 for details.
Program 321
Button Sequence
Value(s)
OLG Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Default Number
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 digits
02 Number Prefix
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 digits
03 Number Verification
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
04 Default Number 2
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 digits
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-33

---

Button Programming
300 Series Programs
Program 322
Button Sequence
Value(s)
OLG Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Destination Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Prime DN (0~99999)
2.
Group CO (1~128)
3.
Pooled Line Group
(1~128)
02 Destination
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
03 DID Number
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 ASCII characters
Program 323
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Channel Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Index
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~128
02 Type of Service
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
No Data
2.
POTS
3.
FX
4.
Tie line (Enbloc)
5.
Tie line (Cut throuogh)
6.
Intra LATA Out WATS
7.
Banded Out WATS
8.
Inter LATA Out WATS
9.
INWATS
03 Facility Code
A7", n, Cyq
n =
00~31
04 Service Parameter
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
05 Network ID
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
3~4 digits
06 ILG
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
07 OLG
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
0~128
08 Min Calls Zone 1
A7', n, Cyq
n =
0~47
09 Max Calls Zone 1
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
0~47
10 Min Calls Zone 2
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
0~47
11 Max Calls Zone 2
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
0~47
12 Min Calls Zone 3
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
0~47
13 Max Calls Zone 3
A7 ", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~47
Program 324
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Channel Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Start Zone 1
A7 , hhmm, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
mm =
minute (00~59)
02 Start Zone 2
A7!, hhmm, Cyq
9999 to delete
03 Start Zone 3
A7", hhmm, Cyq, Cyq
B-34
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
400 Series Programs
Button Pr
400 Series Programs
Program 400
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Day/Night Mode
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Day 1
o
2.
Day 2
gram
3.
Night
m
02 Called Number Index
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~4
ing
03 Emergency Call Destination
A7", n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
04 Action
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Modify
2.
Insert
Program 404
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Attendant Group Member
n, Cyq
n =
1~8
01 Call Distribution Method
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Most Idle First
2.
Next Available First
3.
Broadcast
02 Alternate Attendant
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
Destination
03 Overflow Time
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~180
04 Group Overflow Destination
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
05 VMID Code SMDI
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 10 ASCII characters
08 ICI1~17 ICI10
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~128
·
ILG1
·
ILG2
·
ILG3
·
ILG4
500 Series Programs
Program 500
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 SCF Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~32
01 Call Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
CO Loop Grd
2.
DID
3.
Tie
4.
Ring Transfer
5.
Internal
02 Period
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Day
2.
Off Day2
3.
Night
03 Telephone Status
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Busy
2.
Off No Answer
3.
Busy No Answer
4.
DND
04 Destination 1
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
05 Destination 2
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
Program 501
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Speed Dial Bin
n, Cyq
n =
000~799
01 Number
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 digits
02 Name
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 ASCII characters
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-35

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Program 502
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Prime DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
01 PG01~16 PG16
A7 ~A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
On
2.
Off
17 All Paging Group
A7 &, n, Cyq
18 All Emergency Page Group
A7 ', n, Cyq, Cyq
Program 503
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Zone Relay Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~8
·
BIOU1 = 1~4
·
BIOU2 = 5~8
01 PG01~16 PG16
A7 ~A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
1.
On
2.
Off
17 All Page Group
A7 &, n, Cyq
18 All Emergency Page Group
A7 ', n, Cyq
19 BGM Mute Relay
A7 ', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~8
·
BIOU1 = 1~4
·
BIOU2 = 5~8
Program 504
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 SCF Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~32
01 Telephone Status
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
No Data
2.
Busy
3.
No Ans
4.
Busy No Ans
5.
DND
Program 506
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Account Code
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 15 ASCII characters
01 Verified Flag
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Set
2.
No Set
02 DRL
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
0~16
03 FRL
A7", n, Cyq
n =
0~16
04 Network COS
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~32
Program 507
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Door Phone Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~24
01 DDCB Equipment No.
A7 , xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
02 Tenant Number
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
0~8
04 Ring Duration
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
3~30
05 LCD Name Display
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
06 Day1 Destination
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
07 Day2 Destination
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
08 Night Destination
A7', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
B-36
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Button Pr
Program 508
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Door Lock Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~10
01 Interface Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
og
2.
BIOU
ram
3.
DDCB
m
02 BIOU Relay Number
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
0~8
ing
03 DDCB Equipment
A7", xxyyzz, Cyq
xx =
Cabinet (01~07)
yy =
Slot (01~10)
zz =
Circuit (01~08)
Program 509
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Override COS
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~32
02 Override DRL
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
03 Override FRL
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1~16
04 Override QPL
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~16
Program 510
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 COS Override Index
n, Cyq
n =
1~16
01 COS Override Code
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 ASCII characters
02 Set COS
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~32
03 Set DRL
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1~16
04 Set FRL
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
05 Set QPL
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1~16
06 Set Network COS
A7%, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~32
Program 512
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Caller ID Field
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
02 B Record for Abandoned
A7!, n, Cyq
Call
03 ANI
A7", n, Cyq
04 Authorization Code
A7#, n, Cyq
05 End-of-Record CR
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
Program 513
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 ILG
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Generate SMDR Records
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
02 DNIS Field Indication
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
03 B Record for Incoming Call
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
04 Abandoned Call Record
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
Output
2.
Disable
05 Display Transferred Call
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Source
Records
2.
Destination
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-37

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Program 514
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 OLG
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 SMDR Record Display
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
02 Outgoing Records
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
03 Charged Station
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Source
2.
Destination
Program 515
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 BIOU (1 or 2)
n, Cyq
n =
1 or 2
01 BIOU Relay 1 or 5
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Not Use
2.
Ext Paging
02 BIOU Relay 2 or 6
A7!, n, Cyq
3.
Night Bell
03 BIOU Relay 3 or 7
A7", n, Cyq
4.
Night Relay
04 BIOU Relay 4 or 8
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
5.
Door Lock
Program 516
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 PDN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
01 Speed Dial Bin
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
00~99
02 Number
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
03 Name
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 ASCII characters
Program 520
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Local Area Code
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
3 digits
02 Local Route Plan
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~64
Program 521
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Analysis Digits
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 11 ASCII characters
Wild Card uses and Y
01 Route Plan Number
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
0~64
Program 522
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Exception Route Plan Table
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 11 ASCII characters
Wild Card uses and Y
01 Exception Route Plan
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~64
Program 523
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Route Plan
n, Cyq
n =
1~64
01 Type of Day
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Weekday
2.
Weekend
3.
Holiday
B-38
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Program 523
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
02 LCR Time of Day
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Time Zone1
2.
Time Zone2
3.
Night
o
03 Station LCR Group
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1~16
gram
04 Route Choice Table
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~128
ming
Program 524
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Route Choice Table
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Route Definition 1
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~128
02 Route Definition 2
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~128
03 Route Definition 3
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1~128
04 Route Definition 4
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1~128
05 Route Definition 5
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
1~128
06 Route Definition 6
A7%, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~128
Program 525
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Route Definition
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 OLG Number
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~128
02 Digit Mod Index
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~128
Program 526
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Digit Modification Index
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Delete Digits
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~10
02 Add Leading Digits
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 23 ASCII characters
03 Add Trailing
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 23 ASCII characters
Program 527
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Holiday
YYYYMMDD, Cyq, A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
YYYY =
Year
MM =
Month
01 Add/Delete
DD =
Day
n =
1.
Add
2.
Delete
Program 528
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Monday~07 Sunday
A7 ~A7&, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1.
Weekday
2.
Weekend
3.
Holiday
Program 529
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Route Plan Time Zone
n, Cyq
n =
1~64
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-39

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Program 529
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Day Type for Time Zone
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Weekday
2.
Weekend
3.
Holiday
02 Time Zone
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Zone1
2.
Zone2
3.
Zone3
03 Time Zone Start Time
A7", hhmm, Cyq, Cyq
hh =
hour (00~23)
mm =
minute (00~59)
Program 530
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Screening Dial String
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 ASCII characters
01 Add String to Table
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Add
2.
Delete
02 DR Action
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Bypass
2.
Skip and Apply
03 LCR Action
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Apply
2.
Skip and Apply
04 Digit Modification Action
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Apply
2.
Retain
3.
Discard
05 Skip Length
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~5
Program 531
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 OLG
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
01 Behind Centrex Access
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 ASCII characters
Code
02 Add or Delete Code
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Add
2.
Delete
03 DR Action for Centrex
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Bypass
2.
Skip and Apply
04 Skip Length
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~8
05 Pause Insertion
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~10
Program 532
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 DRL Number
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 digits
01 Table Type
n1 =
1.
Allow
2.
Deny
Program 533
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 DRL Number
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, n2, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 digits
01 Dial String
n1 =
1.
Allow
2.
Deny
02 Add or Delete
n2 =
1.
Add
2.
Delete
B-40
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Button Pr
Program 534
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 DRL Number
n, Cyq, A7 , n1, Cyq, n2, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 digits
n1 =
Up to 11 digits
o
01 Dial String
gram
02 Add/Delete
n2 =
1.
Add
2.
Delete
ming
Program 540
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Pilot DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 8 ASCII characters
01 After Shift Type
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
No Data
2.
Dialing Digits
3.
Night Bell
02 After Shift Destination
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 32 ASCII characters
03 Voice Mail ID
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 16 ASCII characters
Program 550
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Emergency Call Group
n, Cyq
n =
1~8
Number
01 OLG1~08 OLG8
A7 ~A7', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Expanded = 1~128
Basic = 1~47
Program 570
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Verified Digit Length
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
4~15
02 Registered Digit Length
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
4~15
Program 571
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Exception Number 1
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 digits
02 Exception Number 2
A7!, n, Cyq
03 Exception Number 3
A7", n, Cyq
04 Exception Number 4
A7#, n, Cyq, Cyq
Program 576
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Tenant Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~8
01 Page Group Number
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~16
Program 577
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Ckt Type/Number
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 digits
01 Prime DN
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 digits
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-41

---

Button Programming
500 Series Programs
Program 579
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 VM ID to DID/DNIS
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Before Answer
Association
2.
Before and After
02 Cancellation Method for VM A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Auto and Access
MW
Code Cancel
2.
Access Code Cancel
03 Message Desk Number
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
04 Output of CLASS, ANI and
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
DNIS
2.
Disable
05 Calling Number Digits Sent
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
2~10
to VM
06 Blank Digits Sent to VM
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
1.
1985
2.
1991
07 Auto Cancel of VM and MW
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
08 DTMF Duration
A7', n, Cyq
n =
1.
80 ms
2.
160 ms
09 LCD Control of Voice Mail
A7(, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
10 Central VM Callback
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 ASCII characters
11 CFWD All Call Record
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
12 CFWD Busy Record
A7 !, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
13 CFWD No Answer Record
A7 ", n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
14 Direct Call
A7 #, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
15 Retrieve Messages
A7 $, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
16 Voice Main DN
A7 %, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 7 ASCII characters
17 Length of VM ID
A7 &, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~10
Program 580
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 VM Port DN
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 5 ASCII characters
01 Control Method
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Inband
2.
SMDI
02 Send A/D Tone
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
03 Send B Tone
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
B Tone
2.
No Tone
3.
B Tone and Extension
Number
04 End-to-end
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
B-42
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
600 Series Programs
Button Pr
600 Series Programs
Program 650
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 OLG Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~128
og
01 Behind Centrex
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
ram
2.
Disable
m
02 Assume 9
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
ing
2.
Disable
03 Pause Timer
A7", n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~5
Program 651
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Node ID
n, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
01 Pvt Ntwk Route Choice
A7 , n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~64, 0 = delete
Table Number
Program 653
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Private Route Choice Table
n, Cyq
n =
1~64, 0 = delete
Number
01 Route Definition Table~06
A7 ~A7%, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~64, 0 = delete
Route Definition Table
Program 654
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Private Network Route
n, Cyq
n =
1~64
Definition
01 OLG
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~128 for Strata CTX670
1~32 for Strata CTX100
0 = delete
02 Digit Modification Table
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~64, 0 = delete
Program 655
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Private Digit Modification
n, Cyq
n =
1~64
Table
01 Deleted Digits
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~10, 0 = delete
02 Insert Leading Digits
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 23 digits
Program 656
Button Sequence
Value(s)
01 Primary Node ID
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
02 Primary Overlap Code
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
03 Node ID 2
A7", n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
Overlap Code 2
n1 =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
04 Node ID 3
A7#, n, Tx, n1, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
Overlap Code 3
n1 =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
05 Node ID 4
A7$, n, Tx, n1, Cyq, Cyq
n =
Up to 6 ASCII characters
Overlap Code 4
n1 =
Up to 4 ASCII characters
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-43

---

Button Programming
800 Series Programs
Program 657
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Network COS
n, Cyq
n =
1~32
01 Local COS
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~32
02 Off-hook Call Announce
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Enable
2.
Disable
03 System Speed Dial
A7", n, Cyq
04 COS Override
A7#, n, Cyq
05 TGAC Override
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
Program 658/659/660
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Type
n, Cyq
n =
1.
Outbound
2.
Inbound
Network DRL/FRL/QPL
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1~16
Local DRL/FRL/QPL
A7!, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
1~16
800 Series Programs
Program 801
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 LAN Port Number
n, Cyq
n =
1~9
01 Protocol
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
TCP
2.
UDP
02 PC Operation Type
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
Server
2.
Client
03 Data Flow
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
Synchronization
2.
Asynchronization
04 Server Port Number
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
0~65535
05 Client IP Address
A7$, n, Cyq
n =
0~255
06 Client Port Number
A7%, n, Cyq
n =
0~65535
07 Read Retry Number
A7&, n, Cyq
n =
0~10
08 Write Retry Number
A7', n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~10
Program 803
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 Logical Device Number
n, Cyq
n =
100 = SMDR
300 or 301 = SMDI
see Table 4-9 on page 4-30
200~208 = CTI LAN
Devices of PCs
01 Device Connection
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
LAN
3.
RS-232
02 Device Port Number
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1~4 (for RS-232)
1~9 (for LAN)
Program 804
Button Sequence
Value(s)
00 BSIS Port
n, Cyq
n =
1~4
B-44
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
800 Series Programs
Program 804
Button Sequence
Value(s)
Button Pr
01 Port Speed
A7 , n, Cyq
n =
1.
300
2.
1200
3.
2400
4.
4800
og
5.
9600
ram
6.
19200
m
7.
38400
ing
8.
57600
02 Port Parity
A7!, n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
Even
3.
Odd
03 Data Bits
A7", n, Cyq
n =
1.
7 Bits
2.
8 Bits
04 Flow Control
A7#, n, Cyq
n =
1.
None
2.
Flow
05 Wait Timer
A7$, n, Cyq, Cyq
n =
0~255
Note See next section for "900 Series Programs" on page B-52.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-45

---

Button Programming
Maintenance Procedures
Maintenance Procedures
This section provides Strata CTX maintenance procedures and program commands (900 series)
that can be activated from the program telephone.
SmartMedia Card
The SmartMedia card is a small memory card that is used in digital cameras, MP3 players etc. It is
available in most retail stores that sell digital cameras, personal computers supplies, etc. The
capacities of standard SmartMedia cards are 32MB, 64MB and 128MB. 32MB or 64MB must be
used for Strata CTX maintenance functions.
Note The Strata CTX does not use Compact Flash or other similar types of small storage devices.
Functions
A SmartMedia Card(s) is required for most of the important Strata CTX maintenance functions
such as:
· Saving (Backup) and re-loading (Restore) the programmed database of a particular Strata CTX
system.
· Saving Event trace data files for troubleshooting problems.
· Updating or upgrading the Strata CTX operating software version.
Administration and use
· To do a basic format and administer SmartMedia card files, a personal computer and
SmartMedia card read/writer is required. SmartMedia card read/writers are available in most
computer supply retail stores. They come with USB, PCI, floppy disk, and other types of PC
interfaces.
· When the SmartMedia card is used to perform one of its functions, it is installed in the
SmartMedia socket of the Strata CTX processor. The processor has a SmartMedia LED that
indicates SmartMedia card activity. The SmartMedia LED is located directly above (Strata
CTX 100) or directly below (Strata CTX 670) the processor Heartbeat LED.
· A new SmartMedia card must first be formatted using the personal computer SmartMedia read/
writer ­ this is a basic format. It is then formatted for Strata CTX operation by installing it into
the Strata CTX processor SmartMedia card socket and issuing the Format command (program
908). The Strata CTX format will create five special directories. These directories and how to
use them are explained in the maintenance procedures and 900 series program commands that
follow.
Data Backup
1. Format the SmartMedia using "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59 (Program 908).
2. Insert the formatted SmartMedia into Strata CTX.
3. Backup data using "Data Backup" on page B-60 (Program 910). LED Indicators should show
the following:
· )%~)% solid red light.
· )% intermittent green.
4. Press )% and choose Backup by pressing on the telephone button pad.
B-46
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Maintenance Procedures
5. Press +ROG. Backup starts. The LED indicator for )% consistently blinks green during
Button Pr
backup.
Note
Do not press +ROG while backup is being performed.
o
Backup for programmed data starts.
gram
6. When Backup is complete press twice.
ming
Backup Progress Indicator
You can monitor backup progress by pressing the )% or )% buttons as follows. See "Data
Backup" on page B-60 for more details.
If the value displayed in the LCD is increasing each time )% is pressed, the backup is
proceeding successfully.
When the value displayed in the LCD for )% and )% are the same, the backup process is
complete.
In addition the LED indicator for )% returns to an intermittent green to indicate backup
completion.
Backup Completion Indicator
You can verify completion of the backup by doing one of the following:
· Press )%. If the LCD displays *1:ALL_OK the backup was successful.
· When the value displayed in the LCD for )% and )% are the same, the backup process is
complete.
· The LED indicator for )% returns to an intermittent green to indicate backup completion.
Use the SmartMedia Read/Write to read SmartMedia data. Verify completion of the back up by
viewing the default.dat file in the Progdata folder. If default.dat's file size is greater than
zero, the backup was completed successfully.
Restoring Programmed Data
To restore data from a backup performed onto SmartMedia, follow the directions below:
1. Insert the SmartMedia card that has the system's default.dat file (under the PROGDATA folder)
into the Strata CTX SmartMedia slot.
2. Run "System Initialize" on page B-52 (Program 900).
Restoring data takes anywhere from 10 minutes to one hour for completion, depending on the size
of the database (default.dat file). When the programming telephone LCD becomes active, enter the
programming mode and attempt to enter your password. Restore is complete if the system accepts
the password and enables you to enter programming mode.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-47

---

Button Programming
Local Update
Local Update
Strata CTX100 Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed
data. The new software is first loaded on the SmartMedia card of the Strata CTX processor. It is
then transferred to the Strata CTX processor flash RAM. The Strata CTX programmed data is then
restored.
CAUTION!
This operation will take the system out of service.
1. Prepare a SmartMedia card that contains a backup of the Strata CTX programmed data.
· Backup the customer database onto the SmartMedia card using the Backup Data procedure.
This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory to the
SmartMedia card (see proceeding Data Backup procedure).
· Pull out the SmartMedia card and label it "Strata CTX backup data."
2. Prepare another SmartMedia card that contains the new Strata CTX software file used to update
the system software.
· Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba.
· On SmartMedia card, permit write operation (remove silver write protect seal).
· If using a Strata CTX formatted SmartMedia card, install SmartMedia card into a PC
SmartMedia reader/writer, make sure the PROGDATA folder is empty.
Note If the PROGDATA folder contains the default.dat file, move it to a safe place. The
default.dat is the Strata CTX Programmed data.
· Insert the SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the
Forced Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program
908.
· Install SmartMedia card into a PC SmartMedia reader/writer and copy the new Strata CTX
software file named "nhs.prg" into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
· Create the SmartMedia Card Volume label CTXMXX, where XX is the Strata CTX new
software version. Do not use PRGUPDATE as the volume label.
· Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it "CTXMXX."
3. Start Update procedure.
· Insert the SmartMedia card labeled CTXMXX into the Strata CTX processor SmartMedia
socket.
· From the programming telephone enter Program 911, and press +ROG. Press FB01 and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROG. See "Program Update" on page B-62.
· FB07-LED indicates the status of the update process.
·
After a few seconds it will be flashing green. This indicates that update is in progress.
·
Flashing Red indicates an Error. Check the Error Code Table on the next page.
· You can check update data block status using FB02 (Total) and FB03 (Copied) at any time.
B-48
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Local Update
· After a few minutes the Strata CTX will begin to upload the software from the SmartMedia
Button Pr
card to the processor flash RAM causing the following:
·
The Strata CTX stops normal processing and all telephone LCDs go blank.
·
The processor Heartbeat LED is on steady red.
ogram
·
The processor SmartMedia LED turns on periodically.
m
·
The above will last about five to 10 minutes.
ing
· When the update is complete the system begins to operate normally with default data.
· Use Program 901, "Display Version" on page B-53 to check that the new software version
displays.
· Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled CTXMXX (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg file).
4. Restart and Restore Backup data.
· Insert the SmartMedia labeled Strata CTX backup data which you previously made at the
start of this procedure. This includes PROGDATA/default.dat file.
· From the programming telephone enter Program 900. Press FB01 and dial 1 (ALL DATA
CLEAR) and then press Hold (twice). The Strata CTX will restart on the new software and
restore the backed up program data.
· Confirm that the software is updated and the backup data is restored before pulling out the
SmartMedia card.
·
SmartMedia LED should be off.
·
Try to login to the Programming Mode from digital telephone. (If update/Restore is
finished, you can login).
· After confirming that Update and Restore are complete, pull out the SmartMedia labeled
Strata CTX backup data.
· From the programming telephone check the Strata CTX version number using Program 901.
Note Error codes may display by pressing both FB02 or FB03.
The table below shows the error codes that may appear during the update/backup process.
Error Codes
Error descriptions
9000
SmartMedia does not exist
9001
SmartMedia is abnormal
9002
Invalid volume label
9003
Cannot use Write Protected Media
9004
Not enough disk space
9005
Program file does not exist
9006
UPD License not permitted
9007
File error
9008
EEPROM error
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-49

---

Button Programming
Local Update
Strata CTX670 Update
The Update process is used to change the Strata CTX software version and restore programmed
data. The new software is first loaded on the standby side of the Strata CTX processor flash RAM.
It is then transferred to the active side of the Strata CTX processor flash RAM while the original
software version is transferred to the standby side for a trial run. After swapping the software
version between Standby and Active, the Strata CTX restores the programmed data. If the system
functions properly the trial operation can be set to normal operation.
CAUTION!
This operation will take the system out of service
1. Prepare a SmartMedia card that contains a backup of the Strata CTX programmed data.
· Backup the customer database onto the SmartMedia card using the "Data Backup" on
page B-46.This operation writes the default.dat file under the PROGDATA directory on
the SmartMedia card.
· Pull out the SmartMedia card and label it "Strata CTX backup data."
2. Prepare a SmartMedia card that contains the new Strata CTX software file used to update the
system software.
· Obtain the Strata CTX operating software file (nhs.prg) from Toshiba.
· On the SmartMedia card, permit write operation by removing the silver write protect seal.
Note If the PROGDATA folder contains the default.dat file, move it to a safe place. The
default.dat is the Strata CTX Programmed data.
· Insert the SmartMedia card into Strata CTX processor SmartMedia socket and activate the
Forced Format command using Program 908; then Unmount SmartMedia using Program
908.
· Install SmartMedia card into a PC SmartMedia reader/writer and copy the new Strata CTX
software file named "nhs.prg" into SmartMedia card PROGRAM folder.
· Create the SmartMedia Card Volume label PRGUPDATE.
· Pull out the SmartMedia card and physically label it PRGUPDATE
3. Begin Update procedure.
· Insert the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE into the Strata CTX processor
SmartMedia socket. The SmartMedia LED on the processor starts to blink.
· From the programming telephone enter Program 911, press +ROG. Press FB01 and dial
(UPDATE) and then press +ROG. The SmartMedia LED begins to flash rapidly.
· FB07-LED indicates the status update process.
·
Flashing green indicates that the update process is in progress.
·
Solid green indicates this part of update completed successfully (5 to 10 minutes).
·
Flashing Red indicates an error.
Note Within one or two minutes the SmartMedia LED stops the rapid flashing and starts to blink;
you can now check the update progress using FB02 and FB03 to view data block status.
B-50
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Local Update
4. Change the standby side status of Flash Memory to trial:
Button Pr
· After FB07 is on solid green, press +ROG, while in Program 911. Press FB05 and dial
(TRIAL) and then press +ROG.
o
· Pull out the SmartMedia card labeled PRGUPDATE (which includes PROGRAM/nhs.prg
gram
file).
m
5. Change the active side of Flash Memory and restore backup data.
ing
· Insert the SmartMedia CARD labeled Strata CTX backup data into socket -The
SmartMedia LED on the processor begins to blink.
Note The Strata CTX backup data SmartMedia card is the card you previously made that
includes the Strata CTX programmed data in the default.dat file under the PROGDATA
folder.
· From the programming telephone enter Program 911and press +ROG; Press FB01 and dial
(CLRREBOOT) and then press +ROG.
Note The Strata CTX processor Heartbeat LED stops flashing and all telephones become
inactive. After a few minutes the Strata CTX initializes and starts up with new version of
software on the active side of Flash memory with the original software on the standby side,
and then restores the backed up program data from the SmartMedia card default.dat file
(the processor SmartMedia LED flashes while it restores the program data to the processor
RAM).
· Confirm that the software is updated and the backup data is restored before pulling out the
SmartMedia card.
·
The processor SmartMedia LED should be off.
·
Login to the Programming Mode from digital telephone is only permitted if update/
Restore is completed.
· From the programming telephone make sure that the Strata CTX version number of the new
software is on the active side.
·
Program 901 FB01 shows version number of new Software on active side.
·
Program 901 FB02 shows version number of original Software on standby side.
· After you confirm that update and restore is complete, pull out the SmartMedia labeled
Strata CTX backup data.
· Perform test to verify that the system is working properly on the new software and the
database has been restored.
Note If CLRREBOOT is activated without the Backup data SmartMedia card installed, the active
and standby software is swapped and the system default program data is restored.
· Set the active side program to Normal as follows:
· From the programming telephone enter Program 911 and press +ROG; Press FB04 and dial
(NORMAL) and then press +ROG. The new software is on the active side running in the
Normal mode.
Note The active side switches from "Trial" to "Normal" automatically after 24 hours if it is not
done manually using Program 911.
If a problem occurs with the new software, switch back to the original software by performing the
above steps starting with "Change the standby side status of Flash Memory to trial."
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-51

---

Button Programming
Trace Function
Trace Function
To analyze Strata CTX problems efficiently, Toshiba needs to get the event trace data and ISDN
trace data. These data sets enable analysis of the problems Strata CTX may experience. It is
helpful for troubleshooting problems that are difficult to duplicate.
Please contact Toshiba Technical Support to coordinate the running of the trace procedures.
Technical Support will walk you through the required steps.
900 Series Programs
System Initialize
This program enables you to reset hardware and initializes, or restores programmed data.
Program Number:
900
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Initialize Level
01
Press or to select the initialize level.
1.
Initialize Level 1
1:Restart with
Clear Data
Level 1 ­ Erases programmed data and enters
2.
Initialize Level 2
default data or backed up data if a SmartMedia
2:Restart
Card is installed (see Note).
Level 2 ­ Simulates System Power Off/Power
On operation to reset hardware.
To access programming parameters
1. Press )% to choose Initialize Level 1 or 2.
2. Press +ROG twice to initialize.
Important!
Choosing Initialize Level 1 without installing a SmartMedia Card deletes all
programmed data and returns your Strata CTX to factory default settings. All
previously programmed data is lost.
Restoring Data from SmartMedia
When initializing with Level 1 you can restore custom data that was previously programmed and
stored on a SmartMedia card. To do so, follow the steps below.
1. Install a SmartMedia card that contains the Prgdata directory with the default.dat file.
The default.dat file contains your custom settings and can be created by running Data
Backup. See "Data Backup" on page B-60.
2. After installing the SmartMedia card, run System Initialization using Initialize Level 1.
B-52
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Restoring data from the SmartMedia card may take an hour or more. To verify completion of the
Button Pr
restore process access the Programming Mode from a telephone and enter your password. If the
system enables you to continue, the data restore process is complete.
Note
During the restore process, the telephone LCD may display date and time data. This does
og
not necessarily indicate completion of the restore process.
ram
ming
Display Version
This program enables you to view current software versions for the Strata CTX system and
installed options.
· Active ­ As the name implies, this is the current active software operating the Strata CTX
system.
· Standby ­ This is a software version released prior to the active version. It acts as a backup in
the event problems are experienced by the Active version.
Program Number:
901
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Version Number
01
Display Active side software version and
Active
installed options.
As the name implies, this is the current
Installed Version
active software operating the Strata CTX
system.
Version Number
02
Display Standby side software version and
6~31 digits
Standby (Strata
installed options.
CTX 670 only).
This is a software version released prior to
Installed Version
the active version. It acts as a backup in the
event problems are experienced by the
Active version.
1. Press )% to view current Strata CTX software version. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH key to move
the display left or right.
2. Press )% to view backup Strata CTX software version.
3. Press +ROG, then
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-53

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Set Time and Date
This program enables you to change the system clock in Strata CTX.
Program Number:
902
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Date
01
Enter current system date in this field.
yymmdd format
DATE=
yy = current year
mm = current month
dd = current day
Time
02
Enter the current time in this field.
hhmmss format
TIME=
hh = current hour
mm = current minute
ss = current second
1. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX Date. See table above for format.
2. Press +ROG to program.
3. Press )% to enter current Strata CTX time. See table above for format.
4. Press +ROG to program.
5. Press +ROG to submit, then
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
6. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Event Trace Control
This program enables you to trace message events occurring in Strata CTX.
Program Number:
903
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
B-54
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Button Pr
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Trace State
01
Enter or to Start or Stop Message
1:Start
1:START
o
Trace. Stopping the trace outputs data to
g
2:Stop
2:STOP
ram
the SmartMedia card. Wait for the 352*
prompt on the LCD before proceeding.
ming
Before removing the SmartMedia card run
Program 908. See "Format/Unmount
SmartMedia" on page B-59.
Trace Size
02
Set the trace data size. Toshiba
1~256 (in bytes)
SIZE=
recommends leaving this parameter at the
1 unit = 16 bytes.
default setting which provides
approximately 15 minutes of trace data.
default = 2
Trace Category
03
Trace data type to be stored.
1:Call Processing
1.CP
2:Maint and Admin
2.M&A
3:Both of the above
3.CP+M&A
1. Press )% to enable Start or Stop trace. Use the number key pad to make your selection.
2. Press +ROG.
Notes
Start indicates the trace was previously started and is currently running.
Stop indicates the trace is not running and all trace buffer data was transferred to
SmartMedia.
3. Press )% to enter trace file size. To change the setting, use the number Dial Pad.
4. Press +ROG.
5. Press )% to set trace category. To view setting options, press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button.
6. Press +ROG twice to execute. Wait for the PROG= prompt to display before proceeding.
7. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Note
When Strata CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia
card. A new trace file is stored on SmartMedia under the Evnttrace directory. Run the
Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to ensure
complete data transfer.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-55

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
ISDN Trace Location
This program enables set up of ISDN protocol event trace collection conditions.
Program Number:
904
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
At the EQUIP= prompt enter the Shelf, Slot and Port numbers.
Notes
Shelf, Slot and Circuit number is entered in "XXYYZZ" format where Shelf is a two digit
value from 01~07 corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number, Slot is a two digit value
from 01~10 corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet's PCB slot number and Circuit is a two
digit value from 01~04 corresponding to the Strata CTX PCB Slot's circuit number.
Always use circuit 01 for RPTU.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LLCI
01
Level of collecting LLCI values.
1:None (no
Layer 3
02
Level of collecting Layer 3 messages.
information)
1:NON
Layer 2 and 3
03
Level of collecting Layer 2 and Layer 3
2:Brief (important
messages.
2:BRIEF
information)
State Transitions
04
Level of collecting State Transitions.
3:DETAILED
3:Detailled (all
Errors
05
Level of collecting errors.
information)
Layer 2 States
06
Level of collecting Layer 2 States.
1. Press )% to run a LLCI Trace. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
2. Press )% and set CCL3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
3. Press )% and set L2L3 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
4. Press )% and set STATE Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
5. Press )% and set ERRORS Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief,
or Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
6. Press )% and set L2 Trace Level. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view Non, Brief, or
Detailed options. Enter 1~3 to determine Trace Level.
7. Press +ROG to execute.
8. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
9. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
B-56
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
All ISDN Trunk Trace
Button Pr
Program start/stop of packaged detailed collection of event trace functions. This program is only
available in the telephone button programming mode.
o
Program Number:
905
gram
Prerequisite Program: "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59, "ISDN Trace Location" on
m
page B-56, "ISDN Trace Location" on page B-56 and "Event Trace Control" on
ing
page B-54
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Trace All ISDN
01
Output All ISDN Trunk Events to
1:On
1:ON
Trunks
SmartMedia.
2:Off
2:OFF
1. Press )%.
2. Select , or to turn on or off.
3. Press +ROG twice to execute.
4. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-57

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Event Trace Side Change
This program enables you to manage your ISDN protocol trace. This program is only available in
the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number:
906
Prerequisite Program: "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Side Change
01
Enter desired parameter number.
1:Message
1:MESSAGE
2:ISDN
2:ISDN
3:Message+ISDN
3:MESSAGE+ISDN
1. Press )%.
2. Select , , or to select parameter.
3. Press +ROG to execute.
4. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Note
When Strata CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia
card. Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to
ensure complete data transfer.
System Admin Log
Use this command to Start/Stop the System Admin Log.
Program Number:
907
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
Install SmartMedia card
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Admin Log On/Off
01
Enter or to Start or Stop Admin Log.
1:Start
1:START
2:Stop
2:STOP
1. Press )%. To run System Admin Log press +ROG (twice). You are sent to the PROG=
prompt.
2. To Stop the log, press )% and press on the dial pad.
B-58
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
3. Press +ROG twice and wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
Button Pr
Note
When Strata CTX 670 stops logging data, it automatically sends data to the SmartMedia
card. Run the Unmount command (Program 908) before removing the SmartMedia card to
ensure complete data transfer.
ogram
Format/Unmount SmartMedia
ming
This program enables Administrators to format a SmartMedia card from Strata CTX WinAdmin or
the telephone button pad.
Note
Strata CTX WinAdmin cannot view SmartMedia files directly. Additional hardware is
required to view the contents of the SmartMedia card.
Program Number:
908
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Control
01
Choose SmartMedia card formatting method:
1:Normal
1:NORMAL
Normal ­ creates any Strata CTX SmartMedia
2:Forced
2:FORCED
directory that does not exist already. Exiting
3:Unmount
3:UNMOUNT
directories are not overwritten by this procedure.
4:Transfer
4:TRANSFER
Forced ­ erases any existing directories and
files. All existing data is overwritten. See Strata
CTX SmartMedia Directories for more
information.
Unmount ­ writes data into SmartMedia Card.
Always run unmount before removing the
SmartMedia card to prevent damage to the card.
Transfer ­ writes data from static RAM to
SmartMedia Card.
1. Press )% to enter parameter. Enter ~ as your command choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH
button to make your selection.
2. Press +ROG to confirm and +ROG again to execute.
3. Wait for the PROG= prompt to appear before proceeding.
4. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Strata CTX SmartMedia Directories
Running the Normal and Forced options of this program creates five directories on the
SmartMedia card as follows:
· Admlog ­ The Admlog folder saves
· Errlog ­ System error logs are saved into this folder.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-59

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
· Evnttrce ­ Strata CTX WinAdmin Event Trace files are saved into this folder.
· Progdata ­ Your Strata CTX programmed settings are all saved in this folder.
· Program ­ The operating software and default data of the Strata CTX is saved in this folder.
When a backup is performed, Strata CTX saves programmed data to the Progdata folder.
MAC Address (System Serial Number)
This program enables you to display your Strata CTX 670 System Serial Number.
Program Number:
909
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
MAC Address
01
Display System Serial Number.
12 digits
MAC Address
1. Press )% to view parameter. The MAC Address is view only and cannot be changed.
2. Press +ROG (twice) to exit to the PROG= prompt.
3. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Data Backup
This program enables you to Back up system data to a SmartMedia card.
Program Number:
910
Prerequisite Program: "Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
Backup Function
01
Start and Stop system backup.
1:Backup
1:BACKUP
Note
Restore function is not operational 2:Restore (Do not 2:RESTORE
and should never be executed.
use. See Note on
3:CANCEL
Use System Initialize (Program
left).
900) Level 1 to restore system
3:Cancel
backup.
Numbers
02
The number of data blocks. This number
Variable
ALL NO=
varies depending on the amount of
programming the system contains.
B-60
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
Current Number
03
This number increments as the backup
Variable
CUR NO=
progresses. When the backup is complete
this number should match the total number
of data blocks displayed in Numbers
()%).
Backup State
04
All_Ok ­ Backup completed with no errors.
1:normal end all
2:normal end part
Partial_Ok ­ Backup has completed with
3:abnormal end
errors.
4:cancel
NG ­ Backup has failed.
5:importing
Cancel ­ Cancel Backup.
6:exporting
Importing ­ Program data is being
restored.
Exporting ­ Program data is being sent
out.
Note
Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See
"Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59 for more details.
1. Press )% to enter your Backup choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view your
selection options.
2. Press . )% and )% should blink green.
3. Press +ROG to execute. Press +ROG again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.
To view Backup progress
1. While the program is running ()% and )% blink green), press )% to view the total
number of files to be transferred.
2. Press )% to view the current file number that is being transferred.
3. The Backup is complete when )% blinks intermittently.
4. To verify success, push )%. Your telephone LCD should indicate *1.ALL_OK.
5. Press
+ROG to exit.
Note
Do not press the +ROG button. Pressing the +ROG button restarts the Backup procedure.
To Restore data from the SmartMedia card to Strata CTX, see "System Initialize" on page B-52.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-61

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
Program Update
Important!
Do not use this Command during Beta testing until Toshiba notifies you otherwise.
This program enables you to update the Strata CTX programs.
Program Number:
911
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Update Function
01
Enter 1 or 2 to identify the type of
1:Update
1:Update
Update intended.
2:Reboot
2:Reboot
Select 3 to cancel a running update.
3:Cancel
3:Cancel
Total Blocks
02
View total blocks to be updated (total
0~65536 (Strata
n/a
blocks will vary depending on software CTX 670)
versions).
0~128 (Strata
CTX 100)
default = 0
Copied Blocks
03
View number of blocks copied.
0~65536 (Strata
n/a
CTX 670)
0~128 (Strata
CTX 100)
default = 0
Active Side Status
04
Backup Type Display
1:Normal
1:Normal
2:Trial
2:Trial
3:Fault
3:Fault
4:Don't Care
4:Don't Care
5:Error
5:Error
Stand by Side Status
05
Stand by Backup Type
1:Normal
1:Normal
2:Trial
2:Trial
3:Fault
3:Fault
4:Don't Care
4:Don't Care
5:Error
5:Error
Active Side Number
06
Active Side Number.
0 or 1
ACT SIDE=
default = 0
Status
07
View Backup Status.
1:Idle
1:Idle
2:Running
2:Running
3:Success
3:Success
4:Error
4:Error
Note
Before running this program, make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted. See
"Format/Unmount SmartMedia" on page B-59 for more details.
1. Press )% to enter your Backup choice. Press the 6FUROO or 3DJH button to view your
selection options.
2. Press . )% and )% should blink green.
B-62
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
900 Series Programs
3. Press +ROG to execute. Press +ROG again to Cancel. This program stops running if you exit
programming mode from your telephone.
Make Busy Control
When an error occurs in hardware resources used for a station or a line fails, this feature makes
them busy. The station or line PCB can be disabled temporarily to perform maintenance or parts
replacements as well. This program is only available in the telephone button programming mode.
Program Number:
912
Prerequisite Program: Format SmartMedia Card
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
At the CABINET= prompt enter the Shelf number.
Note
The Shelf number is entered in "XX" format where Shelf is a two digit value from 01~07
corresponding to the Strata CTX Cabinet number. See "Program Button LEDs" below for
a description of the LED display.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
Equipment
00
Enter Cabinet Number
01~07 (value=xx)
Slot #1
01
Slot #2
02
Slot #3
03
Slot #4
04
Slot #5
05
1: Set make busy
Enter or
Slot #6
06
2: Clear make busy
Slot #7
07
Slot #8
08
Slot #9
09
Slot #10
10
1. Press )%~)% to enter your Make Busy selection for the appropriate Slot in the Cabinet
entered in Access Sequence above.
Note
The slot to which your programming phone is connected can not be set to Make Busy.
2. Press +ROG to execute.
3. Press +ROG again to return to CABINET= prompt.
4. Press
+ROG to return to the PROG= prompt.
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Program Button LEDs
The LED blink pattern indicates the following:
· Red continuous blinking ­ PCB experienced a Make Busy status error.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-63

---

Button Programming
Green intermittent blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
· Red continuous illumination ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is on.
· Green continuous blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is stand by.
Green intermittent blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
Regional Selection
Set Operating region for your Strata CTX. This program is only available in the telephone button
programming mode.
Program Number:
915
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
LCD Prompt
Region
01
Set region number. 0~2 are valid entries
0~31 (US = 0,
REGION=
for North American Operations.
Canada = 1, and
Mexico = 2).
Active (Not used)
02
Enter the phone number Active Strata CTX Numeral up to
n/a
should dial to get PPP connection.
sixteen digits.
Stand by (Not
03
Enter the phone number Stand by Strata
Numeral up to
n/a
used)
CTX should dial to get PPP connection.
sixteen digits.
1. Press )%. Enter ~. Press +ROG.
2. Press )%. Enter the phone number Active Strata CTX should dial to get PPP connection.
Press +ROG.
3. Press )%. Enter the phone number Stand by Strata CTX should dial to get PPP connection.
Press +ROG.
4. Press +ROG (twice).
5. Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
IP Configuration
This program enables you to set up Network Communication Protocols.
Program Number:
916
Prerequisite Program: None
Reference:
None
Access Sequence:
Login to programming mode from your telephone button pad:
+ROG .
At the PASSWORD= prompt, Enter your password and press +ROG.
B-64
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Button Programming
Green intermittent blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
At the PROG= prompt enter and press +ROG.
FB Name
FB
Summary
Value
IP Address
01
Enter IP Address 1.
0~255
192 = First IP Address Octet
default = 192.168.254.253
168 = Second IP Address Octet
254 = Third IP Address Octet
253 = Fourth IP Address Octet
Subnet Mask
02
Enter Subnet Mask Address 1.
0~255
default = 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
03
Enter Default Gateway 1.
0~255
default = 0.0.0.0
Notes
The LCD only displays three of the twelve IP address digits at a time. Press the 6SNU button to
view the remaining digits.
The IP Address is the static IP address of the Strata CTX processor NIC/Ethernet connection
only. The PPP IP address for the Strata CTX processor modem is always 192.168.255.254 and
cannot be changed.
1. Press )% to view the current TCP/IP Address 1 (press )% to view the current Subnet Mask
Address 1, or press )% to view Default Gateway Address 1).
Press +ROG.
2. Enter first IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 3.
3. Press 6SNU button and enter second IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 4.
4. Press 6SNU button and enter third IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 5.
5. Press 6SNU button and enter fourth IP Address Octet. To keep current setting go to Step 6.
6. Press +ROG.
7. Press )% to configure the remaining parameters.
8. Press +ROG.
9. After all parameters are entered press +ROG to submit the new settings.
10.You are automatically returned to the PROG= prompt.
Enter another program number to continue programming or press
+ROG again to exit
programming mode.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
B-65

---

Button Programming
Green intermittent blinking ­ PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
B-66
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
C
Sy
The following Error Code Tables are needed when programming Strata CTX670 using the button
st
programming method. The Error Codes are displayed on the DKT's LCD.
em Error Code
Note The following error codes only appear when using the telephone button programming
method. These tables are being provided for reference only. CTX WinAdmin will feature
error codes in future release.
s
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-1

---

System Error Codes
Common Error Code Table
Common Error Code Table
Program
Code
Error descriptions
1
Invalid Program number.
2
Invalid value.
Invalid parameter designation
3
·
Input parameter range error.
·
Required sub-parameter data was not entered.
4
Invalid FB button pressed.
The time allotted to enter a modification in the desired field has been
5
exceeded.
Common
Invalid parameter entry
6
·
Incorrect characters entered
·
Input method is wrong
Some settings carried out using the range function may not have been
7
programmed correctly.
16
Identification error
17
Required parameter is not entered.
18
Required reef which is necessary to register newly does not exist.
C-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
Sub-
Program
Code
FB
Error descriptions
parameter
33
A7
The entered Cabinet/Slot value is out of range.
33
A7
The entered PCB Type is out of range.
Deleting a Card (000) ­ Programmed station and/or trunk
49
A7
data must be deleted before a card can be deleted.
Sy
Changing Card Type Code ­ Card Type cannot be changed.
ste
49
A7
Delete the existing Card Type before entering a new Card
m Error Code
Type.
49
A7
The designated BIOU is already in use.
The PCB cannot be assigned to the designated equipment
49
A7
position.
s
100
One of the required parameters (PCM Highway, BDKU Type
50
A7
or TEI Assignment) has not been assigned.
The PCM highway value entered is not applicable for the
50
A7!
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
The Channel Type value entered is not applicable for the
50
A7"
desired PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for
PDKU or BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
The TEI Type value entered is not applicable for the desired
50
A7#
PCB assignment. PCB parameters are required for PDKU or
BDKU, RDTU, RDSU, RPTU.
33
A7
The entered Feature Code is out of range.
An invalid OLG number was entered in OLG Number field
49
A7!
when assigning a Flexible Numbering Feature code of 551.
102
Flexible Numbering Plan values cannot be repeated. The
51
A7
value entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered,
123 cannot be registered).
The value entered conflicts with an existing extension and
52
A7
cannot be registered.
103
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
104
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
33
A7! A7!!
The entered Clock value is out of range.
A7 !
The BIOU general relay number value conflicts with existing
105
49
A7 '
parameter assignments.
49
A7! A7!!
The entered circuit number is not the clock source port.
106
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
33
A7A7
The entered Pad device number is invalid.
107
96
A7 A7!
The number of Pad groups exceed the system capacity.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-3

---

System Error Codes
System Programming Error Codes
Sub-
Program
Code
FB
Error descriptions
parameter
33
A7
The entered Device Type is out of range.
108
33
A7
The PAD group entered is out of the range.
80
A7
The Device number entered does not exist in the system.
33
A7'A7 %
The entered equipment is out of range.
50
A7'A7 %
The entered equipment is registered as MOH already.
109
A BIOU circuit with other data such as door phone, etc. is
80
A7 A7&
assigned in MOH/BGM 1~7.
A circuit with a non-STU circuit is designated in MOH/BGM
80
A7'A7 %
8~16.
Identification error: A super user password cannot be checked
110
16

if you are logged in with a general user level password.
111
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
33
A7
The entered date is out of range.
112
98

Allowable number of Working Day Type has been exceeded.
113
33
A7 A7(
The entered time value is out of range.
114
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
115
-

See "Common Error Code Table" on page C-2.
116
33
A7
The Program Number entered is invalid.
117
32
A7
An invalid character exists in the entered value.
C-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The entered Shelf/Slot/Circuit value is out of range.
The selected PDN(s) conflicts with an existing PDN(s)
49
A7
assignments for the selected circuit.
49
A7!
Station Type cannot be changed.
Sy
A7 $
The desired DN does not exist.
s
49
te
A7!!
m Error Code
51
A7
The entered value conflicts with an existing number scheme.
The entered value conflicts with an existing ISDN assignment
52
A7
200
etc.
s
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
54
A7
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80
A7
The DN does not exist.
A PCB without 'DKT/SLT setting allowed' is designated for a
80
A7
PCB connecting the selected ISDN extensions.
96
A7
The allowed number of extensions has been exceeded.
The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
98
A7"$
system's capacity.
51
A7
The entered number is not the extension number.
201
52
A7
The entered number is not the extension number.
80
A7
The entered value is not a valid extension.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-5

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The equipment number entered is out of the range.
PCB assignment is not set for the ISDN card connecting
49
A7
selected extensions.
49
A7
The entered equipment is using as other ISDN extension.
49
A7!
An ISDN trunk channel group conflict has been detected.
Although the P-P connection was selected, an additional DN
49
A7!
is registered.
49
A7!%A7"!
The desired value conflicts with existing ISDN extensions.
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
-
numbering scheme.
A7ÃA7!%Ã
The desired value conflicts with existing number schemes.
51
A7"!
202
52
A7
A DN used for DKT extensions is designated.
The additional ISDN extension number cannot be registered.
52
A7!%A7"!
The number is already in use by a DKT extensions, etc.
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
54
A7
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
80
A7
The DN entered is invalid.
A PCB without ISDN extension settings allowed' is designated
80
A7
for the PCB connecting the ISDN extension(s) selected.
The number of channel group exceeds the system capacity
96
A7!
when ISDN station is registered.
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
96
A7
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
The quantity of station speed dial bins entered exceeds the
98
A7"$
system's capacity.
The new DN value conflicts with an existing value DN, PhDN,
49
A7
etc.
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
-
numbering scheme.
203
The new DN value conflicts with an existing numbering
51
A7
scheme value.
52
A7
The new DN value conflicts with existing group extensions.
80
A7
The new DN value does not exist.
The number of attendant consoles exceed the number
49
A7
specified in the system.
52
A7
DKT is not assigned to DN (ISDN, etc.).
204
80
A7
The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist.
98
A7#
Allowable Feature Button number is exceeded.
98
A7 &
Allowable Call History Memory size is exceeded.
C-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
100
Sub-parameters must be assigned.
110
33
A7
120
130
140

The line number entered is out of range for the system's
33
capacity.
Sy
48

Required parameter for each Feature Code is not entered.
ste
110
Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
m
49
A7
Error Code
one extension.
700
Only Feature Code(s) allowed for Attendant Console is
790
registered.
800
49
A7
s
810
820
830
610
Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
49
A7
extension.
120
While assigning sub-parameters to a DN: A DN was selected
130
that does not exist in the system.
49
A7
560
610
205
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
A7
numbering scheme.
110
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
numbering scheme.
120
When assigning an Owner DN to a CO or GCO, the related
51
A7
130
CO or GCO buttons are not assigned to the respective FB(s)
of the owner's extension.
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
52
numbering scheme.
110
The Secondary/PhDN entered is already used in ISDN
52
A7
extenstion(s), etc.
120
The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
52
A7
130
80
A7
The PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
82

The sub-parameter values assigned to the FB are invalid.
82
!
The line number entered does not exist.

The maximum allowable value for GCO, POOL, or PhDN has
96

"
been exceeded.
#
A7
The quantity of Flexible keys programmed exceeds the
98
A7#
system's capacity.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-7

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
A7
An invalid DN was selected. The entered PDN is not related
49
A7#
to this PhDN.
Phantom DN entered is invalid (the entered value is used as a
51
-
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
A7
An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
51
A7
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
206
A7 #
The Phantom DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
52
-
extension.
A7
The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT extension, or
52
A7#
numbering plan, etc.
80
A7
A PhDn that does not exist in the system has been selected.
An invalid DN was selected (the entered value is used as a
51
FB00
part of an existing extension number or numbering plan).
208
52
A7
The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
The DN entered is an extension number that does not exist in
80
A7
the system.
If Hunt Method field is set to Distribute, the incoming
49
FB01
destination Pilot Number must be assigned.
If Hunt Method is set to Distribute, Pilot Number must be
50
A7!
assigned.
The entered value conflicts with an existing number or
51
A7!
209
numbering plan.
52
A7!
The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.
The designated Hunt Group number does not exist in the
80
FB00
system.
The assigned Hunt Group number, exceeds the system
96
A7
capacity.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (The entered
51
FB00
value is used in an extension number or numbering plan).
52
A7
The entered value is used in the numbering plan.
210
80
A7
The entered PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The Pickup group number entered is out of the range for the
96
-
system's capacity.
C-8
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
100
The sub-parameters for Feature Code (Key Number) must be
110
assigned.
33
A7
120
130
140
The line number entered is out of range for the system's
33
-
120
capacity.
Sy
48

Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
ste
Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
m
49
A7
110
Error Code
one extension.
700
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
790
registered.
800
49
A7
s
810
820
830
Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
49
A7
610
extension.
120
The entered DN does not exist in the system.
130
49
A7
560
610
213
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
-
numbering scheme.
The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
51
A7
110
number conflicts with an existing number scheme.
When setting an owner extension to the additional information
120
51
A7
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
130
Feature buttons of the owner extension.
The Prime DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
52
-
extension.
The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
52
A7
110
number conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s), etc.
120
The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
52
A7
130
80
A7
The specified PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The additional information assigned to the Feature Button is
82

invalid.
82
-
120
The line number entered does not exist.
110
The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
96

130
exceeded.
140
The quantity of Flexible keys programmed exceeds the
98
-
system's capacity.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-9

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7 A7'
The equipment number entered is out of the range.
49

The designated circuit is already in use.
Multiple DSSs cannot be assigned to the same Shelf/Slot/
50

Circuit.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
51

value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
214
52

The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80
A7
The designated PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The designated PCB and extension combination is not
80
A7 A7'
allowed.
The number of DSS consoles entered exceeds the system's
96
A7 A7'
capacity.
The number of DSS buttons entered exceeds the system's
98

capacity. This error can occur with PB1~PB8
C-10
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
100
The sub-parameters for Key Number field must be assigned.
110
33
FB01
120
130
140
The line number entered is out of range for the system's
33
-
120
capacity.
Sy
48

Essential sub-parameter values must be entered.
ste
Two or more PhDNs with the same value are registered to
m
49
A7
110
Error Code
one extension.
700
The feature code(s) allowed to attendant console only is
790
registered.
800
49
A7
s
810
820
830
Two or more DSSs with the same value are registered to one
49
A7
610
extension.
120
The entered DN does not exist in the system.
130
49
A7
560
610
215
The Prime DN entered conflicts with a value of an existing
51
numbering scheme.
The secondary/phantom DN entered cannot be registered.
51
A7
110
The number conflicts with an existing number scheme.
When setting an owner extension to the additional information
120
51
A7
of CO, GCO, the said CO, GCO keys are not assigned to the
130
Feature buttons of the owner extension.
The Prime DN entered conflicts with an existing DKT
52
-
extension.
The secondary/PhDN entered cannot be registered. The
52
A7
110
number conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s), etc.
120
The CO or GCO Owner DN entered does not exist.
52
A7
130
80
A7
The specified PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The additional information assigned to the Feature Button is
82

invalid.
82
-
120
The line number entered does not exist.
The allowable number of GCO, POOL or PhDn has been
96

exceeded.
The number of Flexible buttons programmed exceeds the
98
-
system's capacity.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-11

---

System Error Codes
Station Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
51
A7
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
216
The entered DN conflicts with an existing ISDN extension(s),
52
A7
etc.
80
A7
The designated PrimeDN does not exist in the system.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
51
A7
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
217
The entered DN is not designated as an ISDN extension in
52
A7
Program 202.
80
A7
The designated DN does not exist in the system.
The DN entered is already assigned to another Hunt Group. A
49
A7!
DN can only be in one Hunt Group.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
51
A7!
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
52
A7
The entered DN conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
80
A7
The entered Hunt Group number does not exist in the system.
218
80
A7!
The entered DN does not exist in the system.
The number of Hunt Group assignments has exceeded the
82
A7
system capacity.
The allowable number of Hunt Group member assignments
96
A7
has been exceeded.
More than 560 DNs are designated for members of one
98
FB01
hunting group.
Note
In the cell of Occurred FB in Program 205, 213 and 215, Code shows the inputted Feature Code.
C-12
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The equipment number entered is out of the range.
When modifying previously assigned equipment:
·
The designated PCB Type does not allow CO trunk
49
A7
assignments.
Sy
·
The designated circuit does not allow CO trunk
s
assignments.
tem
The ISDN ILG number is designated for Analog Trunks or the
Error Code
49
A7!
entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
The ISDN OLG number is designated for Analog Trunks or
49
A7"
the entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
s
300
A7!
A conflict exists between the ILG number and the OLG
49
A7"
number trunk type.
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
54
A7
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
A Trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
80
A7
selected.
80
A7!
The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
80
A7"
The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
96
A7
Allowable number of Trunks has been exceeded.
96
A7
The line number entered exceeds the system's capacity.
A Trunk number that does not exist in the system has been
301
6
A7
selected.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-13

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The equipment number entered is out of the range.
Dch position is not set to 16. When setting the time slot
48
A7&
pattern for a 2048 kbps interface, this value must be set to 16.
49
A7"
The type of ILG or OLG entered in not an ISDN.
49
A7#
The ILG or OLG entered does not exist in the system.
The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
50
A7!#
National ISDN.
The entered Channel Group conflicts with an existing ISDN
52
A7
extension(s), etc.
302
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
54
A7
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
The entered Channel Group number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
An ISDN trunk cannot be assigned to the designated Shelf/
80
A7
Slot/Circuit.
80
A7"
The designated ILG does not exist in the system.
80
FB04
The designated OLG does not exist in the system.
The number of allowable Channel Groups has been
96
FB00
exceeded when a new ISDN trunk assignment is made.
The entered Channel Group number conflicts with an existing
52
A7
303
ISDN extension(s).
80
FB01
The entered Channel Group number does not exist.
The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
A7
49
ILG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG field
A7!
of Program 302.
The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
49
A7%
to another ILG number.
304
The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
49
A7$
belongs to another ILG number.
80
A7
The entered ILG does not exist in the system.
A7$
The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
96
A7%
been exceeded.
96
A7
The number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
The entered ILG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
49
A7
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must deleted
305
first.
80
A7
The entered ILG does not exist in the system.
C-14
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
The Group Type and Trunk Type are assigned based on the
A7
49
OLG settings found in ILG field of Program 300 and in ILG
A7!
field of Program 302.
A7%
The entered Pool Key Number cannot be assigned. It belongs
49
A7&
to another OLG number.
The entered GCO Key Number cannot be assigned. It
49
A7#
306
belongs to another ILG number.
Sy
s
80
A7
The entered OLG does not exist in the system.
tem
The allowable number of OLG Group Number has been
Error Code
96
A7
exceeded.
A7#
The allowable number of GCO or POOL Key Number has
96
A7%
been exceeded.
A7&
s
The entered OLG number cannot be deleted. Trunk
49
A7
relationships assigned in Programs 300 and 302 must be
307
deleted first.
80
A7
The entered OLG does not exist in the system.
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
308
80
A7
The designated trunk equipment does not exist in the system.
A7$Ã
No incoming destination number is entered for the parameter
48
A7
required.
The entered DID conflicts with an existing wild card PCB. The
49
A7
allowable number of DID assignments including a wild card
PCB is exceeded.
49
A7"
The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.
The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
49
A7#
number.
51
A7
The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
309
The length of entered DID value exceeds the allowable
51
A7
contract digit number.
80
A7"
The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.
The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
82
A7
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
A7"
The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
96
A7#
assignments has been exceeded.
The allowable number of DID assignments has been
98
A7
exceeded.
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
A7 Ã
No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
310
48
A7"
parameter.
80
A7
The entered circuit is not set to support the designated trunk.
Although DISA security is set to Necessary, no DISA code
311
49
A7
has been assigned.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-15

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
49
A7
The entered DID number is not assigned to an ILG.
49
The DID Number entered is invalid.
312
80
DID Number entered does not exist in the system.
82
A7
The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
When Signalling Method field is set to CLASS:
313
A7!
49
·
The Signalling Contents field value must be assigned
A7"
·
The CLID Equipment Number Position circuit for the CIU
must be entered.
80
A7
The entered trunk number does not exist in the system.
A7
"NONE" entered in any field is invalid.
A7!
A7#
A7$
315
33
A7"
The entered equipment value is invalid.
The PCB installed in the designated Shelf/Slot must be a
49
A7
RDTU.
33
A7
RPTU Equipment Number entered is invalid.
If the Span Interface speed is set to a value not equal to 1.5M,
49
A7#
the Dch position is modified.
The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
52
A7
316
ISDN extension(s).
54
A7
The equipment number entered is out of range.
The entered channel group number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
80
A7
The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.
C-16
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
A7"
The entered ILG/OLG values do not have ISDN assignments.
49
A7#
The T-Wait Timer can only be enabled if the Protocol is set to
50
A7 '
National ISDN.
The entered channel group number conflicts with an existing
52
A7
Sy
ISDN extension(s).
st
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
e
54
A7
m
317
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
Error Code
The entered channel group number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
80
A7
The entered circuit must be an assigned ISDN.
s
80
A7"
The entered ILG number does not exist in the system.
80
A7#
The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
The allowable channel group assignments exceed the system
96
A7
capacity.
A7$Ã
No incoming destination number is assigned for the required
48
A7
parameter.
49
A7"
The selected GCO conflicts with an existing ILG number.
The selected Pool Line Group conflicts with an existing ILG
49
A7#
number.
318
80
A7"
The entered GCO key group does not exist in the system.
82
A7
The selected ILG number does not exist in the system.
The selected ILG number does not exist in the system. The
82
A7
number of ILGs exceed the system capacity.
A7"
The number of allowable GCO or POOL key group
96
A7#
assignments has been exceeded.
319
48
A7 A7"
The destination number is not assigned.
33
A7
The entered equipment value is invalid.
The quantity of lines, ISDN channels and PDNs entered
54
A7 A7"
320
exceeds the number of ports licensed with this processor.
The circuit for the designated PCB must be an assigned ISDN
80
A7
primary trunk.
321
80
A7
The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-17

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
The Group CO or Pool Line Group Destination is out of range
33

(1~128).
80
A7
The entered OLG number does not exist in the system.
A7
The designated extension number does not exist in the
80
A7!
system.
322
A7
The entered GCO value does not exist in the system.
80
A7!
A7
The entered POOL value does not exist in the system.
80
A7!
96
A7"
The allowable system DID assignments has been exceeded.
C-18
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Trunk Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
18
A7!
Select the Type of Service for CBC.
33
A7%
The Incoming Line Group entered is invalid.
33
A7&
The Outgoing Line Group entered is invalid.
The same value is designated to the Type of Service, Facility
Code, Service Parameters, and Network ID fields that
49
A7!A7$
correspond to the same channel group and different line
Sy
service index.
st
The entered values in Channel Group and Index fields are not
em
49
A7!
valid CBC assignments. Select NODATA in Type of Service
Error Code
field to delete CBC setting.
A7!
When an INWATS ILG is assigned in ILG field an Out WATS
49
A7%
Type of Service cannot be assigned.
s
A7!
If OUTWATS service is selected for Type of Service, an OLG
49
A7%
value must be assigned.
A7!
The selected ILG conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49
A7%
A7!
When an Out WATS OLG is assigned in OLG field an
49
A7&
INWATS Type of Service cannot be assigned.
A7!
Make a selection in OLG field.
49
A7&
323
A7!
The selected OLG conflicts with an existing ILG number.
49
A7&
The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
49
A7'A7 "
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
maximum Bch value.
A7'
The assigned minimum Bch value (Minimum Calls Zones
49
A7
1~3) exceeds the related (Maximum Calls Zones 1~3)
A7 !
maximum Bch value.
49
A7'A7 "
The B channel entered is invalid.
49
A7&
The OLG entered does not exist in system.
A7%
The entered ILG/OLG values are not assigned ISDNs.
49
A7&
50
A7!A7&
Make a Service Type selection for field 02.
The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
52
A7
extension(s), etc.
The entered channel group number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
82

The Channel Group entered does not exist in the system.
The allowable number of assigned channel groups has been
82
A7
exceeded.
96

The number of allowable CBCs has been exceeded.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-19

---

System Error Codes
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7 A7"
The time entered is invalid.
The entered channel number conflicts with an existing ISDN
52
A7
324
extension(s), etc.
The entered channel group number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
If the Called Number Index is not assigned, Call Destination
400
50
A7!
must be set to insert.
33
A7
The Attendant group number entered is out of the range.
The entered Attendant group number does not exist in the
404
80
A7
system.
80
A7&A7 %
The designated ILG does not exist in the system.
C-20
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
A7#
A character that is not permitted is included in the Destination
32
A7$
number.
A value must be assigned to Destination 1if an assignment
500
50
A7$
was made in Destination 2.
Sy
The entered System Call Forward number does not exist in
82
A7
s
the system.
tem Error Code
A character that is not permitted is included in the entered
32
A7
501
Speed Dial number.
33
A7
The entered Speed Dial number is out of range.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
s
51
A7
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
The entered number conflicts with an existing numbering
52
A7
plan.
502
The entered extension does not exist. The entered Attendant
80
A7
Console does not exist.
The Page group number entered exceeds the system's
96
-
capacity.
A7 Ã
The number of allowable Device number per paging group
98
A7 '
has been exceeded.
The entered External Generic Relay number conflicts with an
49
A7 (
existing device, such as a door lock, etc.
The Page group number entered exceeds the system's
503
96

capacity.
A7 Ã
Device Number per paging group is exceeded.
98
A7 '
504
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
53
A7
Account Code cannot be verified.
Account code confirmation digit does not coincide. (It is larger
506
80
A7
than the value that was registered by Program 570.)
98
A7
The Account code number exceeds the system's capacity.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-21

---

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
33
A7
The DDCB Equipment number entered is invalid.
A7%Ã
The destination number value is out of range (when
33
A7'
destination type is Paging Group).
A7%Ã
The allowable number of Paging Groups have been
33
A7'
exceeded.
33
A7#
The entered Ring Duration is invalid.
Door Phone number entered conflicts with an existing Door
49
A7
Phone number.
The equipment assigned in DDCB Equipment Number is
507
49
A7
already in use.
49
A7
The entered value conflicts with an existing DKT extension.
52
A7
The entered Circuit conflicts with an existing door lock.
The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
80
A7
system.
80
A7
The PCB Type designated for this circuit must be a DKU.
The entered Door Phone number does not exist in the
82
A7
system.
96
A7
The allowable number of Door Phones has been exceeded.
33
A7"
The entered equipment value is invalid.
The designated BIOU PCB circuit is used by another device
49
A7!
(Night Bell, etc.), or two or more door locks are designated for
the same BIOU PCB.
The PCB Type designated for this DDCB circuit must be a
49
A7"
508
PDKU or BDKU.
The DDCB Equipment number entered conflicts with an
49
A7"
existing door lock.
Other devices (DKT extensions, door phones, etc.) are
52
A7"
designated for the specified DDCB circuit.
96
A7
The allowable number of Door Locks has been exceeded.
509
-

No error occurs for this command except for common errors.
510
49
A7
The specified COS Override Code digit is invalid.
512
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
513
80
A7
ILG number enter does not exist.
514
80
A7
The entered OLG number does not exist.
515
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
C-22
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
A character that is not permitted is used in the Speed Dial
32
A7!
number.
The allowable number of Speed Dial Bins has been
50
A7
exceeded.
The entered DN does not exist in the system (the entered
516
51
A7
value conflicts with an existing extension number or
numbering plan).
Sy
s
52
A7
The entered value conflicts with an existing numbering plan.
tem
80
A7
The entered PrimeDN does not exist.
Error Code
98
A7
The allowable Short-dial number has been exceeded.
520
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
The Route Plan Number must be complete to be registered to
s
51
A7
the Route Plan Table.
521
The allowable number of participants in the Route Plan Table
98

has been exceeded.
The Exception Route Plan Number must be complete to be
51
A7
registered to the Route Plan Table.
522
The allowable number of participants in the Route Plan Table
98

has been exceeded.
523
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
524
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
A7
Both the OLG Number and the Digit Modification Index must
49
525
A7!
be entered.
50
A7
Digit Modification Index value cannot be 0.
526
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
33
A7
The entered date is out of range.
527
The public holiday number enterd exceeds the system's
98
A7
capacity.
528
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
529
33
A7"
The entered time is out of range.
A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
32
A7
code.
DR LCR Table codes cannot be repeated. The value entered
530
51
A7
cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot
be registered).
80
A7
The code is not registered in the screening table.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-23

---

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
32
A7
code.
LCR OLG Access codes cannot be repeated. The value
51
A7
entered cannot be registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123
531
cannot be registered).
The allowable number of LCR OLG Access codes has been
82
A7
exceeded.
The allowable number of DR sharing tables has been
98
A7
exceeded.
532
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
32
A7
code.
Dial Strings cannot be repeated. The value entered cannot be
533
51
A7
registered (e.g., If 1234 is registered, 123 cannot be
registered).
98
A7
The allowable number of DRLs has been exceeded.
A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
32
A7
code.
To add a DRL to the DR Exception Table, the DRL number
534
51
A7
must be complete.
The allowable number of participants in the DR Exception
98
A7
Table has been exceeded.
An incoming destination number must be entered when After
48
A7
Shift Type field is set to Dialing Digits.
51
A7
The entered value conflicts with an existing number scheme.
540
The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
52
A7
extension, etc.
80
A7
The entered DN does not exist.
A character(s) that is not permitted is included in the specified
20
A7
code.
541
The entered DN conflicts with an existing DKT, ISDN
52
extension, etc.
80
The entered DN does not exist.
A7 Ã
Two or more OLG numbers with the same value exist in the
49
A7'
same group.
550
A7 Ã
The entered OLG number does not exist.
80
A7'
Registered Digit Length cannot be less than the Verified Digit
49
A7
Length.
570
Registered Digit Length cannot be less than the Verified Digit
50
A7!
Length.
C-24
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

System Error Codes
Service Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Sub-
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
parameter
A7 Ã
The same account code cannot be repeated.
49
A7#
571
A7 Ã
The same account code cannot be repeated.
50
A7#
573
80
A7
The entered Door Phone does not exist.
576
80
A7
The entered Paging Group does not exist.
Sy
33
A7
The entered circuit type is out of range.
ste
33
A7
The Ckt Type number entered, CO, GCO or POOL is invalid.
m Error Code
51
A7
The entered circuit number is invalid.
577
52
A7
The entered circuit number is invalid.
The Device installed in the Circuit does not existed in the
80
A7
system.
s
80
A7
The entered station number does not exist.
579
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
52

The entered DN is not a VM extension.
580
80

No error occurs for this command except for common errors.
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
C-25

---

System Error Codes
Networking Programming Error Codes
Networking Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
650
80

An OLG number has not been assigned in system.
The allowable number of Node ID assignments has been
651
98

exceeded.
653
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
654
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
655
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
A7 Ã
The entered Overlap Code already exists.
656
49
A7#
657
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
658
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
659
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
660
-

No error occurs for this Program except for common errors.
Equipment Programming Error Codes
Occurred
Program
Code
Error descriptions
FB
Server Port Number must be entered when PC Operation
49
A7!
Type is set to Server, or Client Port Number must be entered
when PC Operation Type is set to Client.
If a CTI value (200~208) is assigned to the Logical Device in
49
A7"
Program 803, then Data Flow must be set to
Asynchronization.
801
When PC Operation Type is set to Client, the Client Port
49
A7(
Number cannot be deleted.
When PC Operation Type is set to Server, the Server Port
49
A7#
Number cannot be deleted.
The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
80
A7
Logical and Physical Device assignments.
The selected port conflicts with existing devices, such as CTI,
49

etc.
803
The Physical Device assignment conflicts with existing serial
50

number assignments.
The values assigned in Program 803 conflict with related I/O
804
80

Logical and Physical Device assignments.
C-26
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Index
Numerics
command table link, 3-17
100 series programs, B-9
communicating with Strata CTX, 3-13
200 series programs, B-16
create, clone, copy and delete, 3-20
300 series programs, B-26
flexible communication interface, 1-2
400 series programs, B-35
internet access, 1-2
500 series programs, B-35
internet explorer, 2-4
600 series programs, B-43
internet/personal web services, 2-4
800 series programs, B-44
IP address, 2-7
900 series programs, B-52
LAN network, 2-6
Index
network settings, 2-3
A
pages, 3-16
add SNMP services to network settings, A-3
personal web tools, 2-5
advisory message default code table, 4-32
planning, 3-7
program for first time, 3-7
B
program viewer GUI, 3-16
BIOU, 3-2
remote access service, 2-2
button programming, B-1
SNMP services, 2-4
examples, B-6
software installation sequence, 2-2, A-1
procedures, B-8
station assignment menu, 3-18
system requirements, 3-7
C
toolbar, 3-17
call forward
no answer timer, 4-12
D
override, 4-8
data backup, B-46
clone, 3-20
data initialize programs, 4-33
CO line, 3-3
default feature access codes, 3-7
CO lines sub-parameters, 5-15
delete, 3-20
communicating with Strata CTX, 3-13
destination restriction overview, 8-20
community name, 9-12
device table, 4-30
component status control
DID, 6-14
main, 10-8
directory number sub-parameters, 5-15
component status/control, 10-8
copy, 3-20
E
CTX processor NIC interface TCP/IP, 3-6
error alarm log, 10-5
CTX smart media directories, 9-5
error log, 10-1
CTX WinAdmin
external devices, 8-55
advanced software installation, 2-2
F
application software, 1-2
auto-programming to start-up, 3-1
feature button pattern assignments
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
IN-1

---

Index
H ~ P
10 button table, 5-10
P
14 button table, 5-11
PAD
20 button table, 5-10
conference value table, 4-25
feature/button code sub-parameter
device number table, 4-24
assignments, B-21
group device types, 4-25
file information, 9-11
parameter selection record sheet, 5-17
flash memory test, 10-7
PCB codes, B-10
flexible button assignment feature code table, B-22
planning, 3-7
FTP User Accounts, 9-10
profile, 11-2
H
Program 100
card assignment, 4-1
hardware
Program 102
installation, 2-1
card assignment, 4-4
requirements, 2-1
flexible numbering default settings, 4-4
I
flexible numbering plan, 4-4
Program 103
initial setup, 3-1, 3-7
card assignment, 4-8
install CTX WinAdmin, A-4
class of service, 4-8
install Windows NT 4.0 SP6a, A-1
Program 104
install Windows NT workstation option pack
card assignment, 4-11
4.0, A-3
set system timer, 4-11
install WMI packages, A-4
Program 105
install/set up Internet Explorer 5.5, A-3
card assignment, 4-13
install/set up RAS, A-2
set system data, 4-13
intercept, 6-3
Program 106
ISDN bearer capability, 5-35
day/night mode "type of day" mapping table
L
assignment, 4-21
least cost routing/destination restriction, 8-9
Program 107
license information, 9-16
PAD table assignment, 4-23
local update, B-48
Program 108
PAD group assignment, 4-24
M
Program 109
main, 10-8
card assignment, 4-27
maintenance, 10-1
music on hold, 4-27
error alarm log, 10-5
Program 110
error log, 10-1
card assignment, 4-26
event trace control, 10-3
password, 4-26
start/stop/store trace date, 10-1
Program 111
system admin log, 10-6
destination restriction level, 8-28
maintenance procedures, B-46
Program 112
memory access operation, 10-7
day/night mode calendar, 4-20
music on hold, 4-27
Program 113
day/night mode daily schedule assignment, 4-
N
21
networking, 8-35
Program 114
configuration, 8-41
PAD conference table assignment, 4-25
Program 115
O
advisory messages, 4-32
Overview, 1-1
card assignment, 4-32
IN-2
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Index
P ~ P
Program 116
Program 311
card assignment, 4-33
DISA security code, 6-22
data initialize, 4-33
Program 313
Program 117
caller ID assignment, 6-12
card assignment, 4-7
Program 315
public dial plan digit analysis, 4-7
T1 trunk card assignment, 6-26
Program 200
Program 316
basic station assignment, 5-1
shared D channel, 6-41
Program 202
Program 317
ISDN BRI station, 5-32
ISDN BRI trunk, 6-27
Program 204
Program 318
DKT parameters assignment, 5-6
DID intercept assignment, 6-18
Program 205
Program 319
DKT Flexible Button Assignment, 5-13
intercept position assignment, 6-22
Program 206
Program 320
phantom DN assignment, 5-23
B channels, 6-40
Program 208
Program 321
station timer assignment, 5-20
calling number identification, 6-43
Program 209
Program 322
hunt group, 5-26
called number table, 6-44
Index
Program 210
Program 323
group call pickup, 5-21
CBC service, 6-37
Program 213
Program 324
ADM Flexible Button Assignment, 5-13
CBC time zones, 6-38
Program 214
Program 400
DSS console assignment, 5-12
emergency call destination assignment, 7-3
Program 215
Program 404
DSS Flexible Button Assignment, 5-13
attendant group assignment, 7-1
Program 216
Program 500
emergency ringdown assignment, 5-21
system call forward assignment, 4-16
Program 217
Program 501
ISDN station data assignment, 5-37
card assignment, 4-18
Program 218
system speed dial, 4-18
station hunting group members assignment, 5-
Program 502
29
terminal paging group assignment, 5-22
Program 300
Program 503
trunk assignment, 6-8
paging devices group assignments, 8-61
Program 302
Program 504
PRI trunks, 6-32
system call forward operation status, 4-17
Program 304
Program 506
ILG, 6-1
verified account codes, 8-31
ILG Assignment, 6-2
Program 507
Program 306
door phones, 8-56
Outgoing Line Groups, 6-5
Program 508
Program 308
door lock control assignment, 8-58
trunk timer, 6-23
Program 509
Program 309
DR override by system speed dial, 8-32
direct inward dialing, 6-14
Program 510
Program 310
COS override assignment, 8-33
DIT assignment, 6-24
Program 512
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
IN-3

---

Index
P ~ P
SMDR for system assignment, 8-50
exception numbers for forced account
Program 513
codes, 8-31
SMDR for ILG assignment, 8-51
Program 576
Program 514
door phone night ring over external page, 8-57
SMDR for OLG assignment, 8-51
Program 577
Program 515
caller history, 8-52
view BIOU control relay assignments, 8-60
caller ID storage assignment, 8-52
Program 516
Program 579
station speed dial assignment, 5-30
system voice mail data, 8-5
Program 520
Program 580
LCR local route plan assignment, 8-11
voice mail port data, 8-7
Program 521
Program 650
LCR route plan digit analysis assignment, 8-
behind centrex assignment, 8-53
12
Program 651
Program 522
private network routing plan analysis table
LCR exception number route plan, 8-12
assignment, 8-44
Program 523
Program 653
LCR route plan schedule assignment, 8-16
private route choice table assignment, 8-45
Program 524
Program 654
route table to route definition assignment, 8-13
private route definition table assignment, 8-46
Program 525
Program 655
LCR route definition assignment, 8-14
private digit modification table assignment, 8-
Program 526
46
modified digits table assignment, 8-14
Program 656
Program 527
node ID assignment, 8-43
LCR holiday table, 8-18
Program 657
Program 528
network COS mapping table, 8-48
LCR public day of week mapping table, 8-17
Program 658
Program 529
network DRL mapping tables, 8-48
LCR route plan time zone assignment, 8-18
Program 801
Program 530
network jack LAN device assignment, 4-28
destination restriction LCR screening table
Program 803
assignment, 8-24
SMDR SMDI CTI port assignment, 4-29
Program 531
Program 804
destination restriction screening table for
BSIS RS-232 serial port setup, 4-31
OLG, 8-25
Program 900
Program 532
CTX restart, 9-2
DR table allow/deny definition, 8-27
system initialize, B-52
Program 533
Program 901
DR screening table for OLG, 8-27
display version, 9-3, B-53
Program 534
Program 902
destination restriction level exception table
set time and date, 9-4, B-54
assignment, 8-28
Program 903
Program 540
start/stop trace, 10-3
pilot DN assignment, 8-1
Program 904
Program 550
ISDN trace location, 10-4, B-56
enhanced 911 emergency call group, 8-62
Program 905
Program 570
all ISDN trunk trace, B-57
account code digit length, 8-30
event trace side change, B-58
Program 571
Program 906
IN-4
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Index
Q ~ R
change trace side, 10-4
public holidays/LCR time zones, 8-18
Program 907
Programs 530, 531
system admin log, 10-6
LCR/DR screening, 8-24
Program 908
Programs 532, 533, 534, 111
smart media, 9-4
destination restriction, 8-27
Program 909
Programs 653, 654, 655
MAC address, 9-13
private route choice definition, 8-45
Program 911
Programs 657-660
program update, 9-7
mapping, 8-47
Program 912
Programs 801, 803, 804
make busy, 10-9
card assignment, 4-28
Program 913
I/O device, 4-28
license issue, 9-15
Programs 903, 905, 906
Program 914
event trace control, 10-3
license activate, 9-16
Programs 913, 914
Program 916
license control, 9-15
TCP/IP configuration, 9-10
Programs 106, 112, 113
Q
card assignment, 4-20
QSIG, 6-2, 6-5~6-6, 6-34, 8-35
day night service, 4-20
R
Index
Programs 107, 108, 114
card assignment, 4-23
record sheet overview, B-2
PAD table, 4-23
record sheets
Programs 202, 217
attendant group (404), 7-2
ISDN assignments, 5-32
B channel selection (320), 6-40
Programs 205, 213, 215
basic station (200), 5-5
key assignments, 5-13
behind centrex (550), 8-54
Programs 208, 210, 216
button assignment (205/213/215), 5-18
data assignments, 5-20
call history (577), 8-53
Programs 308, 310
call-by-call (323/324), 6-39
timer/DIT assignments, 6-23
caller ID assignment (313), 6-13
Programs 311, 319
calling number (321/322), 6-45
service assignments, 6-22
card assignment (100), 4-2
Programs 321, 322
COS (103), 4-10
calling number assignment, 6-43
COS override (510), 8-34
Programs 500/504
day/night mode (112/106/113), 4-22
card assignment, 4-16
DID assignment (309), 6-17
Programs 506, 570, 571
DID intercept assignment (318), 6-21
account codes, 8-30
DKT parameters (204), 5-9
Programs 507, 508, 576
door phone assignment (507/508/576), 8-59
door phones, 8-55
DR (532/533/534/111), 8-29
Programs 512-514
DR/LCR screening (530/531), 8-26
SMDR, 8-50
E911 emergency call group (550), 8-63
Programs 520, 521, 522
Feature Button (205/213/215), 5-17
LCR assignment, 8-11
flexible numbering plan (102), 4-5
Programs 523, 528
hunt group (209/218), 5-28
route schedule, 8-16
ILG (304/513), 6-4
Programs 524, 525, 526
ISDN BRI station (202), 5-36
route define, 8-13
ISDN BRI trunk (317), 6-30
Programs 527, 528
ISDN data (217), 5-39
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01
IN-5

---

Index
S ~ W
LCR assignments (520/521/522), 8-12
Troubleshooting
LCR time zone (527/529), 8-19
CTX WinAdmin installation, A-8
network mapping (657/658/659/660), 8-49
node ID assignment (656), 8-44
U
paging devices group assignment (503), 8-62
user management, 11-3
phantom DN (206), 5-25
V
pilot DN assignment (540), 8-3
PRI trunk (302), 6-36
verify communications from command prompt, A-
route choice definition (653/654/655), 8-47
7
route definition (524/525/526), 8-15
voice mail, 8-4
route schedule record sheets (523/528), 8-17
W
shared D channel (316), 6-42
WinAdmin configuration, 11-2
station data (208/210/216/502/516), 5-31
Windows 2000 installation, 2-2
system call forward (500/504), 4-17
worksheets
system speed dial (501), 4-18
10-button and 20-button telephones, 5-18~5-
system voice mail (579), 8-7
19
trunk assignment (300), 6-11
parameter selection, 5-17
trunk timer (310), 6-25
slot assignment, 4-2
voice mail port data (580), 8-8
S
set up personal web tools, A-5
set up private network settings for CTX
WinAdmin, A-6
setup
analog trunk, 3-10
ISDN PRI, 3-11~3-12
station, 3-10
T1 trunk, 3-11
slot assignment worksheet, 4-2
SmartMedia card, B-46
software installation sequence, 2-2, A-1
start/stop/store trace data, 10-1
station PDN, 3-3
Strata CTX100 update, B-48
Strata CTX670 update, B-50
Strata Net private networking, 8-35
Strata Net programming overview, 8-42
system call forward, 4-16
T
telephone button commands, B-4
telephone button overview, B-3
telephone button pad record sheets, 5-18~5-19
tools
download, 11-1
tools and profile, 11-1
trace function, B-52
trace functions, 10-1
trap IP setup, 9-14
IN-6
Strata CTX Programming Manual 12/01

---

Document Outline

• Back to Home Page
• Title Page
• Publication Information
• License Agreement
• Limited Warranty
• Contents
• Introduction
  • Organization
  • Conventions
  • Related Documents/Media
    • General Description
    • Installation and Programming
    • User Guides
    • Quick Reference Guides
    • CD-ROMs
• Chapter 1 - CTX WinAdmin Overview
  • CTX WinAdmin Application Software
  • Flexible Communication Interface
  • Internet Access
• Chapter 2 - Installation
  • Hardware
    • Hardware Requirements
    • Hardware Installation
  • Windows 2000 Installation
  • Guided Software Installation
  • Advanced Software Installation
• Chapter 3 - Strata CTX Programming Guidelines
  • Step 1: Use Default AutoProgramming to Start up
    • Limitations
    • Station and BIOU Auto-Programming
    • Station PDN Auto-Programming
    • CO Line Auto Programming
    • CTX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto Programming
    • Default Feature Access Codes
  • Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
  • Step 3: Program CTX for First Time
    • Review Program Flow
  • Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
    • Station Setup
    • Trunk Setup … Analog
    • Trunk Setup … T1
    • Trunk Setup … ISDN PRI
    • Miscellaneous
  • Step 5: Establish Connection with Strata CTX
  • Step 6: Review Program Viewer GUI
    • CTX WinAdmin Pages
    • CTX WinAdmin Toolbar
    • Command Table Link
    • Station Assignment Menu
    • Create, Clone, Copy and Delete
• Chapter 4 - System
  • 100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
    • Card Assignment Record Sheets
  • 102 Flexible Numbering Plan Access Codes
    • Flexible Numbering Default Settings
  • 117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
  • 103 Class of Service
    • COS Record Sheet
  • 104 System Timer
  • 105 System Data
  • System Call Forward
    • 500 System Call Forward Assignment
    • 504 System Call Forward Operation Status
    • System Call Forward Record Sheets
  • 501 System Speed Dial
  • Day Night Service
    • 112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
    • 106 Day/Night Mode �Type of DayŽ Mapping Table Assignment
    • 113 Day/Night Mode Daily Schedule Assignment
    • Day/Night Mode Record Sheet
  • PAD Table
    • 107 PAD Table Assignment
    • 108 PAD Group Assignment
    • 114 PAD Conference Assignment
  • 110 Password
  • 109 Music on Hold
  • I/O Device
    • 801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
    • 803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
    • 804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
  • 115 Advisory Messages
  • 116 Data Initialize
• Chapter 5 - Station
  • Assignment
    • Basic/200 Station Data
    • 204 DKT Parameters
    • 214 DSS Console Assignment
    • Key
    • Data
    • Page Group
  • 206 Phantom DN
  • 209 Hunt Group
    • Hunt Group Record Sheet
    • 218 Station Hunt Assignments
  • 516 Station Speed Dial
    • Station Data Record Sheets
  • ISDN
    • 202 ISDN BRI Station
    • 217 ISDN Station Data
• Chapter 6 - Trunks
  • ILG
    • 304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
  • 306 Outgoing Line Groups
  • 300 Trunk Assignment
  • 313 Caller ID Assignment
    • Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet
  • 309 Direct Inward Dialing
    • DID Assignment Record Sheet
  • 318 DID Intercept Assignments
    • DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet
  • Service
    • 311 DISA Security Code
    • 319 Intercept Treatment
  • Timer/DIT
    • 308 Trunk Timer
    • 310 DIT Assignment
  • 315 T1 Trunk Card
  • ISDN
    • 317 ISDN BRI Trunk
    • 302 PRI Trunks
    • Call-by-Call
    • 320 B Channel
    • 316 Shared DChannel
    • Calling Number
• Chapter 7 - Attendant
  • 404 Attendant Group Assignment
    • Attendant Group Record Sheet
  • 400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
• Chapter 8 - Services
  • 540 Pilot DN Assignment
    • Pilot DN Assignment Record Sheet
  • Voice Mail
    • Voice Mail Ports Only
    • Telephone Station Ports
    • 579 System Voice Mail Data
    • 580 Voice Mail Port Data
  • Least Cost Routing/Destination Restriction
    • LCR/DR Overview
    • LCR Assignment
    • Route Define
    • Route Schedule
    • Public Holidays and LCR Time Zones
    • DR Overview
    • LCR/DR Screening
    • DR
    • Account Codes
    • 509 DR Override by System Speed Dial
    • 510 COS Override Assignment
  • Networking
    • Strata Net Private Networking
    • Configuration
  • Strata Net Programming Overview
    • 656 Node ID Assignment
    • Private Route Choice Definition
    • Mapping
    • Miscellaneous
  • External Devices
    • Door Phones
    • 515 View BIOU Control Relay Assignments
    • 503 Paging Devices Group Assignments
  • 550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group
    • Emergency Call Group Assignment Record Sheet
• Chapter 9 - Operation
  • System Setup
    • 900 CTX Restart
    • 901 Display Version
    • 902 Set Time and Date
  • 908 Smart Media
    • CTX Smart Media Directories
  • 911 Remote Program Update
  • 910 Data Backup
  • 916 TCP/IP Configuration
  • FTP User Accounts
  • File Information
  • Community Name
  • 909 MAC Address
  • Trap Destinations
  • License Control
    • License Issue
    • License Activate
  • License Information
• Chapter 10 - Maintenance
  • Trace Function
    • Trace Data
  • Event Trace Control
    • 903 Start/Stop Trace
    • 904 ISDN Trace Location
    • 905 All ISDN Trunk Trace Selection
    • 906 Change Trace Side
  • Error Alarm Log
  • 907 System Admin Log
  • Memory Access Operation
  • Flash Memory Test
  • Component Status/Control
    • Main
• Chapter 11 - Tools and Profile
  • Tools
    • Download
  • Profile
    • Customize
    • User Management
• Appendix A - Windows NT 4.0 Installation
  • Step 1: Install Windows NT 4.0 Workstation
  • Step 2: Install Windows NT 4.0 SP6a
  • Step 3: Install/Set up RAS
    • Install RAS
    • Set up RAS
  • Step 4: Add SNMP Services to Your Network Settings
  • Step 5: Install and Set up Internet Explorer 5.5
  • Step 6: Install Windows NT Workstation Option Pack 4.0
  • Step 7: Install WMI Packages
    • WMI Core Package
    • WMI SNMP Package
  • Step 8: Install CTX WinAdmin
  • Step 9: Set Up Personal Web Tools
  • Step 10: Set up Private Network Settings for CTX WinAdmin
  • Step 11: Verify Communications from a Command Prompt
  • Troubleshooting CTX WinAdmin Installation
    • Correcting NIC Recognition Errors
• Appendix B - Button Programming
  • Record Sheet Overview
    • Programming Section Layout
  • Telephone Button Overview
    • Telephone Button Commands
  • Button Programming Examples
    • Program 100
    • Program 200
    • Program 204
    • Program 208
    • Program 205
  • Button Programming Procedures
    • Step 1: Enter Program Mode
    • Step 2: Enter Program Number
    • Step 3: Enter FB00 Parameters
    • Step 4: Choose a Button Sequence
  • 100 Series Programs
  • 200 Series Programs
  • 300 Series Programs
  • 400 Series Programs
  • 500 Series Programs
  • 600 Series Programs
  • 800 Series Programs
  • Maintenance Procedures
    • SmartMedia Card
    • Data Backup
    • Restoring Programmed Data
  • Local Update
    • Strata CTX100 Update
    • Strata CTX670 Update
  • Trace Function
  • 900 Series Programs
    • System Initialize
    • Display Version
    • Set Time and Date
    • ISDN Trace Location
    • All ISDN Trunk Trace
    • Event Trace Side Change
    • System Admin Log
    • Format/Unmount SmartMedia
    • MAC Address (System Serial Number)
    • Data Backup
    • Program Update
    • Make Busy Control
  • Green intermittent blinking … PCB Make Busy Status mode is idle.
    • Regional Selection
    • IP Configuration
• Appendix C - System Error Codes
  • Common Error Code Table
  • System Programming Error Codes
  • Station Programming Error Codes
  • Trunk Programming Error Codes
  • Attendant Position Programming Error Codes
  • Service Programming Error Codes
  • Networking Programming Error Codes
  • Equipment Programming Error Codes
• Index

---